Yamaha PSR-I425 Manual de usuario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: PSR-I425

Categoría: Pianos digitales

Tipo: Manual de usuario

Este manual también es adecuado para

PortaTone PSR-I425

Owner’s Manual

2 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 3

OBSERVERA!

Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den

ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av.

ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt,

sålæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — også

selvom der or slukket på apparatets afbryder.

VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko

laitetta verkosta.

(standby)

Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb Deutschlands)

Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batterien

oder Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können bei

einer Sammelstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll abgegeben wer-

den. Informieren Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune.

(battery)

The serial number of this product may be found on the bottom of the

unit. You should note this serial number in the space provided below

and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid

identiﬁcation in the event of theft.

Model No. PSR-I425

Serial No.

(bottom)

4 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical

shock, short-circuiting, damages, ﬁre or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Only use the voltage speciﬁed as correct for the instrument. The required voltage

is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

• Use the speciﬁed adaptor (PA-3C, or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha)

only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or

overheating.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have

accumulated on it.

• Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators,

and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects

on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll

anything over it.

• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or

modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it

should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it

inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet

conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into

any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the

power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the

instrument inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.

A burning item may fall over and cause a ﬁre.

• If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a

sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or

smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch,

disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected

by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage

to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold

the plug itself and not the cord.

• Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during

electrical storms.

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.

Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the

outlet.

• Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/- polarity

markings. Failure to do so might result in overheating, ﬁre, or battery ﬂuid

leakage.

• Always replace all batteries at the same time. Do not use new batteries together

with old ones. Also, do not mix battery types, such as alkaline batteries with

manganese batteries, or batteries from different makers, or different types of

batteries from the same maker, since this can cause overheating, ﬁre, or battery

ﬂuid leakage.

• Do not dispose of batteries in ﬁre.

• Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not intended to be charged.

• When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long time,

remove the batteries from the instrument to prevent possible leakage of the

battery ﬂuid.

• Keep batteries away from children.

• If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked ﬂuid. If the battery ﬂuid

should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or skin, wash immediately with

water and consult a doctor. Battery ﬂuid is corrosive and may possibly cause

loss of sight or chemical burns.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or

heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to

prevent the possibility of panel disﬁguration or damage to the internal

components.

• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile

phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may

generate noise.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally

fall over.

Power supply/AC power adaptor

Do not open

Water warning

Fire warning

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/AC power adaptor

Battery

Location

(4)-12 1/2

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 5

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other cables.

• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is

easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off

the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power

switch is turned off, electricity is still ﬂowing to the product at the minimum

level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug

the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

• Use only the stand speciﬁed for the instrument. When attaching the stand or

rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the

internal components or result in the instrument falling over.

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the

power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all

components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes

of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume

controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners,

solvents, cleaning ﬂuids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.

• Do not insert a ﬁnger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.

• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel

or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the

power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualiﬁed

Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might

discolor the panel or keyboard.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not

use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a

high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing

loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a

physician.

Saving and backing up your data

The panel settings and some other types of data is lost when you turn off the power

to the instrument. Save the data to the Registration Memory (page 80.)

Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation.

Save important data to an external device such as a computer.

Backing up the external media

•To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you

save your important data onto two external media.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

When using a power adaptor, even when the power switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still ﬂowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not

using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.

Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations.

● Trademarks

•Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and other countries.

• The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Connections

Maintenance

Handling caution

Saving data

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modiﬁcations to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may be different from the ones on your

instrument.

(4)-12 2/2

6 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

The following is the title, credits and copyright notices for the song pre-installed in this electronic keyboard:

Composition Title : Against All Odds

Composer’s Name : Collins 0007403

This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with

respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all

computer software, style ﬁles, MIDI ﬁles, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of

such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright

has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.

This device is capable of using various types/formats of music data by optimizing them to the proper format music

data for use with the device in advance. As a result, this device may not play them back precisely as their producers

or composers originally intended.

Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is

strictly prohibited except for your personal use.

GM System Level 1

“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music

data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM

mark is afﬁxed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level.

XGlite

As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simpliﬁed version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format.

Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that

some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control

parameters and effects.

USB

USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with

peripheral Devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the power to the com-

puter is on).

Stereo Sampled Piano

The instrument has a special Portable Grand Piano Voice—created by state-of-the-art stereo sampling tech-

nology and using Yamaha’s sophisticated AWM (Advanced Wave memory) tone generation system.

Touch Response

The exceptionally natural Touch Response feature, with a convenient front panel on/off switch, gives you

maximum expressive level control over the voices. It also works in conjunction with the Dynamic Filter,

which dynamically adjusts the timbre or tone of a voice according to your playing strength—just a like a

real musical instrument!

STYLE FILE

The Style File Format is Yamaha’s original style ﬁle format which uses a unique conversion system to pro-

vide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types.

Panel Logos

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 7

Congratulations and thank you for purchasing

the Yamaha PSR-I425 PortaTone!

Please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the instrument

in order to take full advantage of its various features.

Make sure to keep this manual in a safe and handy place even after you ﬁnish reading,

and refer to it often when you need to better understand an operation or function.

The PSR-I425 package includes the following items. Please check that you have them all.

• Music rest

• Accessory CD-ROM

• Owner’s Manual

Included Accessories

● Music Rest

Insert the music rest

into the slots as shown.

8 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Special Features of the PSR-I425

■ Creating New Sounds Page 18

By adjusting just two knobs you can add varying degrees of distortion,

“sweetness,” or other characteristics to a sound to change it subtly or drasti-

cally. Parameters that can be assigned to the knobs include effect, ﬁlter, enve-

lope generator and more. You can create new sounds in real time!

■ Arpeggio Function Page 14

Similar to the arpeggio functions provided on some synthesizers, this func-

tion automatically produces arpeggios (broken chords) when you simply play

the appropriate notes on the keyboard. A variety of arpeggios can be pro-

duced by changing your ﬁngering or the arpeggio type.

■ Performance assistant technology Page 23

Play along with a song on the instrument’s keyboard and produce a perfect

performance every time ... even if you play wrong notes! All you have to do

is play on the keyboard—alternately on the left- and right-hand ranges of the

keyboard, for example—and you’ll sound like a pro as long as you play in

time with the music.

■ Play a Variety of Instrument Voices Page 28

The instrument voice that sounds when you play the keyboard can be

changed to violin, ﬂute, harp, or any of an extensive range of voices. You can

change the mood of a song written for piano, for example, by using violin to

play it instead. Experience a whole new world of musical variety.

■ Play Along with Styles Page 33

Want to play with full accompaniment? Try the auto-accompaniment Styles.

The accompaniment styles provide the equivalent of a full backing band cov-

ering a wide variety of styles from waltzes to 8-beat to euro-trance ... and

much more. Select a style that matches the music you want to play, or exper-

iment with new styles to expand your musical horizons.

104

PopBossa

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 9

Panel Logos ........................................................................... 6

Included Accessories ............................................................. 7

Special Features of the PSR-I425 ......................................... 8

Setting Up 10

Power Requirements ........................................................... 10

Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack)........... 11

Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack) .......................... 11

Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal) ......................... 11

Turning the Power On.......................................................... 11

Panel Controls and Terminals 12

Front Panel .......................................................................... 12

Rear Panel ........................................................................... 13

Quick Guide

Creating Arpeggios 14

Create Original Sounds 18

Assigning Effects to the Knobs ............................................ 18

Using the Knobs................................................................... 21

The Easy Way to Play Piano 23

Play with Both Hands........................................................... 23

Change the Song Tempo..................................................... 27

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 28

Select and Play a Voice—MAIN .......................................... 28

Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL............................ 29

Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands

—SPLIT .......................................................................... 30

Play the Grand Piano Voice................................................. 31

Drum Kits 32

Select and Play the Drum Kit ............................................... 32

Playing Styles 33

Select a Style Rhythm.......................................................... 33

Play Along with a Style ........................................................ 34

Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords.................................. 38

Using Songs 39

Select and Listen to a Song ................................................. 39

Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause.................... 40

Types of Songs .................................................................... 42

Select a Song For a Lesson 43

Lesson 1—Waiting............................................................... 43

Lesson 2—Your Tempo ....................................................... 46

Lesson 3—Minus One ......................................................... 47

Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn........................ 48

Play Using the Music Database 49

Change a Song’s Style 50

Listen to the DEMO Song for Easy Song Arranger.............. 50

Using the Easy Song Arranger ............................................ 50

Record Your Own Performance 52

Track Configuration.............................................................. 52

Recording Procedure ........................................................... 52

Song Clear—Deleting User Songs ...................................... 55

Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track

from a User Song............................................................ 55

Backup and Initialization 56

Backup ................................................................................. 56

Initialization .......................................................................... 56

Basic Operation and Displays 57

Basic Operation ................................................................... 57

Display Items ....................................................................... 59

Reference

Adding Effects 60

Harmony...............................................................................60

Adding Reverb .....................................................................61

Adding Chorus .....................................................................62

Handy Performance Features 63

The Metronome.................................................................... 63

Setting the Number of Beats per Measure,

and the Length of Each Beat ..........................................64

Adjusting the Metronome Volume........................................ 64

Tap Start ..............................................................................65

Touch Response Sensitivity................................................. 65

Pitch Bend............................................................................ 66

Pitch Controls....................................................................... 66

Controlling Arpeggio Volume with Keyboard Dynamics....... 67

One Touch Setting ...............................................................68

Adjusting the Harmony Volume............................................69

Select an EQ Setting for the Best Sound............................. 69

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions 70

Pattern Variation (Sections) .................................................70

Adjusting the Style Volume ..................................................72

Setting the Split Point........................................................... 72

Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm

(Stop Accompaniment) ...................................................73

Loading Style Files............................................................... 74

Chord Basics........................................................................ 75

Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary ..................77

Song Settings 78

Song Volume........................................................................78

A-B Repeat...........................................................................78

Muting Independent Song Parts...........................................79

Change the Melody Voice.................................................... 79

Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings 80

Saving to the Registration Memory...................................... 80

Recalling a Registration Memory .........................................81

The Functions 82

Selecting and Setting Functions...........................................82

Connecting to a Computer 85

What Is MIDI? ......................................................................85

Connecting a Personal Computer........................................ 86

Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer.....87

Remote Control of MIDI Devices..........................................88

Initial Send ...........................................................................89

Transferring Data between the Computer and Instrument... 89

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide 92

Important Notices about the CD-ROM .................................92

CD-ROM Contents............................................................... 93

System Requirements.......................................................... 94

Software Installation............................................................. 94

Appendix

Troubleshooting................................................................. 99

Scores ............................................................................... 100

Let’s play the Tabla.......................................................... 106

Voice List .......................................................................... 107

Drum Kit List .................................................................... 111

Style List ........................................................................... 114

Arpeggio List.................................................................... 115

Music Database List ........................................................ 116

Songs Provided On the Supplied CD-ROM ................... 118

Effect Type List ................................................................ 119

MIDI Implementation Chart ............................................. 120

MIDI Data Format ............................................................. 122

Specifications................................................................... 123

Index.................................................................................. 124

Contents

10 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Be sure to do the following operations BEFORE turning on the power.

Although the instrument will run either from an optional AC adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an AC

adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is more environmentally friendly than batteries and does not deplete

resources.

■ Using an AC Power Adaptor

 Make sure that the [STANDBY/ON] switch of the

instrument is set to STANDBY.

 Connect the AC power adaptor to the power supply

jack.

 Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet.

■ Using Batteries

 Open the battery compartment cover located on the

instrument’s bottom panel.

 Insert the six new batteries, being careful to follow

the polarity markings on the inside of the compart-

ment.

 Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it

locks ﬁrmly in place.

For battery operation the instrument requires six 1.5V

“D” size, R20P (LR20) or equivalent batteries. (Alkaline

batteries are recommended.) When battery power

becomes too low for proper operation, make sure to

replace all batteries, following the precautions listed

below.

If necessary, also make sure to save all important User

data (see page 56), since custom panel settings are

lost when the batteries are removed.

Power Requirements

• Use the speciﬁed adaptor (PA-3C, or an equivalent recom-

mended by Yamaha) only. The use of other adaptors may

result in irreparable damage to both the adaptor and the

instrument.

WARNING

• Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the instrument,

or during electrical storms.

CAUTION

Adaptor

AC outlet





• Connecting the AC power adaptor automatically supplies power from

the adaptor and overrides battery power, even when batteries are

installed.

NOTE

• Use only manganese or alkaline batteries for this instrument.

Other types of batteries (including rechargeable batteries) may

exhibit a sudden drop in power when the batteries are low, possi-

bly resulting in a loss of ﬂash memory data.

• Be sure to install the batteries in the same direction, maintaining

the correct polarity (as shown). Incorrect battery installation may

result in heat, ﬁre and/or leaking of corrosive chemicals.

• When the batteries run down, replace them with a complete set of

six new batteries. NEVER mix old and new batteries. Do not use

different kinds of batteries (e.g. alkaline and manganese) at the

same time.

• If the instrument will not be used for an extended period of time,

remove the batteries to prevent possible ﬂuid leakage.

• Please use the power adaptor when transferring data to ﬂash

memory. Batteries (including rechargeable types) can be drained

rapidly by this type of operation. If the batteries do become

drained during a data transfer, both the data being transferred and

the data currently in the transfer destination will be lost.

CAUTION

Setting Up

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 11

Make all necessary connections below BEFORE turning the power on.

The PSR-I425 speakers are automatically shut off when

a plug is inserted into this jack.

The PHONES/OUTPUT jack also functions as an exter-

nal output. You can connect the PHONES/OUTPUT

jack to a keyboard ampliﬁer, stereo system, mixer, tape

recorder, or other line-level audio device to send the

instrument’s output signal to that device.

The sustain function lets you produce a natural sustain

as you play by pressing a footswitch. Plug the Yamaha

FC4 or FC5 footswitch into this jack and use it to switch

sustain on and off.

Connect the instrument’s USB terminal to the USB ter-

minal of a computer, and you can transfer performance

data and song ﬁles between the two (page 86). To use

the USB data-transfer features you’ll need to do the fol-

lowing:

• First, make sure the POWER switch on the instru-

ment is set to OFF, then use a USB cable to con-

nect the instrument to the computer. After making

the connections, turn on the power of the instru-

ment.

• Install the USB MIDI driver on your computer.

Installation of the USB MIDI driver is described on

page 94.

Turn down the volume by turning the [MASTER VOL-

UME] control to the left and press the [STANDBY/ON]

switch to turn on the power. Press the [STANDBY/ON]

switch again to turn the power OFF.

Backup data in the ﬂash memory is loaded to the instru-

ment when the power is turned on. If no backup data

exists on ﬂash memory, all instrument settings are

restored to the initial factory defaults when the power is

turned on.

Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack)

Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack)

•Avoid listening with the headphones at high volume for long peri-

ods of time; doing so may not only result in ear fatigue, it may be

damaging to your hearing.

WARNING

•To prevent damage to the speakers, set the volume of the external

devices at the minimum setting before connecting them. Failure to

observe these cautions may result in electric shock or equipment

damage. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all devices at their

minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while

playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.

CAUTION

• Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUS-

TAIN jack before turning on the power.

• Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing this

changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed

footswitch operation.

NOTE

Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal)

Turning the Power On

• Make sure to purchase a quality USB cable at a musical instrument

store, computer store or electrical appliance store.

NOTE

• Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is

still ﬂowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are

not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the

AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet, and/or remove the bat-

teries from the instrument.

CAUTION

•Never attempt to turn the power off when a “WRITING!” message

is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the ﬂash memory

and result in data loss.

CAUTION

12 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Panel Controls and Terminals

q [STANDBY/ON] switch .................... page 11

w [MASTER VOLUME] control.... pages 11, 24

e [TOUCH ON/OFF] button ................ page 65

r [HARMONY ON/OFF] button .......... page 60

t [DUAL ON/OFF] button ................... page 29

y [SPLIT ON/OFF] button ................... page 30

u [DEMO] button................................. page 40

i LESSON [START] button ................ page 44

o LESSON [L/R] button ...................... page 44

!0 [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button.......... page 14

!1 [PERFORMANCE

ASSISTANT ON/OFF] button .......... page 23

!2 [FUNCTION] button ......................... page 82

!3 [MUSIC DATABASE] button ............ page 49

!4 [METRONOME ON/OFF] button ..... page 63

!5 [PORTABLE GRAND] button.......... page 31

!6 Dial ............................................pages 58, 82

!7 CATEGORY [ ] and [ ]

buttons......................................pages 58, 82

!8 [SONG] button................................. page 39

!9 [EASY SONG ARRANGER]

button............................................... page 50

@0 [STYLE] button................................ page 33

@1 [VOICE] button ................................ page 28

@2 Number buttons [0]–[9],

[+] and [-] buttons ....................pages 58, 82

@3 [ASSIGN] button.............................. page 18

@4 [A] and [B] knobs............................ page 21

@5 [ ](REPEAT & LEARN)/

[ACMP ON/OFF] button ...........pages 48, 34

Front Panel

001

GrandPno

@3 @4

@5 @6 @7 @8 @9 #0 #1

i o

Song Category List

(page 41)

Style Category List

(page 114)

Display

(page 59)

Panel Controls and Terminals

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 13

@6 [A-B REPEAT]/

[SYNC STOP] button ............... pages 78, 71

@7 [PAUSE]/

[SYNC START] button ............. pages 40, 70

@8 [REW]/

[INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button .... pages 40, 71

@9 [FF]/

[MAIN/AUTO FILL] button ....... pages 40, 71

#0 [START/STOP] button ....... pages 33, 40, 58

#1 [TEMPO/TAP] button ....................... page 27

#2 REGIST MEMORY

[●] (MEMORY/BANK),

[1], [2] buttons ................................. page 80

#3 SONG MEMORY

[REC], [1]–[5], [A] buttons............... page 52

#4 PITCH BEND wheel ......................... page 66

#5 Drum Kit icons................................. page 32

#6 USB terminal ............................pages 11, 86

#7 SUSTAIN jack................................... page 11

#8 PHONES/OUTPUT jack ................... page 11

#9 DC IN 12V jack................................. page 10

Rear Panel

#2 #3

#6 #7 #8 #9

Voice Category List

(page 107)

Rear Panel

Music Database List

(page 116)

14 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Creating Arpeggios

The arpeggio function lets you create arpeggios (broken chords) by

simply playing the required notes on the keyboard. For example, you

could play the notes of a triad—the root, third, and ﬁfth—and the arpeg-

gio function will automatically create a variety of interesting arpeggio-

type phrases. By changing the arpeggio type and the notes you play it

is possible to create a wide range of patterns and phrases that can be

used for music production as well as performance.

Press the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button to turn the arpeg-

gio function on.

● Voices and the Arpeggio Function

This instrument lets you select a variety of “voices” that you can play

via the keyboard. When you select a voice number between 129 and 143

the arpeggio function will automatically be engaged so you can start

playing arpeggios immediately. The arpeggio function will automati-

cally be turned off when you select any other voice.

If you want to use voices 129–143 for normal performance without the

arpeggio function, press the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button to turn the

arpeggio function off after selecting the voice.

● Voices for which the arpeggio function is automatically turned on.

Voice No. Voice Name Voice No. Voice Name

129 Teen Tal C 137 Square Pulse

130 Teen Tal F 138 Trance

131 Teen Tal A 139 Synth Echo

132 Dadra D 140 Piano Arpeggio

133 Dadra E 141 Guitar Chord

134 Dadra G 142 Guitar Arpeggio

135 Synth Sequence 143 Massive Percussion

136 Chord Sequence

001

GrandPno

The ARPEGGIO icon appears when

the arpeggio function is on.

• See “Try Playing a Variety of

Instrument Voices” on page 28.

NOTE

Quick Guide

Creating Arpeggios

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 15

Select an arpeggio type.

The most suitable arpeggio type is automatically selected when you

select a voice, but you can easily select any other arpeggio type.

Hold the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button for longer than a second and

the name of the current arpeggio type will appear in the display. Rotate

the dial to select the desired arpeggio type. A list of the available arpeg-

gio types is provided on page 115.

Play the keyboard.

The sound of the arpeggio produced will change according to the num-

ber of notes you play and the area of the keyboard you play in. You can

save the instrument’s settings at this point and then recall them at any

time you want to repeat your performance (page 80). You can also

record your performance (page 52).

The arpeggio function applies only to the main and dual voices, and

does not affect split voices. The arpeggio function cannot be used at the

same time as the harmony function.

When you have ﬁnished playing with the arpeggio func-

tion, press the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button to turn it off.

DownOct1

ARP Type

Hold for longer

than a second

The currently selected

arpeggio type

• Make sure that you are not

pressing any of the keyboard’s

keys while turning the arpeggio

function on or off.

NOTE

Creating Arpeggios

16 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Create a Pop Tune

You can play a style and specify the style chords with your left hand while playing arpeggios with your

right hand to create interesting sonic textures and backgrounds.

1 Select the keyboard voice (page 28).

For this example we’ll use a grand piano voice, so press the [PORTABLE GRAND]

button. This convenient voice selection method lets you instantly select a voice with a

single button press.

2 After turning the arpeggio function on, select an arpeggio type (steps 1

and 2 on the preceding page).

For this example select “02 DownOct1”.

That completes preparation to use the arpeggio function.

3 Select the style you want to play along with the arpeggio function.

A “style” is an automatic accompaniment pattern.

Press the [STYLE] button and the name of the currently selected style will appear in the

display. Rotate the dial to select the desired style. For this example we’ll use the “001

8BtModrn” (8 Beat Modern) style.

8BtModrn

001

• Refer to “Playing Styles” on page 33.

NOTE

Creating Arpeggios

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 17

4 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto accompaniment on.

When auto accompaniment is turned on, the left-hand section of the keyboard is used only

for specifying accompaniment chords.

5 Press the [START/STOP] button.

The rhythm accompaniment will start.

6 Begin playing.

Listen carefully to the rhythm of the style, then play the notes shown in the score at the

beginning of a measure. The style and arpeggio will begin playing together.

The accompaniment will change accordingly each time you play a new left-hand chord.

Of course you can also change your right-hand ﬁngering to produce interesting changes.

If you’re not comfortable with right-hand playing yet, you could use the performance

assistant technology feature described on page 23. When the performance assistant feature

is on, playing any right-hand key will always produce musically appropriate notes!

Whenever you’re playing a style as well as a right-hand part, be sure that your left hand

plays only to the left of the split point and your right hand plays only to the right of the

split point. (page 30)

8BtModrn

001

The ACMP ON icon will

appear.

• Refer to “When automatic accompaniment is on ...” on page 34.

NOTE

CAm FG7sus4

Split point

18 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Create Original Sounds

The two knobs located in the lower left area of the panel can be used to

add variations to the sound being played, transforming the sound in a

variety of musical ways. Filter, envelope generator, and other effects

can be assigned to the two knobs as required. In this section we’ll

explain how effects can be assigned to the knobs, and provide a few

tips for their use.

Repeatedly press the [ASSIGN] button to sequentially select the ﬁve effect combinations provided: z →

x → c → v → b → z → ... etc. The currently selected combination is shown in the display.

z–c affect the main and dual voices only. Split voices will not be affected. Styles and songs will also not

be affected.

v–b affect styles only.

Assigning Effects to the Knobs

001

GrandPno

The assignable knob effects are pre-programmed in the pairs listed above.

It is not possible to assign different effect combinations.

Number/Effect Knob A Knob B

z Filter Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance

x Effect Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level

c EG Attack Time Release Time

v Style Filter Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance

b Style Tempo Tempo –No Effect–

Create Original Sounds

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 19

z Filter

Filter effects shape sound by allowing only a speciﬁed range of frequencies

to pass and/or by producing a resonance peak at the ﬁlter’s “cutoff” fre-

quency. Filter effects can be used to create a range of synthesizer-like

sounds.

* Filter effects can sometimes cause distortion in the bass frequencies.

Some hints for using the ﬁlter effects are provided on page 22.

Knob A adjusts the ﬁlter’s cutoff frequency, and therefore the brightness of

the sound.

Knob B adjusts the amount of resonance applied at the ﬁlter’s cutoff fre-

quency. Increasing the resonance emphasizes the frequencies at the cutoff

frequency, and thus “strengthens” the perceived effect of the ﬁlter.

x Effect

Reverb reproduces the acoustic ambience of a concert hall or club, while

chorus produces a layered “multi-instrument” effect.

Knob A adjusts the depth of the reverb effect, and Knob B adjusts the depth

of the chorus effect.

Filter ResonanceFilter Cutoff

Cutoff Frequency

Level

Frequencies in this

range are passed.

Frequencies in this

range are cut off.

Frequency

Resonance

Frequency

Level

Chorus Send

Level

Reverb Send

Level

Create Original Sounds

20 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

c EG (Envelope Generator)

Envelope Generator effects determine how the level of the sound varies over

time. You can make the attack faster for a more percussive sound or slower

for a violin-like sound, for example. Or you can lengthen or shorten the sus-

tain to most ideally match the music.

Knob A adjusts attack time (the amount of time it takes the sound to reach

maximum level when a key is played).

Knob B adjusts release time (the amount of time it takes for the sound to

decay to silence after a key is released).

v Style Filter

In this case the knobs apply the ﬁlter effect to the style being played. Knob A

and Knob B have the same functions as for “z Filter” described on the pre-

ceding page.

b Style Tempo

Knob A adjusts the tempo of the style and arpeggios. Rotating the knob

clockwise increases the tempo while rotating it counterclockwise decreases

the tempo. The knob’s center position produces the initial default tempo.

Release TimeAttack Time

AT TAC K

RELEASE

DECAY

Key Played

Sustain Level

Key Released

Time

Level

Filter ResonanceFilter Cutoff

–No Effect–Tempo

Create Original Sounds

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 21

Select the voice you want to play on the keyboard.

The name of the currently selected voice will appear in the display when

you press the [VOICE] button. Use the dial to select the desired voice.

For this example we want to use a synth-lead type voice, so select “97

SquareLd” (Square-wave Lead).

Press the [ASSIGN] button as many times as necessary to

select “z FILTER” (“z” will appear in the display).

Knob A can now be used to adjust the ﬁlter cutoff frequency, and Knob

B can be used to adjust the resonance.

Rotate Knob B to its maximum setting (all the way to the

right).

Rotating the knob to the right while the volume is set to a high level can

result in distortion. If this occurs, reduce the volume level.

Using the Knobs

097

SquareLd

097

SquareLd

“z” appears here.

Filter

Resonance

Filter

Cutoff

Create Original Sounds

22 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Play with the right hand while operating Knob A with the

left hand.

If you select a different keyboard voice the knobs will be reset and the

ideal settings for the selected voice will be automatically recalled. In the

same way, if the “v STYLE FILTER” effect is selected, the knobs will

be reset if a different style is selected. If you create an original setting

you like, it might be a good idea to save it in the instrument’s Registra-

tion Memory (page 80) so you can recall the same settings again at any

time. You can also record performances using original sounds you’ve

created (page 52).

The chart below lists some interesting ways to use the various effects

that can be assigned to the knobs.

● Some Ideas for Using the Knobs

Changing the knob settings does not immediately change the sound. Newly

assigned effects will only change the sound when the knobs are ﬁrst

operated after the new effect has been selected.

Number/Effect Try This

z FILTER

Select a synth-type lead or pad voice (page 107). Turn Knob B all the way up and operate Knob A

while playing for some spacey, ﬂoating 1980’s effects.

x EFFECT

Select a voice that sounds as though it already has reverb and chorus effects applied, and turn

Knob A and Knob B all the way down to hear the “direct” sound of the voice. You can then turn the

Knob A and Knob B settings up to add extra impact and richness to the voice.

c EG

Select a piano voice, and turn Knob B all the way up and Knob A to about the 3 o’clock position.

This should give you a majestic, organ-like sound. The attack time is quite long so play the keys

and hold them to let the sound come in fully. Ideal for slow pieces.

v STYLE FILTER

Select style 31, Euro Trance. Turn accompaniment on and start style playback (page 34). Set

Knob B to about 3 o’clock, and Knob A to about 8 o’clock. The overall sound of the style should be

a bit mufﬂed, with the drums emphasized for solid rhythmic impact.

b STYLE TEMPO Play a style and/or arpeggio (page 14) and use Knob A to adjust the tempo.

Filter

Resonance

Filter

Cutoff

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 23

The Easy Way to Play Piano

This instrument includes a performance assistant technology feature

that lets you play along with a song and sound like a great pianist (even

though you might be making lots of mistakes)! In fact, you can play any

notes and still sound good!

So even if you can’t play piano and can’t read a note of music, you can

have some musical fun. It’s never too late to start learning!

Refer to page 25 for more information on using performance assistant technology to help you play.

Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT ON/OFF] button.

This turns on the performance assistant technology feature.

The P.A.T. icon and “PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT” will be dis-

played.

Select a song.

Press the [SONG] button, and the song number and name will be dis-

played. You can use the dial or other selection controls to select a differ-

ent song.

For this example try selecting the “010 AveMaria”.

Play with Both Hands

Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT ON/

OFF] button to turn the function on or off.

Icon will appear when performance

assistant technology is on.

011

Nocturne

010

AveMaria

The song displayed here

will be played.

Song number

Song name

The Easy Way to Play Piano

24 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Press the [START/STOP] button.

Song playback will begin.

The basic pattern will repeat. Listen to four measures while memorizing

the basic pattern. It’s your tune to play the part from the ﬁfth measure.

Play on the keyboard.

Play the score on the left along with the accompaniment using both

hands. You can even play the same keys over and over: C, E, G, C, E, G,

C, E. Performance assistant technology will make sure that the notes

will come out as if they were played according to the score on the right.

Keep playing, and performance assistant technology will continue to

“correct” the notes that you play.

You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP]

button.

● What is a “Song”?

Of course you know the normal meaning of the word, but for this

instrument the term “song” also refers to the data that makes up a piece of

music. You can listen to the songs, use them for lessons, and use them with

a range of other functions (page 39).

Adjusts volume.

The Easy Way to Play Piano

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 25

Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT ON/OFF] button to

turn the performance assistant technology feature off.

The complete score for Ave Maria is provided on page 102.

Use the Performance Assistant to Play Like a Pro!

To begin, try to feel the rhythm of the song. Then, with your hands

spread as shown in the illustration, simply play the keyboard alter-

nately with your left and right hands (any notes will do).

How does it sound? You’ll get acceptable results no matter where

you play thanks to performance assistant technology!

Next try the three playing methods illustrated below. Different ways

of playing produce different results.

Once you get a feel for it, try playing chords with your left hand and

a melody with your right ... or any other combination.

To use the performance assistant technology feature it is necessary to play a song that includes chord data, or a

style with auto accompaniment on.

If a song includes the required data, the chords are shown on the right side of the display (page 59).

You will get even better

results if you match your

left-hand rhythm to the

rhythm of the chord indica-

tor in the display.

Sounds like you’re

playing the right

notes!

● Play with the left and right hands

at the same timing—type 1.

● Play with the left and right hands

at the same timing—type 2.

● Play alternately with the left and

right hands—type 3.

Play 3 notes at once

with your right hand.

Play 1 note at a time with your right

hand (for example: index ﬁnger

→

middle ﬁnger

→

ring ﬁnger).

Play 3 notes at once with

your right hand.

The Easy Way to Play Piano

26 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Next try playing the Chopin Nocturne.

The procedure is that same as that described for playing

Ave Maria on pages 23–25. Select “011 Nocturne”.

Listen to eight measures, then begin playing from the

ninth measure.

Play the keys shown in the illustration. Keep playing F, A and C with

your left hand and the correct notes will sound as the song proceeds.

When you get used to playing the left hand part, refer to “The Easy Way

to Play Piano” on page 23 and try adding the right-hand part.

Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT ON/OFF] button to

turn the performance assistant technology feature off.

The complete score for Nocturne is provided on page 104.

011

Nocturne

The Easy Way to Play Piano

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 27

When using the performance assistant technology or in other situations in which the tempo of the song is

too fast or too slow for you, you can change the tempo as required. Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button. The

tempo display will appear and you can use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the [0] to [9] number buttons

to set to tempo to anywhere from 011 and 280 quarter-note beats per minute.

You can return to the original tempo by simultaneously pressing the [+] and [-] buttons.

● About the Beat Display

The arrow marks in the beat display ﬂash in time with the rhythm of the song or style.

Change the Song Tempo

Current tempo value

090

Tempo

Second beat Fourth beat

First beat of measure Third beat

28 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments,

this instrument has a large range of voices that includes guitar, bass,

strings, sax, trumpet, drums and percussion, sound effects … a wide

variety of musical sounds.

This procedure selects the main voice you will play on the keyboard.

Press the [VOICE] button.

The voice number and name will be displayed.

Select the voice you want to play.

While watching the displayed voice name rotate the dial. The available

voices will be selected and displayed in sequence. The voice selected

here becomes the main voice.

For this example select the “092 Flute” voice.

Play the keyboard.

Try selecting and playing a variety of voices.

Select and Play a Voice—MAIN

001

GrandPno

Voice number

Voice name

Appears when the Voice mode

is engaged.

•You can also select the voice

using the CATEGORY [ ] and

[] buttons after pressing the

[VOICE] button. (page 58)

NOTE

092

Flute

Select 092 Flute

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 29

You can select a second voice which will play in addition to the main voice when you play the keyboard.

The second voice is known as the “dual” voice.

Press the [DUAL ON/OFF] button.

The [DUAL ON/OFF] button turns the dual voice on or off.

When turned on the dual voice icon will appear in the display. The cur-

rently selected dual voice will sound in addition to the main voice when

you play the keyboard.

Press and hold the [DUAL ON/OFF] button for longer than

a second.

“D.VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, then the currently

selected dual voice will be displayed.

Select the desired dual voice.

Watch the displayed dual voice and rotate the dial until the voice you

want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the dual voice.

For this example try selecting the “109 Vibraphone” voice.

Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL

• The dual voice feature cannot

be used during a song lesson

(page 43).

NOTE

092

Flute

Dual voice icon

•You can also select the Dual

Voice display by pressing the

[FUNCTION] button and then

using the CATEGORY [ ] and

[] buttons to select the

“D.Voice” item.

NOTE

D.Voice

Hold for longer

than a second

110

Marimba

The currently selected

dual voice

109

Vibes

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

30 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Play the keyboard.

Try selecting and playing a range of dual voices.

In the split mode you can play different voices to the left and right of the keyboard “split point”. The main

and dual voices can be played to the right of the split point, while the voice played to the left of the split

point is known as the “split voice”. The split point setting can be changed as required (page 72).

Press the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button.

The [SPLIT ON/OFF] button turns the split voice on or off.

When turned on the split voice icon will appear in the display. The cur-

rently selected split voice will sound to the left of the keyboard split

point.

Press and hold the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button for longer than

a second.

“S.VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, then the currently

selected split voice will be displayed.

Two voices will sound at the same time.

Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—SPLIT

Main voice and dual voiceSplit voice

Split point

• The split voice feature cannot

be used during a song lesson

(page 43).

NOTE

092

Flute

Split voice icon

•You can also select the Split

Voice display by pressing the

[FUNCTION] button and then

using the CATEGORY [ ] and

[] buttons to select the

“S.Voice” item.

NOTE

Hold for longer

than a second

042

FngrBass

S.Voice

The currently selected

SPLIT voice

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 31

Select the desired split voice.

Watch the displayed split voice and rotate the dial until the voice you

want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the split voice

which will play to the left of the keyboard split point. For this example

try selecting the “033 Folk Guitar” voice.

Play the keyboard.

Try selecting and playing a range of split voices.

When you just want to play piano, all you have to do is press one convenient button.

Press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button.

The “001 Grand Piano” voice will be selected.

033

Folk Gtr

Play the Grand Piano Voice

• When you press the [PORTA-

BLE GRAND] button all settings

other than touch sensitivity are

turned off. The dual and split

voices will also be turned off, so

only the Grand Piano voice will

play over the entire keyboard.

NOTE

32 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Drum Kits

This instrument includes a range of drum kits and unique sound effects

you can use for entertainment. Laughter, babbling brooks, jet ﬂy-bys,

eerie effects, and much more. These sounds can be a great way to

enhance the mood at parties.

Drum kits are collections of drum and percussion instruments.

When drum kits (Voice numbers 117–128, 152, 153) are selected, you can play different percussion sounds

directly from the keyboard.

Press the [VOICE] button.

Select the desired Drum kit.

Select one of the Voice numbers from 117–128, 152, 153 by rotating the

dial.

* When Voice number 117 is selected, the icons printed above the keyboard indicates the instruments assigned to each key.

Try out each key.

You’ll hear bongo drums, congas, maracas, and more-a comprehensive

variety of drum and percussion sounds.

Details on the instruments and key assignments of each drum kit can be

found in the Drum Kit List on page 111.

● Drum Kit List

117 Standard Kit 1 122 Analog Kit 127 SFX Kit 1

118 Standard Kit 2 123 Dance Kit 128 SFX Kit 2

119 Room Kit 124 Jazz Kit 152 Tabla Kit

120 Rock Kit 125 Brush Kit 153 Indian Kit

121 Electronic Kit 126 Symphony Kit

Select and Play the Drum Kit

117

Std.Kit1

Example: 117 Standard Kit 1

Ride Cymbal 1

Ta mbourine

Cowbell

Vibraslap

Bongo L

Hi-Hat Open

Crash Cymbal 1

Hand Clap

Hi-Hat Closed

Hi-Hat Pedal

Open Rim Shot

Side Stick

Castanet

Sticks

Brush Tap

Brush Slap

Conga H Open

Timbale L

Agogo L

Maracas

Guiro Short

Claves

Cuica Mute

Tr ia ngle Mute

Shaker

Chinese Cymbal

Ride Cymbal Cup

Splash Cymbal

Crash Cymbal 2

Ride Cymbal 2

Bongo H

Conga H Mute

Mid Tom L

Mid Tom H

High Tom

Snare Tight

Floor Tom L

Low Tom

Floor Tom H

Kick Tight

Kick

Snare

Snare Roll

Snare Soft

Kick Soft

Seq Click H

Brush Swirl

Brush Tap Swirl

Conga L

Timbale H

Agogo H

Cabasa

Samba Whistle H

Samba Whistle L

Guiro Long

Wood Block H

Wood Block L

Cuica Open

Tr ia ngle Open

Jingle Bells

Bell Tree

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 33

Playing Styles

This instrument has an auto accompaniment feature that produces

accompaniment (rhythm + bass + chords) in the style you choose to

match chords you play with your left hand. You can select from 162 dif-

ferent styles covering a range of musical genres and time signatures

(see page 114 for a complete list of the available styles).

In this section we’ll learn how to use the auto accompaniment features.

Most styles includes a rhythm part. You can select from a wide variety of rhythmic types—indian, rock,

blues, Euro trance, and many, many more. Let’s begin by listening to just the basic rhythm. The rhythm part

is played using percussion instruments only.

Press the [STYLE] button.

The style number and name will appear in the display.

Select a style.

Use the dial to select the style you want to use.

A list of all the available styles is provided on page 114.

Press the [START/STOP] button.

The style rhythm will start playing.

Press the [START/STOP] button a second time when you want to stop

playback.

Select a Style Rhythm

001

8BtModrn

Style Number

Style Name

This icon appears when a style

number and name is displayed.

104

PopBossa

• Style numbers 138, 150–162

have no rhythm part and there-

fore no rhythm will play if you

use them for the above exam-

ple. For these styles ﬁrst turn

auto accompaniment on as

described on page 34, press the

[SYNC START] button, and the

accompaniment bass and chord

parts will begin playing when

you play a key to the left of the

keyboard split point.

NOTE

Playing Styles

34 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

You learned how to select a style rhythm on the preceding page.

Here we’ll see how to add bass and chord accompaniment to the basic rhythm to produce a full, rich accom-

paniment that you can play along with.

Press the [STYLE] button and select the desired style.

Turn automatic accompaniment on.

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button.

Pressing this button a second time will turn automatic accompaniment

off.

Turn sync start on.

Press the [SYNC START] button to turn the sync start function on.

When sync start is on, the bass and chord accompaniment included in a

style will start playing as soon as you play a note to left of the keyboard

split point. Press the button a second time to turn the sync start function

off.

● When automatic accompaniment is on ...

The area of the keyboard to the left of the split point (54 : F#2) becomes the

“auto accompaniment range” and is used only for specifying the

accompaniment chords.

Play Along with a Style

This icon appears when auto-

matic accompaniment is on.

104

PopBossa

• The keyboard split point can be

changed as required: refer to

page 72.

NOTE

Split point (54 : F#2)

Auto accompani-

ment range

Flashes when sync

start is on.

104

PopBossa

Playing Styles

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 35

Play a left-hand chord to start the style.

You can still “play” chords even if you don’t actually know any chords.

This instrument will recognize even a single note as a chord. Try playing

from one to three notes at the same time to the left of the split point. The

accompaniment will change according to the left-hand notes you play.

Play a variety of left-hand chords while playing a melody

with your right hand.

Press the [START/STOP] button to stop style playback

when you’re done.

You can switch style “sections” to add variety to the accompaniment.

Refer to “Pattern Variation (Sections)” on page 70.

Try this!

Scores for some chord progressions are provided on page 36.

These examples should help you get a feel for what types of chord

progressions sound good with the styles.

Auto accompani-

ment range

Split point

Auto accompani-

ment range

Split point

Playing Styles

36 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Styles Are More Fun When You Understand Chords

Chords, created by playing multiple notes at the same time, are the basis for harmonic accompaniment.

In this section we’ll take a look at sequences of different chords played one after another, or “chord

sequences.” Since each chord has it’s own unique “color”—even if it’s different ﬁngerings of the same

chord—the chords you choose to use in your chord progressions have a huge inﬂuence on the overall

feel of the music you play.

On page 34 you learned how to play colorful accompaniments using styles. Chord progressions are vital

to creating interesting accompaniments, and with a little chord know-how you should be able to take

your accompaniments to a new level.

On these pages we’ll introduce three easy-to-use chord progressions. Be sure to try them out with the

instrument’s accompaniment styles. The style will respond to the chord progression you play, effectively

creating a complete song.

■Playing the Chord Progressions ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Play the scores with the left hand.

Before playing the scores follow steps 1 through 3 of “Play Along with a Style” on page 34.

* The scores provided here are not standard song scores, but rather simpliﬁed scores that indicate which notes to play to

produce the chord progressions.

—Dance music with simple chords—

This is a simple-but-effective chord progression. When you play through to the end of the score, start

again from the beginning. When you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button

and the auto accompaniment function will create a perfect ending.

Recommended Style

031 Euro Trance

Play to the left of the split point.

Split point

C G Am

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

Playing Styles

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 37

—3-chord boogie-woogie—

This progression provides varied harmonic backing with just three chords. When you get a feel for the

progression in the score, try changing the order of the chords!

—Bossa nova with jazz-style chords—

This progression includes jazzy “two-ﬁve” (II-V) changes. Try playing it through several times. When

you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

Recommended Style

155 Piano Boogie

Recommended Style

103 Bossa Nova

C C

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

Dm CM7

Am A7

FM7

Bm7

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

Playing Styles

38 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

There are two ways of playing auto-accompaniment chords:

● Easy Chords

● Standard Chords

The instrument will automatically recognize the different chord types. This function is called Multi Fingering.

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto-accompaniment on (page 34). The keyboard to the left of

the split point (default: 54/F#2) becomes the “accompaniment range”. Play the accompaniment chords in

this area of the keyboard.

■Easy Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

This method lets you easily play chords in the

accompaniment range of the keyboard using only

one, two, or three ﬁngers.

■Standard Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

This method lets you produce accompaniment by

playing chords using normal ﬁngerings in the

accompaniment range of the keyboard.

Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords

DEFGABCDEF

Split point (default: 54/F#2)

Root notes and the corresponding keys

Accompaniment

range

•To play a major chord

Press the root note of the chord.

Cm7

•To play a minor chord

Press the root note together with the

nearest black key to the left of it.

•To play a seventh chord

Press the root note together with the

nearest white key to the left of it.

•To play a minor seventh chord

Press the root note together with the

nearest white and black keys to the left

of it (three keys altogether).

( )

CmM7

CM7

Csus4

Caug

CM7aug

C7aug

C7sus4

C1+2+5

Cdim

Cdim7

CmM7

(

)

CM7

(

)

Cm7

(

)

(

)

(

b13

)

Cm7

(

)

CM7

(

#11

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

#11

)

(

)

(

)

Cm6

Cm7

(

)

CM7

(

)

Cm7

(

)

CmM7

(

)

● How to play Standard Chords [Example for “C” chords]

* Notes enclosed in parentheses ( ) are optional; the chords

will be recognized without them.

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 39

Using Songs

With this instrument the term “song” refers the data that makes up a

piece of music. You can simply enjoy listening to the 30 internal songs,

or use them with just about any of the many functions provided—the

performance assistant technology feature, lessons, and more. The

songs are organized by category.

In this section we’ll learn how to select and play songs, and brieﬂy

describe the 30 songs provided.

Press the [SONG] button.

The song number and name will be displayed.

You can use the dial to select a different song.

Select a song.

Select a song after referring to the preset song category list on page 41.

Use the dial to select the song you want to listen to.

Listen Lesson Record

Song

Select and Listen to a Song

011

Nocturne

The currently selected song

and number are displayed

•You can also play songs you

have recorded yourself (User

Songs) or songs that have been

transferred to the instrument

from a computer in the same

way that you play the internal

songs.

NOTE

012

ForElise

The song displayed here

can be played

Using Songs

40 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Listen to the song.

Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the selected song.

You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] but-

ton again.

These are just like the transport controls on a cassette deck or CD player, letting you fast forward [FF],

rewind [REW] and pause [PAUSE] playback of the song.

001–030 Built in Songs (see next page)

031–035 User Songs (Songs you record yourself).

036– Songs transferred from a computer (pages 89–91)

● Using the [DEMO] button

Press the [DEMO] button to play Songs 001–008 in sequence. Playback

will continue repeatedly starting again from the ﬁrst Song (001).

You can select a song by using the [-] and [+] buttons after pressing the

[DEMO] button.

You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [DEMO] button.

Song start!

Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause

PAUSE

Press the pause but-

ton to pause playback.

REW

Press the fast reverse

button to rapidly

return to an earlier

point in the song.

Press the fast forward

button to rapidly skip

ahead to a later point

in the song.

• When an A-B repeat range is

speciﬁed the fast reverse and

forward function will only work

within that range.

NOTE

Using Songs

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 41

● Song List

These 30 songs include songs that effectively demonstrate the instrument’s easy song arranger feature,

songs that are ideally suited for use with the performance assistant technology feature, and more. The “Sug-

gested Uses” column provides some ideas as to how the songs can most effectively used.

: Includes chord data.

The scores for the internal songs—except for songs 1–11, and song 20 which are copyrighted, are provided in the Song Book on

the CD-ROM. The scores for songs 9–11 are provided in this manual.

Some of the classic and/or traditional songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may not be exactly the same

as the original.

Category No. Name Suggested Uses

Main Demo

1 Bhajan Demo

The songs in this category are original Indian

songs. They’re designed for your listening

pleasure and provide a wonderful introduction to

the advanced capabilities of this instrument.

2 Bhangra Demo

3 South Indian Folk Demo

Voice Demo

4Grand Piano Demo

These songs features some of the instrument’s

many useful voices. They make maximum use of

the characteristics of each voice, and might serve

as inspiration for your own compositions.

5Sweet! TenorSax Demo

6 Cool! RotorOrgan Demo

7 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano Demo

8 ModernHarp & Sweet Soprano Demo

Function Demo

9 Hallelujah Chorus

Use these songs to experience some of the

instrument’s advanced features: song number 9

for the easy song arranger, and songs 10 and 11

for the performance assistant technology feature.

10 Ave Maria

11 Nocturne op.9-2

Piano Solo

12 For Elise

These piano solo pieces are ideally suited for use

as lesson songs.

13 Maple Leaf Rag

14 The Last Rose of Summer

Piano Ensemble

15 Amazing Grace

A selection of piano ensemble songs that are also

well suited for use as lesson songs.

16 Die Lorelei

17 Piano Concerto No.21 2nd mov.

18 Scarborough Fair

19 Old Folks at Home

Piano Accompaniment

Ac Ballad

(Against All Odds: Collins 0007403)

When you need to practice backing

(accompaniment) patterns, these are the songs to

do it with. This is ability you’ll need if you’re invited

to play with a band. These songs allow you to

practice backing parts one hand at a time, which

can be the easiest way to master this important

skill.

21 Ep Ballad

22 Boogie Woogie

23 Rock Piano

24 Salsa

25 Country Piano

26 Gospel R&B

27 Medium Swing

28 Jazz Waltz

29 Medium Bossa

30 SlowRock

CHORD

Using Songs

42 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

The following three types of songs can be used by the PSR-I425.

● Preset Songs (the 30 songs built into the instrument)................Song numbers 001–030.

● User Songs (recordings of your own performances) ..................Song numbers 031–035.

● External song ﬁles (song data transferred from a computer*) ...Song numbers 036–.

* The Accessory CD-ROM includes a selection of 70 MIDI songs. See page 90 for instructions on how to

transfer the songs to the instrument.

The chart below shows the basic PSR-I425 processes ﬂow for using the preset songs, user songs, and exter-

nal song ﬁles—from storage to playback.

Types of Songs

Transfer

(page 90)

Record

(page 52)

Your own performance

PSR-I425 Song Storage loca-

tions

Preset Songs

(001–030)

User Songs

(031–035)

Flash Memory

(036–134)

The 30 songs built

into the instru-

ment.

Stored in the inter-

nal ﬂash memory.

Save to internal

ﬂash memory. Cur-

rently available.

Play

External song ﬁles

can be saved to ﬂash

memory (036–134).

• Different ﬂash memory areas

are used to store user songs

and external song ﬁles trans-

ferred from a computer. User

songs cannot be directly trans-

ferred to the external song ﬁle

ﬂash memory area, and vice

versa.

NOTE

Computer

External song ﬁle

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 43

Select a Song For a Lesson

Yamaha Education Suite

You can select song you like and use it for a left-hand, right-hand, or

both-hands lesson. You can also use songs (only SMF format 0) down-

loaded from the Internet and saved to ﬂash memory. (pages 89–91) Dur-

ing the lesson you can play as slowly as you like, and you can even play

wrong notes. Song playback will slow down to a speed you can handle.

It’s never too late to start learning!

Lesson Flow:

Select a song from the Piano Solo, Piano Ensemble category!

The practice methods:

● Lesson 1 ..............Learn to play the correct notes.

● Lesson 2 ..............Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing.

● Lesson 3 ..............Learn to play the correct notes at the correct timing along with the song.

In this lesson, try playing the correct notes. Play the note shown in the display. The song will wait until you

play the right note.

Select a song for your lesson.

Press the [SONG] button, and rotate the dial to select the song you want

to use for your lesson. As listed on page 42 there are a variety of song

types. For this example try selecting the “012 ForElise”.

Select the

song you want

to learn.

Select the part you want

to work on (right hand,

left hand, both hands).

Select lesson

1, 2, or 3.

Lesson

start!

Lesson 1—Waiting

012

ForElise

Select a Song For a Lesson

44 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Select the part you want to practice.

Each time you press the LESSON [L/R] button the parts are selected in

sequence: right hand → left hand → both hands → right hand ....

The currently selected part is shown in the display.

Start Lesson 1.

Press the LESSON [START] button to select Lesson 1. Each time the

LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in

sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Lesson 1 …. The

currently selected mode is shown in the display.

Right

Left

BothHand

Right-hand lesson

Left-hand lesson

Both-hands lesson

Waiting

YourTemp

MinusOne

012

ForElise

(Lesson 1)

(Lesson 2)

(Lesson 3)

(Song Lesson off)

Start the lesson!Song playback will begin automatically when you select Lesson 1.

Select a Song For a Lesson

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 45

Play the note shown in the display. When you play the correct note, the

next note you need play is shown. The song will wait until you play the

correct note.

Stop the Lesson mode.

You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/

STOP] button.

Once you’ve mastered Lesson 1, move on to Lesson 2.

■See How You’ve Done ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

After the evaluation display has appeared, the lesson will start again

from the beginning.

007

Waiting

Left-hand part Right-hand part

(In the case of a right-hand lesson)

In this case “

r1” indicate that right-hand

lesson 1 has been selected.

~~~~~~~~

~~~~~~

~~~~

Excellent

Very Good

Good

When the lesson song has played all the way through your

performance will be evaluated in 4 levels: OK, Good, Very

Good, or Excellent. “Excellent!” is the highest evaluation.

• The evaluation feature can be

turned off via the FUNCTION

Grade item (page 84).

NOTE

Select a Song For a Lesson

46 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing. Song playback tempo will vary to match the speed

you are playing at. The song will slow down when you play wrong notes, so you can learn at your own

pace.

Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and

2 on pages 43, 44).

Start Lesson 2.

Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are

selected in sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Les-

son 1 ...

Play the note shown in the display. Try to play the notes at the correct

timing. As you learn to play the right notes at the right timing the tempo

will increase until eventually you’ll be playing at the song’s original

tempo.

Stop the Lesson mode.

You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/

STOP] button.

Once you’ve mastered Lesson 2, move on to Lesson 3.

Lesson 2—Your Tempo

YourTemp

In this case “r2” indicate that right-

hand lesson 2 has been selected.

Start the lesson!Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 2 is selected.

Left-hand part Right-hand part

(In the case of a right-hand lesson)

Select a Song For a Lesson

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 47

Here’s where you can perfect your technique.

The song will play at the normal tempo, minus the part you have chosen to play. Play along while listening

to the song.

Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and

2 on pages 43, 44).

Start Lesson 3.

Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are

selected in sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Les-

son 1 ...

Play the note shown in the display.

Stop the Lesson mode.

You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/

STOP] button.

Lesson 3—Minus One

MinusOne

In this case “r3” indicate that right-

hand lesson 3 has been selected.

Start the lesson!Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 3 is selected.

Left-hand part Right-hand part

(In the case of a right-hand lesson)

Select a Song For a Lesson

48 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Use this feature when you want to start again just ahead of a section on which you made a mistake, or to

repeatedly practice a section you ﬁnd difﬁcult.

Press the [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button during a les-

son.

The song location will move back four measures from the point at

which you pressed the button, and playback will begin after a one-mea-

sure count-in. Playback will continue up to the point at which you

pressed the [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button, and then jump back

four measures and begin again after a count-in. This process will repeat,

so all you have to do is press the [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button

when you make a mistake in order to repeat practice of that section until

you get it right.

Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn

•You can change the number of

measures the Repeat and learn

function jumps back by pressing

a number button [1]–[9] during

repeat playback.

NOTE

Press immediately

Oops!

A mistake!

e Jump back 4 measures and repeat playback

Song playback

direction

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 49

Play Using the Music Database

You want to play music in your favorite style, but you’re not sure how to

select the best voice and style for the type of music you want to play ...

simply select the appropriate style from the Music Database. The panel

settings will automatically be adjusted for the ideal combination of sounds

and style!

Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button.

A Music Database name will appear in the display.

Select a Music Database.

Referring to the list on the panel or Music Database List on page 116 of

the manual, use the dial to select a music database. Select one that

matches the image of the song you intend to play.

For this example select the “124 DayOfW&R”.

Play the chords with your left hand and melody with your

right.

The jazz style will start playing when you play a left-hand chord to the

left of the split point (page 30). Refer to page 38 for information about

playing chords.

Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback.

001

AlvFever

124

DayOfW&R

Split Point

50 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Change a Song’s Style

In addition to each song’s default style, you can select any other style

to play the song with the Easy Song Arranger feature. This means that

you can play a song that is normally a ballad, for example, as a bossa

nova, as a hip-hop tune, etc. You can create totally different arrange-

ments by changing the style with which a song is played.

You can also change the song’s melody voice and the keyboard voice

for a complete change of image.

The “Hallelujah Chorus” in the preset songs lets you experience the Easy Song Arranger. Playing it.

Press the [SONG] button, then select a “009 Hallelujah

Chorus” by using the dial. Press the [START/STOP] button

to play it.

As the song progresses, you will see only the style changes while the

song remains the same.

Keep in mind that you can enjoy using Easy Song Arranger with other

songs as well—any songs that include chord data.

Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button.

The song number and name will be displayed.

Select a Song.

Use the dial to select the song you want to arrange.

Listen to the DEMO Song for Easy Song Arranger

009

Halleluj

Using the Easy Song Arranger

009

Halleluj

The currently selected song number

and name are displayed here.

Change a Song’s Style

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 51

Listen to the song.

Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the song. Move

on to the next step while the song is playing.

Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button.

The style number and name will be displayed.

Select a style.

Rotate the dial and listen to how the song sounds with different styles.

As you select different styles the song will remain the same while only

the styles change. When you have selected a suitable style move on to

the next step while the song is still playing (if you have stopped the

song, start it again by pressing the [START/STOP] button).

Select a voice you want to play as a song melody.

Press the [VOICE] button. The currently selected voice number and

name will be displayed. Use the dial to select a different voice.

Change the song’s melody voice.

Press and hold the [VOICE] button for longer than a second. After

SONG MELODY VOICE appears on the display the voice you selected

in step 6 becomes the song’s melody voice.

• When playing song numbers

010, 011 and 020 to 030 while

using the Easy Song Arranger,

melody tracks will be automati-

cally muted and no melody will

sound. In order to hear the mel-

ody tracks you will need to

press the SONG MEMORY but-

tons [3] to [5].

NOTE

Song start!

015

PopShf 1

The currently selected style number

and name are displayed here.

• Because the Easy Song

Arranger uses song data you

can’t specify chords by playing

in the accompaniment range of

the keyboard. The [ACMP ON/

OFF] button will not function.

• If the time signature of the song

and style are different, the time

signature of the song will be

used.

NOTE

001

GrandPno

The currently selected voice number

and name are displayed here.

Hold for longer than a second

SONG MEL

52 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Record Your Own Performance

You can record up to 5 of your own performances and save them as

user songs 031 through 035. The recorded song can be played back on

the instrument.

■ Recordable Data

You can record to a total of 6 tracks: 5 melody tracks and 1 style (chord) track.

Each track can be recorded individually.

● Melody Track [1]–[5].......... Record the melody parts.

● Style Track [A] ................... Records the chord part.

To record your own performance, ﬁrst use the SONG MEMORY [1]–[5] and [A] buttons to specify the

track(s) you want to record on. The track you record on determines the part that plays back later.

Press the [SONG] button, then use the dial to select the

user song number (031–035) you want to record to.

• Up to approximately 10,000

notes can be recorded if you

record only to the melody

tracks. Up to approximately

5,500 chord changes can be

recorded if you record only to

the style track.

NOTE

Track Configuration

• The Difference Between MELODY R and MELODY L …

Songs are a combination of a melody and an auto-accom-

paniment style. Normally “melody” refers to the right-hand

part, but in this instrument “melody” parts are provided for

both the right and left hands. MELODY R is the melody

part played by the right hand, and MELODY L is the mel-

ody part played by the left hand.

NOTE

• Track [1]—Will play back as the right-hand melody

part (MELODY R)

• Track [2]—Will play back as the left-hand melody

part (MELODY L)

• Tracks [3]–[5]—Will play back as “other” perfor-

mance data.

• Track [A]—Will play back as the Style (auto-accom-

paniment) part.

Melody Chords

Specify

track(s) and

record

Track

Right-hand

melody

Left-hand

melody

Other perfor-

mance data

Style

The parts played by each track

when a user song is played back.

Recording Procedure

031

User 1

Rotate the dial to select a song

number between 031 and 035.

Record Your Own Performance

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 53

Select the track(s) you want to record to and conﬁrm your

selection on the display.

◆ Record a Melody Track and the Accompaniment Track

Together

Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while hold-

ing the [REC] button.

Next, press the [A] button while holding the [REC] button.

The selected tracks will ﬂash in the display.

◆ Record a Melody track

Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while hold-

ing the [REC] button.

The selected track will ﬂash in the display.

Recording will start when you play on the keyboard.

You can also start recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button.

The current measure will be shown on the display during recording.

Stop recording by pressing the [START/STOP] or [REC]

button.

To cancel recording to a selected track, press that track button a

second time. Style accompaniment cannot be turned on or off

while recording is in progress.

• Style accompaniment is auto-

matically turned on when you

select the style track [A] for

recording.

• Style accompaniment cannot

turned on or off while recording

is in progress.

• If you use a split voice for

recording, notes played to the

left of the split point will not be

recorded.

NOTE

• If you record to a track that

contains previously-recorded

data the previous data will be

overwritten and lost.

CAUTION

Press and hold

rEC

User 1

001

• If style accompaniment is on

and track [A] has not yet been

recorded, the style track [A] will

automatically be selected for

recording when a melody track

is selected. If you only want to

record a melody track, be sure

to turn the style track [A] off.

NOTE

rEC

User 1

001

• If the memory becomes full dur-

ing recording a warning mes-

sage will appear and recording

will stop automatically. Use the

song clear or track clear (page

55) function to delete unwanted

data and make more room avail-

able for recording, then do the

recording again.

NOTE

Recording

starts

Current measure

rEC

User 1

003

Record Your Own Performance

54 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

If you press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button while recording the style

track an appropriate ending pattern will play and then recording will

stop. When recording stops the current measure number will return to

001 and the recorded track numbers in the display will light.

When the recording is done ...

◆ To Play Back a User Song

User songs are played back in the same way as regular songs (page 39).

1 Press the [SONG] button.

2 The current song number/name will be displayed—use the dial

to select the user song (031–035) you want to play.

3 Press the [START/STOP] button to start playback.

● To Record Other Tracks

Repeat steps 2 through 4 to record any of the remaining tracks.

By selecting an unrecorded track—SONG MEMORY buttons [1]–[5],

[A]—you can record the new track while listening to previously recorded

tracks (the playback tracks will appear in the display). You can also mute

previously recorded tracks (the muted tracks will not appear in the display)

while recording new tracks.

● To Re-record a Track

Simple select the track you want to re-record for recording in the normal

way.

The new material will overwrite the previous data.

● Data Recording Limitations

• The split voice cannot be recorded.

• The following data are recorded at the beginning of the track. Changes

made during the song will not be recorded.

reverb type, chorus type, time signature, style number, style volume,

tempo

Record Your Own Performance

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 55

This function clears an entire user song (all tracks).

Press the [SONG] button, then select the user song (031–

035) you want to clear.

Press and hold the SONG MEMORY [1] button for longer

than a second while holding the SONG MEMORY [A] button.

A conﬁrmation message will appear on the display.

Press the [+] button.

A conﬁrmation message will appear on the display.

You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button.

Press the [+] button to clear the song.

The clear-in-progress message will appear brieﬂy on the display while

the song is being cleared.

This function lets you delete a speciﬁed track from a user song.

Press the [SONG] button, then select the user song (031–

035) you want to clear.

Press and hold the SONG MEMORY track button ([1]–[5],

[A]) corresponding to the track you want to clear for

longer than a second.

A conﬁrmation message will appear on the display.

Press the [+] button.

A conﬁrmation message will appear on the display.

You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button.

Press the [+] button to clear the track.

The clear-in-progress message will appear brieﬂy on the display while

the track is being cleared.

Song Clear—Deleting User Songs

• If you only want to clear a spe-

ciﬁc track from a user song use

the Track Clear function.

NOTE

Hold for longer

than a second

Press and hold

YES

ClrUser1

•To execute the Song Clear func-

tion press the [+] button. Press

[-] to cancel the Song Clear

operation.

NOTE

Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track from a User Song

YES

ClrTr1

Hold for longer than a second

•To execute the Track Clear func-

tion press the [+] button. Press

[-] to cancel the Track Clear

operation.

NOTE

56 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Backup and Initialization

The following settings are always backed up, and are maintained even when the power is turned off.

If you want to initialize the settings, use the Initialize operation as explained below.

* Refer to “Loading Style Files” on page 74

This function erases all backup data in the instrument’s ﬂash memory and restores the initial default set-

tings. The following initialization procedures are provided.

■Backup Clear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

To clear data backed up to the internal ﬂash memory—panel user setting, reg-

istration memory, user songs, style ﬁle of style number 163—turn the power

on by pressing the [STANDBY/ON] switch while holding the highest white

key on the keyboard. The backed up data will be erased and the default values

restored.

■Flash Clear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

To clear song data and style ﬁles that have been transferred to the internal ﬂash

memory from a computer, turn the power on by pressing the [STANDBY/ON]

switch while simultaneously holding the highest white key on the keyboard

and the three highest black keys.

● The Backup Parameters

• User Songs

• Style ﬁle of style number 163*

•Touch Response on/off

•Registration Memory

• FUNCTION Settings: Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Volume,

Song Volume, Metronome Volume, Grade, Demo Cancel,

Master EQ type, Arpeggio Velocity

Backup

Initialization

• When you execute the Flash

Clear operation, song data

you have purchased will also

be cleared. Be sure to save

data you want to keep to a

computer.

CAUTION

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 57

Overall PSR-I425 control is based on the following simple operations.

1 Press a button to select a basic function.

Basic Operation

1 Press a button to select a basic function.

2 Use the dial to select an item or value.

3 Start a function.

001

GrandPno

Display (page 59)

● Volume Adjustment

Adjusts the volume of the sound heard via the

instrument’s speakers or a pair of headphones

plugged into the PHONES jack.

Rotate counter-

clockwise to

decrease the

volume.

Rotate clockwise

to increase the

volume.

3 Start a function. 2 Select an item or value. 1 Select a basic function.

The “Press & Hold” Symbol

The “ ” symbol that appears next to

some buttons indicates that the button can be

pressed and held for longer than a second to

call up a related function. This provides conve-

nient direct access to a range of functions.

Select a song you want to listen to or a song you want to use for a lesson.

Select an auto-accompaniment style.

Select a voice you want to play on the keyboard.

Basic Operation and Displays

58 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

2 Use the dial to select an item or value.

When you select a basic function, the item corresponding to that function will be displayed. You can

then use the dial or the number buttons [0]–[9] to select the desired item.

■ Changing Values● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3 Start a function.

This is the [START/STOP] button.

Press the [START/STOP] button after pressing the [SONG] or [STYLE]

button to start playback of the selected song or style (rhythm).

012

ForElise

This portion of the display indi-

cates the name and number of

the currently selected song,

voice and style. It also displays

the name and current setting/

value of other functions.

● Dial

Rotate the dial clockwise to increase the

value of the selected item, or counter-

clockwise to decrease it’s value. Rotate

the dial continuously to continuously

increase or decrease the value.

● [+] and [-] Buttons

Press the [+] button brieﬂy to incre-

ment the value by 1, or press the [-]

button brieﬂy to decrement the value

by 1. Press and hold either button to

continuously increment or decre-

ment the value in the corresponding

direction.

● Number Buttons [0]–[9]

The number buttons can be used to directly enter a song number

or parameter value.

Hundreds or tens digits that are “0” can be omitted (see below).

Decrease Increase

Press

brieﬂy to

decrement.

Press

brieﬂy to

increment.

Press number buttons

[0], [0], [3].

Example: Song number “003”

can be entered in three ways.

• [0] → [0] → [3]

• [0] → [3]

(“003” will appear on the dis-

play after a brief delay)

• [3]

(“003” will appear on the dis-

play after a brief delay)

● CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons

When selecting a song, style, or voice,

you can use these buttons to jump to the

ﬁrst item in the next or previous category.

The CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons

are useful for selecting categorized items,

as in the example below.

Example: VOICE SELECT

In a display in which a category appears, selection is easy if you

ﬁrst use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the cat-

egory containing the desired item, then use the dial or [+] and [-]

buttons to select the item. This can be particularly handy when

you have to select from a large number of voices.

Jump to the

ﬁrst item in

the next or

category.

090

SweetFlt

The ﬁrst voice in the selected

category is selected.

In most procedures described throughout this owner’s

manual the dial is recommended for selection simply

because it is the easiest and most intuitive selection

method. Please note however, that most items or values

that can be selected using the dial can also be selected

using the [+] and [-] buttons.

Basic Operation and Displays

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 59

The display shows all of the current basic settings: song, style, voice.

It also includes a range of indicators that show the on/off status of a range of functions.

Display Items

001

GrandPno

Indicates that Touch response

is turned on. (see page 65)

Indicates that Harmony is

turned on. (see page 60)

Indicates that the Dual voice is

turned on. (see page 29)

Indicates that the Split voice is

turned on. (see page 30)

Indicates that the Arpeggio is

turned on. (see page 14)

Indicates that performance

assistant technology is turned

on. (see

page 23)

Indicates that Accompaniment

is turned on. (see page 34)

Indicates that SYNC STOP is

turned on. (see page 71)

TOUCH

HARMONY

DUAL

SPLIT

ARPEGGIO

Performance assistant technology

ACMP ON

SYNC STOP

Displays the melody and chord

notes of a song when the Song

Lesson function is in use, or the

notes of chords you specify when

the Dictionary function is in use. At

other times the notes you play on

the keyboard are displayed.

Notation

•Any notes occurring below or above the staff are indi-

cated by “8va” in the notation.

•For a few speciﬁc chords, not all notes may be shown in

the notation section of the display. This is due to space

limitations in the display.

NOTE

Indicates the beat number in a mea-

sure during the Metronome function.

Indicates the current measure dur-

ing playback of a song or style, and

the currently set Tempo value for the

song or style. (see page 27)

Indicates the name of the chord cur-

rently being played back, or the

name of the chord being played on

the keyboard.

Information related to the song tracks is shown here. (see

page 52, 79)

BEAT number and MEASURE

Chord Display

Song Track Display

001

Indicates the current style or song

beat with ﬂashing arrows. (see page

27)

This display allows you to visually

conﬁrm parameters assigned to the

knobs. (see page 18)

Beat Display

Knob Assign Display

60 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Adding Effects

This feature adds harmony notes to the main voice.

Press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button

to turn Harmony feature on.

To turn Harmony off, press the [HARMONY

ON/OFF] button again.

When you press the [HARMONY ON/OFF]

button to turn this feature on, the appropriate

harmony type for the currently selected main

voice is automatically selected.

Press and hold the [HARMONY ON/

OFF] button for longer than a second so

that the Harmony Type item appears.

“HarmType” appears in the display for a few

seconds, and the currently selected harmony

type will be displayed. Use the dial to select a

different harmony type.

Use the dial to select a harmony type.

Refer to the Effect Type List on page 119 for

information about the available harmony types.

Try playing the keyboard with the harmony

function. The effect and operation of each Har-

mony Type is different-refer to the below sec-

tion “How to sound each Harmony Type” as

well as the Effect Type List for details.

Harmony

When harmony is on the

harmony icon will appear

in the display.

Trio

HarmType

The currently selected harmony type

Hold for longer

than a second.

• The harmony notes can be added only to the Main Voice, not to Dual

or Split Voices.

• The keys left of the Split Point of the keyboard produce no harmony

notes when the auto accompaniment is on (ACMP ON is lit).

NOTE

● How to sound each Harmony Type

• Harmony type 01 to 05

• Harmony type 06 to 12 (Trill)

Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the

auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when

the Auto Accompaniment is on (page 34).

Hold down two keys.

• Harmony type 13 to 19 (Tremolo)

• Harmony type 20 to 26 (Echo)

You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the

Function Settings (page 69).

Keep holding down the keys.

Reference

Adding Effects

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 61

Reverb lets you play with a rich concert hall type ambience. When you select a style or song the optimum

reverb type for the voice used is automatically selected. If you want to select a different reverb type, use the

procedure described below.

Press the [FUNCTON] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons

to select the Reverb Type item.

“Reverb” appears in the display for a few sec-

onds, and the currently selected reverb type

will be displayed.

Use the dial to select a reverb type.

You can check how the selected reverb type

sounds by playing on the keyboard.

Refer to the Effect Type List on page 119 for

information about the available reverb types.

● Adjusting the Reverb Send Level

You can individually adjust the amount of reverb

that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices.

See page 83).

Adding Reverb

100

StyleVol

Hall2

The currently selected reverb type

Reverb

Hall3

Selected reverb type

62 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Adding Effects

The chorus effect creates a thick sound that is similar to many of the same voices being played in unison.

When you select a style or song the optimum chorus type for the voice used is automatically selected. If

you want to select a different chorus type, use the procedure described below.

Press the [FUNCTON] button.

Use the

CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons

to select the Chorus Type item.

“Chorus” appears in the display for a few sec-

onds, and the currently selected chorus type

will be displayed.

Use the dial to select a chorus type.

You can check how the selected chorus type

sounds by playing on the keyboard.

Refer to the Effect Type List on page 119 for

information about the available chorus types.

● Adjusting the Chorus Send Level

You can individually adjust the amount of chorus

that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices.

See page 83).

Adding Chorus

Chorus1

Chorus

The currently selected chorus type

Chorus2

Selected chorus type

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 63

Handy Performance Features

The instrument includes a metronome with adjustable tempo and time signature.

Use it to set the tempo that is most comfortable for you.

■Start the metronome ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Turn the metronome on and start it by

pressing the [METRONOME ON/OFF]

button.

To stop the metronome, press the [METRO-

NOME ON/OFF] button again.

■Adjusting the Metronome

Tempo

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call

up the tempo setting.

Use the dial to select a tempo from 11 to

280.

The Metronome

001

GrandPno

Indicates the beat number

in the measure

090

Tempo

Current Tempo setting

64 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Handy Performance Features

In this example we’ll set up a 5/8 time signature.

Press and hold the [METRONOME ON/

OFF] button for longer than a second to

select the number of beats per measure

function “TimesigN”.

Use the dial to select the number of

beats per measure.

A chime will sound on the ﬁrst beat of each

measure while the other beats will click. All

beats will simply click with no chime at the

beginning of each measure if you set this

parameter to “00”.

The available range is from 0 through 60.

Select 5 for this example.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons as many times as necessary to

select the beat length function

“TimesigD”.

The currently selected beat length will be dis-

played.

Use the dial to select the beat length.

Select the required length for each beat: 2, 4, 8,

or 16 (half note, quarter note, eighth note, or

note). Select 8 for this example.

Press the [FUNCTON] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Metronome Volume

item.

Use the dial to set the metronome vol-

ume as required.

Setting the Number of Beats per Measure, and the Length of Each Beat

Number of beats per measure.

TimesigN

Hold for longer than

a second.

• The metronome time signature will synchronize to a style or song

that is playing, so these parameters cannot be changed while a style

or song is playing.

NOTE

TimesigD

The length of one beat.

Adjusting the Metronome Volume

Metronome

volume

100

MtrVol

Handy Performance Features

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 65

You can supply a count-in at any tempo you like to start playback. Simply tap the [TEMPO/TAP] button at

any tempo—4 times for time signatures in 4, and 3 times for time signatures in 3—and the selected style/

song will begin playing at the tapped tempo.

When touch response is on you can adjust the keyboard’s sensitivity to dynamics in three steps.

Press the [TOUCH ON/OFF] button to

turn touch response on.

The touch response icon will appear in the dis-

play when touch response is on (page 59).

Press and hold the [TOUCH ON/OFF]

button for longer than a second so that

the Touch Sensitivity item appears.

“TouchSns” appears in the display for a few

seconds, and the currently selected touch sensi-

tivity will be displayed.

Use the dial in response to keyboard

dynamics to select a touch sensitivity

setting between 1 and 3. Higher values

produce greater (easier) volume varia-

tion in response to keyboard dynam-

ics—i.e. greater sensitivity.

Tap Start

Touch Response Sensitivity

001

GrandPno

Touch response icon

TouchSns

Hold for longer

than a second.

Touch Sensitivity

Medium

• The initial default touch sensitivity setting is “2”.

NOTE

66 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Handy Performance Features

The pitch bend wheel can be used to add smooth pitch variations to notes you play on the keyboard. Roll

the wheel upward to raise the pitch, or downward to lower the pitch. If you use this feature with a voice

such as the “040 Overdriven” guitar voice, you can produce remarkably realistic string-bending effects.

◆ Large Pitch Changes (Transpose)

The overall pitch of the instrument can by shifted

up or down by a maximum of 1 octave in semitone

increments.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Transpose item.

Use the dial to set the transpose value

between -12 and +12 as required.

◆ Small Pitch Changes (Tuning)

The overall tuning of the instrument can by shifted

up or down by a maximum of 100 cents in 1-cent

increments (100 cents = 1 semitone).

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Tuning item.

Use the dial to set the tuning value

between -100 and +100 as required.

Pitch Bend

Pitch Controls

Transpos

• The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed.

NOTE

000

Tuning

• The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed.

NOTE

Handy Performance Features

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 67

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons as many times as necessary to

select the arpeggio velocity function

“ARP Velo”.

“ARP Velo” will be shown in the display for a

few seconds, then the currently selected arpeg-

gio velocity setting will appear.

Use the dial to select “2 Thru”.

When “1 Original” is selected the arpeggio vol-

ume is the same regardless of changes in key-

board velocity.

Controlling Arpeggio Volume with Keyboard Dynamics

Original

The currently selected

arpeggio velocity.

ARP Velo

68 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Handy Performance Features

Sometimes selecting the ideal voice to play with a song or style can be confusing. The One Touch Setting

feature automatically selects a well-balanced voice for you when you select a style or song. Simply select

voice number “000” to activate this feature.

Select voice number “000” (steps 1 to 2

on page 28).

Select and play back any song (steps 1

to 3 on page 39).

Play the keyboard and remember the

sound of the voice.

If you have stopped playback at some point

during this procedure press the [START/STOP]

button to start playback again.

Use the dial to change songs, then play

the keyboard and listen to the voice.

You should hear a different keyboard voice

than you played in step 3. Press the [VOICE]

button after changing songs to see the name of

the voice being used.

One Touch Setting

000

SweetSpr

Use the dial to select voice number 000.

Handy Performance Features

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 69

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Harmony Volume

item.

Use the dial to set the harmony volume

between 000 and 127.

Five different master equalizer (EQ) settings are provided to give you the best possible sound when listen-

ing through different reproduction systems—the instrument’s internal speakers, headphones, or an external

speaker system.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

The currently selected function will appear in

the display.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons as many times as necessary to

select the master EQ type function

“MasterEQ”.

“MasterEQ” will be shown in the display for a

few seconds, then the currently selected EQ

type will appear.

Use the dial to select the desired Master

EQ setting.

Five settings are available: 1–5. Settings 1 and

2 are best for listening via the instrument’s

built-in speakers, setting 3 is for headphones,

and settings 4 and 5 are ideal for listening via

external speakers.

Adjusting the Harmony Volume

080

HarmVol

Select an EQ Setting for the Best Sound

Speakerl

MasterEQ

The currently selected

master EQ type.

70 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

Basic operation of the Style (auto-accompaniment) feature is described on page 33 of

the Quick Guide.

Here are some other ways you can play the styles, the style volume adjustment proce-

dure, how you can play chords using the styles, and more.

The PSR-I425 features a wide variety of style “sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement of the

accompaniment to match the song you are playing.

● INTRO section

This is used for the beginning of the Song. When the intro ﬁnishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the main sec-

tion. The length of the intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.

● MAIN section

This is used for playing the main part of the Song. It plays a main accompaniment pattern, and repeats indeﬁnitely

until another section’s button is pressed. There are two variations on the basic pattern (A and B), and the Style

playback sound changes harmonically based on the chords you play with your left hand.

● Fill-in section

This is automatically added before changing to section A or B.

● ENDING section

This is used for the ending of the Song. When the ending is ﬁnished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically.

The length of the ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.

Press the [STYLE] button and then

select a style.

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to

turn auto accompaniment on.

Press the [SYNC START] button to turn

synchro start on.

Pattern Variation (Sections)

Main A/BIntro

Auto ﬁllEnding

Appears when Auto

Accompaniment is on.

● Synchro Start

When the synchro start standby mode is engaged,

style playback will begin as soon as you play a

chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard.

You can disengage the synchro-start standby mode

by pressing the [SYNC START] button again.

Beat arrows will ﬂash when

the synchro start standby

mode is engaged

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 71

Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

You’re now ready to play the intro.

As soon as you play a chord with your

left hand, the Intro of the selected Style

starts.

For this example, play a C major chord (as

shown below). For information on how to enter

chords, see “Playing Auto-accompaniment

Chords” on page 38.

Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.

When the ﬁll-in is ﬁnished, it leads smoothly

into the selected main section A/B.

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

This switches to the ending section.

When the ending is ﬁnished, the auto accompa-

niment stops automatically. You can have the

ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by

pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button

again while the ending is playing back.

MAIN A

The name of the selected section—

MAIN A or MAIN B—will be displayed.

INTRO≥A

Accompaniment

range

Split point

FILL A≥B

● Synchro Stop

When this function is selected the accompaniment

style will only play while you are playing chords

in the accompaniment range of the keyboard.

Style playback will stop when you release the

keys. To turn the function on, press the [SYNC

STOP] button.

ENDING

Appears when the syn-

chro-stop function is

engaged.

The style will play

while you are playing

the keys

Style playback will

stop when you

release the keys

72 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

Press the [STYLE] button to engage the

style function.

Press the [FUNCTON] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Style Volume item.

Use the dial to set the style volume

between 000 and 127.

The initial default split point is key number 54 (the F#2 key), but you can change it to another key using the

procedure described below.

Press the [STYLE] button.

Press and hold the [ACMP ON/OFF] for

longer than a second so that the Split

point item appears.

Use the dial to set the split point to any

key from 000 through 127.

Adjusting the Style Volume

100

StyleVol

Setting the Split Point

054

SplitPnt

Hold for longer than a second

Split point

Split point (54 : F#2)

Main voice

Split voice

• When you change the split point the auto-accompaniment split point

also changes.

• The split point cannot be changed during a song lesson.

NOTE

•You can also access the Split Point item by pressing the [FUNCTION]

button and using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to locate the

item (page 82).

NOTE

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 73

When auto accompaniment is on (the ACMP ON icon is showing) and Synchro Start is off, you can play

chords in the left-hand accompaniment range of the keyboard while the style is stopped and still hear the

accompaniment chords. This is “Stop Accompaniment”, and any of the chord ﬁngerings recognized by the

instrument can be used (page 38).

Press the [STYLE] button to engage the

style function, then press the [ACMP ON/

OFF] button to turn the auto accompani-

ment on.

Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment)

104

PopBossa

Appears when auto accompaniment is on

Accompaniment

range

74 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

This instrument features 162 internal styles, but other styles, such as those provided on the CD-ROM and

others that can be obtained from the internet (only styles with the “.sty” sufﬁx), can be loaded into style

number 163 and used in the same way as the internal styles.

In order to use the style ﬁle load function, the ﬁle must already have been transferred from the computer to

the instrument. The procedure for transferring ﬁles from a computer to the instrument is described on page

89 (“Transferring Data between the Computer and Instrument”).

The procedure described below loads a style ﬁle that has already been transferred from a computer to the

instrument into style number 163.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

The currently selected function will appear in

the display.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons as many times as necessary to

select the style ﬁle load function “Sff

Load”.

After about 2 seconds the name of a loadable

style ﬁle will appear in the display.

If multiple loadable style ﬁles have been trans-

ferred to the instrument, you can use the dial or

the [+] and [-] buttons to select the other ﬁles in

sequence.

Execute the load operation.

With the name of the style ﬁle you want to load

shown in the display, press the number [0] but-

ton.

A conﬁrmation message for the load

operation will appear. Press the [+/YES]

button to actually load the ﬁle.

Loading Style Files

Sff Load

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 75

Two or more notes played together constitute a “chord”.

The most basic chord type is the “triad” consisting of three notes: the

root, third, and ﬁfth degrees of the corresponding scale. A C major triad,

for example, is made up of the notes C (the root), E (the third note of the

C major scale), and G (the ﬁfth note of the C major scale).

In the C major triad shown above, the lowest note is the “root” of the

chord (this is the chord’s “root position” ... using other chord notes for

the lowest note results in “inversions”). The root is the central sound of the chord, which supports and

anchors the other chord notes.

The distance (interval) between adjacent notes of a triad in root position is either a major or minor third.

The lowest interval in our root-position triad (between the root and the third) determines whether the triad

is a major or minor chord, and we can shift the highest note up or down by a semitone to produce two addi-

tional chords, as shown below.

The basic characteristics of the chord sound remain intact even if we change the order of the notes to create

different inversions. Successive chords in a chord progression can be smoothly connected, for example, by

choosing the appropriate inversions (or chord “voicings”).

● Reading Chord Names

Chord names tell you just about everything you need to know about a chord

(other than the inversion/voicing). The chord name tells you what the root of the

chord is, whether it is a major, minor, or diminished chord, whether it requires a

major or ﬂatted seventh, what alterations or tensions it uses ... all at a glance.

● Some Chord Types (These are just some of the “Standard” chord types recognized by the PSR-I425.)

Chord Basics

3rd

Root

Major third–four half steps (semitones) Minor third–three half steps (semitones)

CM Cm Caug Cdim

Major chord

Minor 3rd

Major 3rd

Minor 3rd

Major 3rd

Minor 3rd

Minor chord Augmented chord Diminished chord

Root note Chord type

Csus4 C7 Cm7 CM7

(

)

Cm7

(

)

C7sus4

CmM7

Perfect 5

Perfect 4

Flatted 7

Major chord Flatted 7

Minor chord Major 7

Major chord

Major 7

Minor chord Flatted 5

chord

Flatted 5

Minor 7

chord

Flatted 7

Suspended

chord

Suspended 4

Minor 7

Major 7

, suspended 4

Minor 7

, ﬂatted 5

Minor/major 7

76 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

■Recognized Standard Chords● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

All chords in the chart are “C-root” chords.

* These chords are not shown in the Dictionary function.

Chord Name/[Abbreviation] Normal Voicing Chord (C) Display

Major [M] 1 - 3 - 5 C

Add ninth [(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - 5 C

(9)

Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6

Sixth ninth [6(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 C6

(9)

Major seventh [M7]

1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or

1 - (3) - 5 - 7

CM7

Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 CM7

(9)

Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)]

1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or

1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7

CM7

(#11)

Flatted ﬁfth [(b5)] 1 - 3 - b5C

Major seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [M7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - 7 CM7

Suspended fourth [sus4] 1 - 4 - 5 Csus4

Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - #5 Caug

Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - #5 - 7 CM7aug *

Minor [m] 1 - b3 - 5 Cm

Minor add ninth [m(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - 5 Cm

(9)

Minor sixth [m6] 1 - b3 - 5 - 6 Cm6

Minor seventh [m7] 1 - b3 - (5) - b7 Cm7

Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7 Cm7

(9)

Minor seventh add eleventh [m7(11)] 1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7) Cm7

(11)

Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7

Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7

(9)

Minor seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [m7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - b7 Cm7

Minor major seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [mM7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - 7 CmM7

Diminished [dim] 1 - b3 - b5 Cdim

Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - b3 - b5 - 6 Cdim7

Seventh [7]

1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or

1 - (3) - 5 - b7

Seventh ﬂatted ninth [7(b9)] 1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7C7

(b9)

Seventh add ﬂatted thirteenth [7(b13)] 1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7C7

(b13)

Seventh ninth [7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7C7

(9)

Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)]

1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or

1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7

(#11)

Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)] 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7C7

(13)

Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)] 1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7C7

(#9)

Seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - b7C7

Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - #5 - b7 C7aug

Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - (5) - b7 C7sus4

One plus two plus ﬁve [1+2+5] 1 - 2 - 5 C *

(

)

(

)

CM7

(

)

CM7

(

#11

)

(

)

CM7

(

)

Csus4

Caug

CM7aug

(

)

Cm6

Cm7

(

)

Cm7

(

)

CmM7

(

)

Cm7

(

)

CmM7

(

)

Cdim

Cdim7

(

)

(

b13

)

(

)

(

#11

)

(

)

(

)

C7b5

C7aug

C7sus4

C1+2+5

• Notes in parentheses can be omitted.

• Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompa-

niment based only on the root.

•A perfect ﬁfth (1+5) produces accompaniment based only on the root

and ﬁfth which can be used with both major and minor chords.

• The chord ﬁngerings listed are all in “root” position, but other inversions

can be used—with the following exceptions: m7, m7

5, 6, m6, sus4,

aug, dim7, 7

5, 6(9), 1+2+5.

NOTE

•Inversion of the 7sus4 and m7(11) chords are not recognized if the

notes shown in parentheses are omitted.

• The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related

chords are played in sequence (e.g. some minor chords followed by the

minor seventh).

•Two-note ﬁngerings will produce a chord based on the previously played

chord.

NOTE

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 77

The Dictionary function is essentially a built-in “chord book” that shows you the individual notes of chords.

It is ideal when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it.

Press and hold the LESSON [START]

button for longer than a second.

As an example, we’ll learn how to play a

GM7 (G major seventh) chord. Press the

“G” key in the section of the keyboard

labeled “ROOT”. (The note doesn’t

sound.) The root note you set is shown

in the display.

Press the “M7” (major seventh) key in

the section of the keyboard labeled

“CHORD TYPE”. (The note doesn’t

sound.) The notes you should play for

the speciﬁed chord (root note and

chord type) are shown in the display,

both as notation and in the keyboard

diagram.

To call up possible inversions of the chord,

press the [+]/[-] buttons.

Try playing a chord in the auto accom-

paniment section of the keyboard,

checking the indications in the display.

When you’ve played the chord properly,

a bell sound signals your success and

the chord name in the display ﬂash.

Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary

Dict.

Hold for longer than

a second

001

Dict.

001

Dict.

Notation of chord

Chord name (root and type)

Individual notes of chord (keyboard)

• About major chords: Simple major chords are usually indicated only

by the root note. For example, “C” refers to C major. However, when

specifying major chords here, make sure to select “M” (major) after

pressing the root note.

NOTE

78 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Song Settings

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Song Volume item.

Use the dial to set the song volume

between 000 and 127.

You can specify a section of a song—“A” is the

start point and “B” is the end point—for repeat

playback.

Play the song (page 39) and press the

[A-B REPEAT] button at the beginning

of the section you want to repeat (the

“A” point).

Press the [A-B REPEAT] button a sec-

ond time at the end of the section you

want to repeat (the “B” point).

The speciﬁed A-B section of the song

will now play repeatedly.

You can stop repeat playback at any time by

pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button.

Song Volume

100

SongVol

Song volume

• Song volume can be adjusted while a song is selected.

NOTE

A-B Repeat

• The repeat start and end points can be speciﬁed in one-measure

increments.

• The current measure number is shown in the display during play-

back.

• If you want to set the start point “A” at the very beginning of the song

press the [A-B REPEAT] button before starting playback of the song.

NOTE

Song Settings

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 79

Each “track” of a song plays a different part of the

song—melody, percussion, accompaniment, etc.

You can mute individual tracks and play the muted

part on the keyboard yourself, or simply mute

tracks other than the ones you want to listen to.

Use the SONG MEMORY [1]–[5] and [A] buttons

to mute or un-mute the corresponding tracks. The

track number in the display disappears when that

track is muted. Refer to page 52 for information

about the song track conﬁguration.

You can change a song’s melody voice to any other voice you prefer.

Select the song and play it.

Rotate the dial to select the voice you

want to listen to after pressing the

[VOICE] button.

Press the [VOICE] button for longer

than a second.

“SONG MELODY VOICE” appears in the

display for a few seconds, indicating

that the voice selected in step #2 has

replaced the song’s original melody

voice.

Muting Independent Song Parts

Track number on—Track will playback

Track number off—Track is muted or

contains no data

Change the Melody Voice

•You cannot change the melody voice of a user song.

NOTE

050

Strings

SONG MEL

Hold for longer than

a second

80 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings

This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you save your favorite set-

tings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to 16 complete setups can be saved

(8 banks of two setups each).

Set the panel controls as required—

select a voice, accompaniment style,

etc.

Press the [●] (MEMORY/BANK) button.

A bank number will appear in the dis-

play when you release the button.

Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number but-

tons to select a bank number from 1 to

Press the REGIST MEMORY [1] or [2]

button while holding the [●] (MEMORY/

BANK) button to store the current panel

settings to the speciﬁed registration

memory.

8 Banks

Memory 1

Up to 16 presets (eight

banks of two each) can be

memorized.

Memory 2

Saving to the Registration Memory

Bank

Bank number

• Data cannot be saved to the registration memory during song play-

back.

NOTE

Writing!

• If you select a Registration Memory number that already contains

data, the previous data is deleted and overwritten by the new data.

NOTE

• Do not turn off the power while saving settings to the registra-

tion memory, otherwise the data may be damaged or lost.

CAUTION

Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 81

Press the [●] (MEMORY/BANK) button.

A bank number will appear in the dis-

play when you release the button.

Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number but-

tons to select bank you want to recall.

Press the REGIST MEMORY button, [1]

or [2], containing the settings you want

to recall. The recalled REGIST MEMORY

number appears in the display for a few

seconds. The panel controls will be

instantly set accordingly.

Recalling a Registration Memory

Bank number

Bank

REGIST 1

● Settings That Can be Saved to the Registra-

tion Memory

• Style settings*

Style number, Auto Accompaniment ON/OFF,

Split Point, Style settings (Main A/B),

Style Volume, Tempo

• Voice settings

Main Voice setting (Voice number, Volume,

Octave, Pan, Reverb Send Level, Attack Time,

Release Time, Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance,

Chorus Send Level), Dual Voice settings

(Dual ON/OFF, Voice number, Volume, Octave,

Pan, Reverb Send Level, Chorus Send Level,

Attack Time, Release Time, Filter Cutoff, Filter

Resonance), Split Voice settings (Split ON/OFF,

Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan,

Reverb Send Level, Chorus Send Level)

• Effect settings

Reverb Type, Chorus Type

• Arpeggio settings

Arpeggio Type, Arpeggio ON/OFF

• Harmony settings

Harmony ON/OFF, Harmony Type,

Harmony Volume

• Other settings

Transpose, Pitch Bend Range, Knob Assign

* Style settings are not available for Registration Memory when

using the Song features.

82 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

The Functions

The “Functions” provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters for tun-

ing, setting the split point, and adjusting the voices and effects. Take a look at the func-

tion list starting on the opposite page. There are 54 function parameters in all.

When you locate a function you want to set up, simply select the function’s display

name (shown to the right of the function name in the list) and adjust as required.

Find the function you want to set in the

list that begins on page 83.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Select a function.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as

many times as necessary until the function’s

display name appears in the display.

Use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or

the [0]–[9] number buttons to set the

selected function as required.

The [+] and [-] buttons are used to make ON/

OFF type settings: [+] = ON, [-] = OFF.

In some cases the [+] button will initiate execu-

tion of the selected function, and the [-] will

cancel the selection.

Some function settings are stored in memory as

soon as they are changed. See “The Backup

Parameters” on page 56 for information on the

function settings that are stored on the instru-

ment. To restore all initial factor default set-

tings perform the “Backup Clear” procedure

described in the “Initialization” section on page

56.

Selecting and Setting Functions

100

StyleVol

Transpos

The selected function.

Direct numeric

entry.

• Increment value by 1.

•ON

•Execute

• Decrement value by 1.

• OFF

• Cancel

Press simultaneously to

recall the default setting.

The Functions

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 83

● Function Setting List

Setting Item title Range/Settings Description

Style Volume StyleVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Style.

Song Volume SongVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Song.

Transpose Transpos -12–12 Determines the pitch of the instrument by semitone increments.

Tuning Tuning -100–100 Sets the pitch of the instrument’s sound in 1-cent increments.

Pitch Bend Range PBRange 01–12 Sets the pitch bend range in semitone increments.

Split Point SplitPnt

000–127

(C-2–G8)

Determines the highest key for the Split voice and sets the Split “point”—

in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower) and Main (upper)

voices. The Split Point setting and Accompaniment Split Point setting are

automatically set to the same value.

Touch Sensitivity TouchSns

1(Soft),

2(Medium),

3(Hard)

When Touch Response is on, this determines the sensitivity of the

feature.

Main Voice Volume M.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Main voice.

Main Voice Octave M.Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Main voice.

Main Voice Pan M.Pan

000 (left)–

64 (center)–

127 (right)

Determines the pan position of the Main voice in the stereo image. The

value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127”

results in the sound being panned full right.

Main Voice Reverb Level M.Reverb 000–127

Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb

effect.

Main Voice Chorus Level M.Chorus 000–127

Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus

effect.

Main Voice Attack Time M.Attack 000–127 Sets the Main voice attack time.

Main Voice Release Time M.Releas 000–127 Sets the Main voice release time.

Main Voice Filter Cutoff M.Cutoff 000–127 Sets the Main voice ﬁlter cutoff frequency.

Main Voice Filter

Resonance

M.Reso. 000–127 Sets the Main voice ﬁlter resonance.

Dual Voice D.Voice 001–514 Selects the Dual voice.

Dual Voice Volume D.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Dual voice.

Dual Voice Octave D.Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Dual voice.

Dual Voice Pan D.Pan

000 (left)–

64 (center)–

127 (right)

Determines the pan position of the Dual voice in the stereo image. The

value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127”

results in the sound being panned full right.

Dual Voice Reverb Level D.Reverb 000–127

Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb

effect.

Dual Voice Chorus Level D.Chorus 000–127

Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus

effect.

Dual Voice Attack Time D.Attack 000–127 Sets the Dual voice attack time.

Dual Voice Release Time D.Releas 000–127 Sets the Dual voice release time.

Dual Voice Filter Cutoff D.Cutoff 000–127 Sets the Dual voice ﬁlter cutoff frequency.

Dual Voice Filter

Resonance

D.Reso. 000–127 Sets the Dual voice ﬁlter resonance.

Split Voice S.Voice 001–514 Selects the Split voice.

Split Voice Volume S.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Split voice.

Split Voice Octave S.Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Split voice.

Split Voice Pan S.Pan

000 (left)–

64 (center)–

127 (right)

Determines the pan position of the Split voice in the stereo image. The

value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127”

results in the sound being panned full right.

Split Voice Reverb Level S.Reverb 000–127

Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb

effect.

Split Voice Chorus Level S.Chorus 000–127

Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus

effect.

84 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

The Functions

* All these settings can be conveniently reset to their initial default values by pressing the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously. (The exception to this is

Initial Send, which is an operation, not a setting.)

Reverb Type Reverb 01–10 Determines the Reverb type, including off (10). (See the list on page 119)

Chorus Type Chorus 01–05 Determines the Chorus type, including off (05). (See the list on page 119)

Master EQ Type MasterEQ

Speaker1,

Speaker2,

Headphone,

Line Out1,

Line Out2

Sets the equalizer applied to the speaker output for optimum sound in

different listening situations.

Harmony Type HarmType 01–26 Determines the Harmony type. (See the list on page 119)

Harmony Volume HarmVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Harmony effect.

Arpeggio Type ARP Type 01–62 Determines the Arpeggio type. (See the list on page 14)

Arpeggio Velocity ARP Velo

1 (Original),

2 (Thru)

Sets the velocity mode for arpeggio playback.

Style File Load Sff Load 001–nnn Loads a Style ﬁle.

PC mode PC mode PC1/PC2/OFF Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer (page 88).

Local On/Off Local ON/OFF

Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the internal tone

generator (ON) or not (OFF). (page 87)

External Clock ExtClock ON/OFF

Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal clock

(OFF) or an external clock (ON). (page 87)

Keyboard Out KbdOut ON/OFF

Determines whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is

transmitted (ON) or not (OFF).

Style Out StyleOut ON/OFF

Determines whether Style data is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF)

during Style playback.

Song Out SongOut ON/OFF

Determines whether Song data is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF)

during Song playback.

Initial Send InitSend YES/NO

Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Press [+] to

send, or press [-] to cancel.

Time Signature

Numerator

TimesigN 00–60 Determines the time signature of the Metronome.

Time Signature

Denominator

TimesigD

Half note,

Quarter note,

Eighth note,

Sixteenth note

Sets the length of each metronome beat.

Metronome Volume MtrVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Metronome.

Lesson Track (R) R-Part

GuideTrack

1–16

Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson. The

setting is only effective for songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a

computer.

Lesson Track (L) L-Part

GuideTrack

1–16

Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting

is only effective for songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer.

Grade Grade ON/OFF Determines whether the Grade function is on or off.

Demo Cancel D-Cancel ON/OFF

Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is set to

ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO] button is pressed.

Setting Item title Range/Settings Description

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 85

Connecting to a Computer

Nearly all of the electronic musical instruments made today—particularly synthesizers,

sequencers and computer music related devices—use MIDI. MIDI is a worldwide stan-

dard that allows these devices to send and receive performance and setting data. Natu-

rally, this instrument lets you save or send your keyboard performance as MIDI data, as

well as the songs, styles and panel settings.

The potential MIDI holds for your live performances and music creation/production is

enormous—simply by connecting this instrument to a computer and transmitting MIDI

data. In this section, you’ll learn the basics of MIDI and the speciﬁc MIDI functions pro-

vided by this instrument.

No doubt you have heard the terms “acoustic

instrument” and “digital instrument”. In the world

today, these are the two main categories of instru-

ments. Let’s consider a grand piano and a classical

guitar as representative acoustic instruments. They

are easy to understand. With the piano, you strike a

key, and a hammer inside hits some strings and

plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a

string and the note sounds. But how does a digital

instrument go about playing a note?

As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic

instrument the sampling note (previously recorded

note) stored in the tone generator section (elec-

tronic circuit) is played based on information

received from the keyboard. So then what is the

information from the keyboard that becomes the

basis for note production?

For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note

using the grand piano sound on the instrument.

Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a reso-

nated note, the electronic instrument puts out infor-

mation from the keyboard such as “with what

voice”, “with which key”, “about how strong”,

“when was it pressed”, and “when was it released”.

Then each piece of information is changed into a

number value and sent to the tone generator. Using

these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays

the stored sampling note.

Example of Keyboard Information

Your keyboard performance and all panel opera-

tions of this instrument are processed as MIDI

data. The songs, auto accompaniment (styles), and

User songs are also made up of MIDI data.

MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instru-

ment Digital Interface and it allows different musi-

cal instruments and devices to instantly

communicate with each other, via digital data. The

MIDI standard is used all over the world and was

designed to transmit performance data between

electronic musical instruments (or computers).

Thanks to MIDI, you can control one instrument

from another and transmit performance data

between the devices-taking your creative and per-

formance potential to even higher levels.

MIDI messages can be divided into two groups:

Channel messages and System messages.

What Is MIDI?

● Acoustic guitar note production

Pluck a string and the body

resonates the sound.

● Digital instrument note production

Based on playing information from the keyboard, a sampling note

stored in the tone generator is played through the speakers.

Playing the keyboard

Tone Generator

(Electronic circuit)

Sampling

Note

Sampling

Note

Voice number (with what voice) 1 (grand piano)

Note number (with which key) 60 (C3)

Note on (when was it pressed) and

note off (when was it released)

Timing expressed

numerically (quarter note)

Velocity (about how strong) 120 (strong)

86 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Connecting to a Computer

● Channel Messages

This instrument is capable of handling 16 MIDI

channels simultaneously—meaning it can play up

to sixteen different instruments at the same time.

Channel messages transmit information such as

Note ON/OFF, Program Change, for each of the 16

channels.

● System Messages

This is data that is used in common by the entire

MIDI system. System messages include messages

like Exclusive Messages that transmit data unique

to each instrument manufacturer and Realtime

Messages that control the MIDI device.

The following functions become available when this instrument is connected to a computer.

● Performance data can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 87).

● Files can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 89).

The connection procedure is as follows:

Install the USB-MIDI driver on your com-

puter.

The USB–MIDI driver is included on the CD-ROM.

Installation of the USB MIDI driver is described on

page 92.

Connect the USB terminal of the computer

to the USB terminal on the instrument using

a standard USB cable (USB cable sold sep-

arately).

The supplied CD-ROM also includes a Musicsoft

Downloader application that allows you to transfer

song ﬁles from your computer to the instrument’s

ﬂash memory. For instructions about how to install

Musicsoft Downloader and how to transfer song

ﬁles, see page 90.

■ USB Precautions

Please observe the following precautions when

connecting the instrument to a computer via a USB

cable.

Failure to do so can cause the instrument and/or the

computer to hang up (freeze), possibly causing cor-

ruption or loss of data.

If the instrument or computer does hang up, turn

the power to both devices off and then on again,

and restart the computer.

Message Name Instrument Operation/Panel Setting

Note ON/OFF

Performance data of the keyboard (contains

note number and velocity data)

Program Change

Instrument selection (including bank select

MSB/LSB, if necessary)

Control Change Instrument settings (volume, pan, etc.)

Message Name Instrument Operation/Panel Setting

Exclusive Message Reverb/chorus settings, etc.

Realtime Messages Start/stop operation

Connecting a Personal Computer

USB cable

PSR-I425

•Wake the computer from a sleep/suspended/standby mode before

connecting the USB cable.

• Connect the USB cable to the instrument and computer before

turning power to the instrument on.

• Check the following points before turning the instrument’s power

on or off, and before plugging or unplugging the USB cable.

• Quit all applications.

• Make sure that no data transfer is in progress (data is trans-

ferred whenever you play on the keyboard or play a song).

• Allow at least 6 seconds between turning the instrument’s power

on and off, and between plugging and unplugging the USB cable.

• Directly connect the instrument to the computer using a single

USB cable. Do not use a USB hub.

CAUTION

• The Musicsoft Downloader application may not be able to access the

instrument in the following cases:

• During style playback.

• During song playback.

NOTE

Connecting to a Computer

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 87

By connecting the instrument to a computer, the instrument’s performance data can be used on the com-

puter, and performance data from the computer can be played on the instrument.

● When the instrument is connected with computer,

it transmits/receives performance data.

■MIDI settings ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

These settings pertain to performance data transmission and reception.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons

to select the item you want to change its

value.

Use the dial to select ON or OFF.

Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer

USB cable

USB terminalUSB terminal

PSR-I425

Item Range/Settings Description

Local ON/OFF

Local control determines whether or not notes played on the instrument are sounded by its internal

tone generator system: the internal tone generator is active when local control is on, and inactive when

local control is off.

External Clock ON/OFF

These settings determine whether the instrument is synchronized to its own internal clock (OFF), or to

a clock signal from an external device (ON).

Keyboard Out ON/OFF

These settings determine whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or

not (OFF).

Style Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether Style data is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Style playback.

Song Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether Song data is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Song playback.

• If you can’t get any sound out of the instrument, this most likely

may be caused by Local Control being set to off.

CAUTION

• If External Clock is ON and no clock signal is being received from

an external device, the song, style, and metronome functions will

not start.

CAUTION

88 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Connecting to a Computer

■PC Mode ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A number of MIDI settings need to be made when

you want to transfer performance data between the

computer and the instrument. The PC Mode item

can conveniently make multiple settings for you in

one operation. Three settings are available: PC1,

PC2, and OFF.

This setting is not necessary when transferring

song or backup ﬁles between the computer and the

instrument.

* Set the PC mode to PC2 when using Digital Music Note-

book.

Press and hold the [DEMO] button for

longer than a second so that the PC

Mode item appears.

Use the dial to select PC1, PC2, or OFF.

You can also use this instrument as a remote control device for the Digital Music Notebook application on

your computer (via the USB connection)—controlling playback, stop and transport functions from the key-

board.

■Remote control keys ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

To use the remote control functions, simulta-

neously hold down the lowest two keys on the key-

board (C1 and C#1) and press the appropriate key

(shown below).

PC1 PC2* OFF

Local OFF OFF ON

External Clock ON OFF OFF

Song Out OFF OFF OFF

Style Out OFF OFF OFF

Keyboard Out OFF ON ON

oFF

PC mode

• When the PC2 setting is selected the instrument’s style, song, demo,

song recording, and lesson features cannot be used.

NOTE

•You can also access the PC Mode item by ﬁrst pressing the [FUNC-

TION] button and then using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to

locate it (page 82).

NOTE

Remote Control of MIDI Devices

C#1

C6: Fast forward

B5: Start

A5: Stop

G5: Rewind

F5: Top (move to the beginning

of the song)

E5: Metronome ON/OFF

• Remote control of MIDI devices will function independently of the PC2

mode.

NOTE

Connecting to a Computer

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 89

This function lets you send the panel setup data to a computer. Before you record performance data to a

sequencer application running on your computer, it is a good idea to ﬁrst send and record the panel setup

data before the actual performance data.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY

[] and [ ]

buttons

to select the Initial Send item.

Press [+/YES] to send, or press [-/NO]

to cancel.

MIDI songs residing on a computer, as well as the

70 MIDI songs and 5 Style ﬁles provided on the

CD-ROM, can be transferred to the instrument.

Backup ﬁles can also be transferred from the

instrument to the computer and back. Songs and

styles transferred to the instrument can be used

with the instrument’s lesson and other functions.

In order to transfer songs between your computer

and the instrument you will need to install the

Musicsoft Downloader application and the USB-

MIDI Driver included on the Accessory CD-ROM

on your computer. Refer to the Accessory CD-

ROM Installation Guide on page 92 for installation

details.

■With the Musicsoft

Downloader You Can.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● Transfer MIDI songs you have downloaded

from the Internet or created on your computer

from the computer to the instrument’s ﬂash

memory.

⇒ refer to the procedure described on

page 90.

The procedure for transferring songs included

on the Accessory CD-ROM from your com-

puter to the instrument is given as an example.

Initial Send

Transferring Data between the Computer and Instrument

● Data that can be transferred from a computer

to this instrument.

• Song Capacity (max.): Flash memory 99 songs

(Song 036–)

• Data Capacity: Flash memory 373 kb

• Data Format: SMF format 0,

style ﬁle (extension: .sty),

Backup File (06PK61.BUP)

● What is SMF (Standard MIDI File)?

The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one of the

most common and widely compatible sequence

formats used for storing sequence data. There are

two variations: Format 0 and Format 1. A large

number of MIDI devices are compatible with SMF

Format 0, and most commercially available MIDI

sequence data is provided in SMF Format 0.

90 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Connecting to a Computer

● Backup ﬁles can be transferred from the instru-

ment to a computer and back.

⇒ refer to the procedure described on

page 91.

■Use Musicsoft Downloader

To Transfer Songs From the

Accessory CD-ROM To the

Instrument’s ﬂash memory

● ● ● ● ●

Install the Musicsoft Downloader and

USB MIDI driver to your computer, then

connect the computer and the instru-

ment (page 94).

Insert the included CD-ROM into the

CD-ROM drive.

A start window will appear automatically.

Double-click the Musicsoft Downloader

shortcut icon that is created on the

desktop.

This will launch the Musicsoft Downloader

application and the main window will appear.

Click the “Add File” button and the Add

File window will appear.

Click the button to the right of “Look in”

and select the CD-ROM drive from the drop-

down menu that appears. Double-click the

“SongData” Folder on the window. Select

the ﬁle you want to transfer to the instru-

ment, and click “Open”.

A copy of the selected MIDI song ﬁle

will appear in the “List of ﬁles stored

temporarily” at the top of the window.

The memory medium will also be displayed at

the bottom of the window to specify the desti-

nation for the transfer. Click the “Electronic

Musical Instruments”, and then “Flash mem-

ory.”

After selecting the ﬁle in the “List of

ﬁles stored temporarily”, click the

downward [Move] button and a conﬁr-

mation message will appear. Click [OK]

and the song will be transferred from

the “List of ﬁles stored temporarily” to

the instrument’s memory.

Use the Musicsoft Downloader application with

Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher.

• If a song or style is being played, stop playback before proceeding.

NOTE

• The instrument cannot be operated while the Musicsoft Downloader

is running.

NOTE

q Click the CD-ROM drive

w Double-click “SongData” Folder and

click a song ﬁle.

e Click “Open”

q Click the “Electronic Musical Instruments”,

and then “Flash Memory”

Connecting to a Computer

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 91

Close the window to end the Musicsoft

Downloader.

To playback a song stored in ﬂash

memory, press the [SONG] button.

Use the dial to select the song you want

to play, then press the [START/STOP]

button to start playback.

Style ﬁles (ﬁles with the “.STY” extension) can

be transferred to Flash memory using the same

procedure as described above. Style ﬁles trans-

ferred to the Flash Memory can be loaded into

style number 163 and then played (page 74).

■Transfer a backup ﬁle from

the instrument to a computer

● ● ●

You can use the Musicsoft Downloader to transfer

“Backup Files” containing backup data (page 56),

including the ﬁve User Songs stored on the instru-

ment, to a computer. If you click “Electronic Musi-

cal Instruments” in the Musicsoft Downloader

display, and then “System Drive”, a ﬁle named

“06PK61.BUP” will appear in the lower right cor-

ner of the Musicsoft Downloader display. This is

the backup ﬁle. For details about how to transmit

backup ﬁle using the Musicsoft Downloader appli-

cation, refer to the Online help in the application.

● To Use transferred Songs For Lessons...

In order to use songs (only SMF format 0)

transferred from a computer for lessons it is

necessary to specify which channels are to be

played back as the right-hand and left-hand parts.

1 Press the [SONG] button and select the song

(036–) residing in ﬂash memory for which you

want to set the guide track.

2 Press the [FUNCTION] button.

3 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to

select the R-Part or L-Part item.

4 Use the dial to select the channel you want to

play back as the speciﬁed right- or left-hand

part.

We recommend that you select channel 1 for the

right-hand part and channel 2 for the left-hand part.

• End the Musicsoft Downloader to playback the song transferred

from your computer.

NOTE

• Do not unplug the USB cable during a data transfer. Not only

will the data not be transferred and saved, but operation of the

memory media may become unstable and its contents may dis-

appear completely when the power is turned on or off.

CAUTION

• Store data can be lost due to equipment malfunction or

improper operation. For safety we recommend that you keep a

copy of all important data stored on your computer.

•We recommend that you use a power adaptor rather than bat-

teries when transferring data. The data can be corrupted if the

batteries fail during the transfer.

CAUTION

• Preset Song data cannot be transmitted from the instrument.

NOTE

• The backup data, including the ﬁve User Songs is transmitted/

received as a single ﬁle. As a result, all backup data will be over-

written every time you transmit or receive. Keep this in mind when

transferring data.

CAUTION

• Do not rename the backup ﬁle on the computer. If you do so, it will

not be recognized when transferred to the instrument.

CAUTION

92 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

This CD-ROM is copy-protected. Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with regard to any problems

while attempting to copy the CD-ROM or software and cannot be held responsible for the results of attempts to

copy the data.

• The software and this owner’s manual are the exclusive copyrights of Yamaha Corporation.

• Use of the software and this manual is governed by the license agreement which the purchaser fully agrees to upon

breaking the seal of the software packaging. (Please read carefully the Software Licensing Agreement at the end of

this manual before installing the application.)

• Copying of the software or reproduction of this manual in whole or in part by any means is expressly forbidden

without the written consent of the manufacturer.

•Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with regard to the use of the software and documentation and can-

not be held responsible for the results of the use of this manual and the software.

• This disk containing the software is not meant for use with an audio/visual system (CD player, DVD player, etc.).

Do not attempt to use the disk on equipment other than a computer.

• Future upgrades of application and system software and any changes in speciﬁcations and functions will be

announced separately.

• The screen displays as illustrated in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes, and may appear somewhat

different from the screens which appear on your computer.

● Data Types

This CD-ROM includes application software. Please refer to page 94 for software installation instructions.

● Operating System (OS)

The applications in this CD-ROM are provided in versions for Windows operating systems.

SPECIAL NOTICES

Important Notices about the CD-ROM

• Do not attempt to play this CD-ROM on an audio CD player. The

result high-volume noise can potentially cause hearing damage or

damage your CD player and speakers.

CAUTION

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 93

In order to view PDF scores, you will need to install Adobe Reader in your computer.

You can download the Adobe Reader. Please check the following URL: http://www.adobe.com/

You can obtain the latest version of the Musicsoft Downloader, Digital Music Notebook and USB-MIDI Driver at the following website.

http://music.yamaha.com/download/

■Using the CD-ROM ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Please read the Software License Agreement on

page 98 before opening the CD-ROM package.

Check the system requirements to

make sure that the software will run on

your computer.

Insert the included CD-ROM into the

CD-ROM drive.

The start window should appear automatically.

Install the USB MIDI driver to the com-

puter.

Refer to “Installing the USB-MIDI Driver” on

page 94 for installation and setup instructions.

Connect the instrument to the com-

puter.

The connection procedure is described on page

86.

Install the software.

Musicsoft Downloader:

See page 96.

Launch the software.

For further software operation refer to the online

help supplied with the software.

Refer to the “Troubleshooting” on page 97 when

you have trouble with installing the driver.

CD-ROM Contents

Folder Name Application / Data Name Contents

MSD_ Musicsoft Downloader

This application can be used to download MIDI song data from the Internet and

transfer it from the computer to the instrument’s memory.

DMN_FlashDemo Flash Demo

Digital Music Notebook is an educational content that lets you enjoy music while

learning.

Full motion demo software which introduces all features of the Digital Music

Notebook.

DMN_DemoSong Demo Song

You can experience Digital Music Notebook functions with the demo song. You need

to download and install Digital Music Notebook on your computer prior to using the

demo song.

SongBook Song Book

Includes score data for the 30 internal songs provided on the instrument as well as

70 MIDI songs provided on the CD-ROM. The exceptions are songs 1–11, and song

20 which is copyrighted. The scores for songs 9–11 are provided in this manual

beginning on page 100.

USB-MIDI Driver

(Windows 98/Me)

This driver software is necessary to connect MIDI devices to your computer via

USB.

USBdrv2k

USB-MIDI Driver

(Windows 2000/XP)

SongData MIDI 70 songs

These songs can be transferred to the instrument and played or used with the

instrument’s functions.

StyleData 5 style ﬁles

These styles can be transferred to the instrument and played or used with the

instrument’s functions.

94 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

You can conﬁrm the latest system requirements at the following website.

http://music.yamaha.com/download/

■

Installing the USB-MIDI Driver

● ● ● ●

In order to be able to communicate with and use

MIDI devices connected to your computer, the

appropriate driver software must be properly

installed on your computer.

The USB-MIDI driver allows sequence software

and similar applications on your computer to trans-

mit and receive MIDI data to and from MIDI

devices via a USB cable.

• Windows 98/Me installation ➔ page 95.

• Windows 2000 installation ➔ page 95.

• Windows XP installation ➔ page 96.

System Requirements

Application/Data OS CPU Memory Hard Disk Display

Musicsoft Downloader

Windows 98SE/Me/2000/

XP Home Edition/

XP Professional

233 MHz or higher; Intel

Pentium

/Celeron

processor family

64 MB or more

(256 MB or more

is recommended)

at least 128 MB of

free space (at least

512 MB of free

space is

recommended)

800 x 600

HighColor

(16-bit)

USB Driver for Windows

98/Me

Windows 98/Me

166 MHz or higher; Intel

Pentium

/Celeron

processor family

32 MB or more

(64 MB or more is

recommended)

at least 2 MB of free

space

—

USB Driver for Windows

2000/XP

Windows 2000/XP Home

Edition/XP Professional

Digital Music Notebook

Windows

Professional Edition,

SP1a more

Windows

XP Home

Edition, SP1a more

Windows 2000

Professional, SP4 more

400MHz or higher; Intel

Pentium

/Celeron

Processor family (1GHz

or more is recommended)

128 MB or more

(256 MB or more

is recommended)

at least 50 MB of

free space

1024 x 768

HighColor

(16-bit)

Digital Music Notebook

(Requirements for

playing content with

video included.)

1GHz or higher; Intel

Pentium

/Celeron

Processor family (1.4GHz

or more is recommended)

256 MB or more

Software Installation

● Uninstall (Removing the Software)

Installed software can be removed from your

computer as follows:

From the Windows Start menu select Start →

Settings → Control panel → Add or Remove

Applications → Install and Uninstall. Select the

item you want to remove and click [Add or

Remove]. Follow the on-screen instructions to

remove the selected software.

• The actual names of the menu items and buttons will depend on

the OS version you are using.

NOTE

Check the drive name of the CD-ROM drive you

will be using (D:, E:, Q: etc.) The drive name is

displayed beside the CD-ROM icon in your “My

Computer” folder. The root directory of the CD-

ROM drive will be D:\ , E:\ , or Q:\ , respectively.

Driver

USB

Cable

MIDI device

Computer

Sequence

software

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 95

Installing the driver on Windows 98/Me

Start the computer.

Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CD-

ROM drive. A start window will appear

automatically.

First, make sure the POWER switch on

the instrument is set to OFF, then use a

USB cable to connect the USB terminal of

the computer to the USB connector of the

instrument. When the instrument is

turned on, the computer automatically

displays the “Add New Hardware Wizard.

Otherwise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in

the “Accessory CD-ROM Installation

Guide” section of the Owner’s Manual.

For Windows Me users, check the radio button to

the left of “Automatic search for a better driver

(Recommended)” and click [Next]. The system

automatically starts searching and installing the

driver. Proceed to Step 8. If the system does not

detect the driver, select “Specify the location of

the driver (Advanced)” and specify the CD-ROM

drive’s root directory to install the driver and click

[Next]. Execute the installation by following the

onscreen instructions and proceed to Step 8.

Click [Next].

The window enables you to select the search

method.

Check the radio button to the left of

“Search for the best driver for your

device. (Recommended)”. Click [Next].

The window enables you to select a location in

which to install the driver.

Check the “Specify a location” box, click

“Browse..”, then specify the root direc-

tory of the CD-ROM drive and continue

the installation. (The CD-ROM drive letter

may vary depending on your computer’s

conﬁguration.

When the system detects the driver on

the CD-ROM and is ready for installation,

a message is shown on the screen. Make

sure that the “YAMAHA USB MIDI Driver”

is listed, and click [Next]. The system

starts the installation.

When installation is complete, a message

indicating so appears. Click [Finish].

The driver has been installed.

Installing the driver on Windows 2000

Start the computer and use the “Adminis-

trator” account to log into Windows.

Select [My Computer] ➔ [Control Panel]

➔ [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Driver Sign-

ing] ➔ [File Signature Veriﬁcation], and

check the radio button to the left of

“Ignore—Install all ﬁles, regardless of ﬁle

signature” and click [OK].

Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CD-

ROM drive. A start window will appear

automatically.

First, make sure the POWER switch on

the MIDI device is set to OFF, then use a

USB cable to connect the MIDI device to

the computer. After making the connec-

tions, turn on the power of the MIDI

device. The system automatically

launches the Found New Hardware Wiz-

ard.

Otherwise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in the

“Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide” section

of the Owner’s Manual.

Click [Next]. (Some computers may take a while

to display the Wizard window.)

Select the radio button for “Search for a

suitable driver for my device [recom-

mended]”, then click [Next].

Check the “CD-ROM drives” check box,

deselect all other check boxes, then click

[Next].

Deselect the “Install one of the other driv-

ers”, then click [Next].

When the installation is complete, the

Wizard displays “Completing the Found

New Hardware Wizard”.

Click [Finish]. (Some computers may take a

while to display the Wizard window.)

Restart the computer.

The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete.

• If you are using Windows Me, skip Step 4–7.

NOTE

• Some computers may take about ten seconds to show this screen

after the installation is complete.

NOTE

• If the Wizard panel informs you that “The software you are about to

install does not contain a Microsoft digital signature”, click [Yes].

NOTE

• If the system prompts you to insert the Windows CD-ROM during

detection of the drivers, point to the “USBdrv2k_” folder (e.g.,

D:\USBdrv2k_) and continue the installation.

NOTE

96 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

Installing the driver on Windows XP

Start the computer and use the “Adminis-

trator” account to log into Windows.

Select [Start] ➔ [Control Panel]. If the

control panel appears as “Pick a cate-

gory”, click “Switch to Classic View” in

the upper left of the window. All control

panels and icons will be displayed.

Go to [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Driver

Signing Options] and check the radio but-

ton to the left of “Ignore” and click [OK].

Click the [OK] button to close System

Properties, and then click “X” in the upper

right of the window to close the Control

Panel.

Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CD-

ROM drive. A start window will appear

automatically.

First, make sure the POWER switch on

the MIDI device is set to OFF, then use a

USB cable to connect the MIDI device to

the computer. After making the connec-

tions, turn on the power of the MIDI

device. The system launches the Found

New Hardware Wizard automatically. Oth-

erwise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in the

“Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide”

section of the Owner’s Manual. If the sys-

tem displays “Found New Hardware” in

the lower right corner, wait until Wizard

window is displayed. (Some computers

may take a while to display the window.)

If the Wizard window prompts you to specify

whether or not to connect to Windows Update,

select the radio button for “No, not this time”,

then click [Next].

Select the radio button for “Install the

software automatically (recommended)”,

then click [Next].

When the installation is complete, the

Wizard displays “Completing the Found

New Hardware Wizard”.

Click [Finish]. (Some computers may take a

while to display the Wizard window.)

Restart the computer.

If the system displays “Found New Hardware” in

the lower right corner, wait until the Wizard win-

dow is displayed. (Some computers may take a

while to display the Wizard window.)

The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete.

■Installing the Musicsoft

Downloader and Digital

Music Notebook Applications

● ● ●

Insert the Accessory CD-ROM into your

computer’s CD-ROM drive. The start win-

dow will appear automatically showing

software applications.

Click [Musicsoft Downloader] or [Digital

Music Notebook].

Click the [install] button for Musicsoft

downloader, or [Digital Music Notebook

Download] button for Digital Music Note-

book, and follow the on-screen instruc-

tions to install the software.

For Digital Music Notebook operating instruc-

tions see the help menu: launch the Digital Music

Notebook application and click “Help”.

For Musicsoft Downloader operating instruc-

tions see the Help menu: launch the Musicsoft

Downloader application and click “Help”.

*You can obtain the latest version of the Musicsoft

Downloader at the following website.

http://music.yamaha.com/download/

• If during the installation the system displays “...has not passed Win-

dows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows XP”, click

[Continue Anyway].

NOTE

•You will need to log in with administrator (root) privileges in order

to install Musicsoft Downloader on a computer running Windows

2000 or XP.

•You will need to log in with administrator (root) privileges in order

to install Digital Music Notebook on a computer running Windows

2000 or XP.

IMPORTANT

• When installing the Digital Music Notebook, make sure that Inter-

net Explorer 6.0 (with SP1) or higher is installed to your computer.

IMPORTANT

• Credit card settlement is required to purchase Digital Music Note-

book content. Credit card processing may not be possible for

some areas, so please check with your local authorities to make

sure that your credit card can be used.

IMPORTANT

• Use of the DMN (Digital Music Notebook) is governed by the SIBELIUS

SCORCH LICENSE AGREEMENT, which the purchaser fully agrees to

when using the application. Please read carefully the AGREEMENT at

the end of this manual before using the application.

NOTE

• If the start window does not appear automatically, double click your

“My Computer” folder to open it. Right-click the CD-ROM icon and

select “Open” from the pop-up menu. Double click “Start.exe” and

proceed to step 2, below.

NOTE

• Only Musicsoft Downloader can be used to transfer ﬁles between

this instrument and a computer. No other ﬁle transfer application

can be used.

IMPORTANT

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 97

■Troubleshooting

• Is the USB cable connected correctly?

Check the USB cable connection. Disconnect the

USB cable, then connect it again.

• Is the USB function enabled on your com-

puter?

When you connect the instrument to the

computer for the ﬁrst time, if the “Add New

Hardware Wizard” does not appear, the USB

function on the computer may be disabled.

Perform the following steps.

1 Select [Control Panel] ➔ [System] ➔

[Device Manager] (for Windows 98/Me), or

select [Control Panel]* ➔ [System] ➔

[Hardware] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Win-

dows 2000/XP).

* Classic View only in Windows XP.

2 Make sure that no “!” or “x” marks appear

at “Universal serial bus controller” or

“USB Root Hub”. If you see an “!” or “x”

mark, the USB controller is disabled.

• Is any unknown device registered?

If driver installation fails, the instrument will be

marked as an “Unknown device”, and you will

not be able to install the driver. Delete the

“Unknown device” by following the steps below.

1 Select [Control Panel] ➔ [System] ➔

[Device Manager] (for Windows 98/Me), or

select [Control Panel]* ➔ [System] ➔

[Hardware] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Win-

dows 2000/XP).

* Classic View only in Windows XP.

2 Look for “Other devices” in the menu

“View devices by type”.

3 If you ﬁnd “Other devices”, double-click it

to extend the tree to look for “Unknown

device”. If one appears, select it and click

the [Remove] button.

4 Remove the USB cable from the instru-

ment, and make the connection again.

5 Install the driver again.

•Windows 98/Me users...... see page 95

•Windows 2000 users........ see page 95

•Windows XP users........... see page 96

• Did you install the driver? (page 94)

• Is the USB cable connected correctly?

•Are the volume settings of the instrument,

playback device, and application program set

to the appropriate levels?

•Have you selected an appropriate port in the

sequence software?

•Are you using the latest USB MIDI driver?

The latest driver can be downloaded from the

following web site.

http://music.yamaha.com/download/

• Does your computer satisfy the system

requirements?

• Is any other application or device driver run-

ning?

• Do not suspend the computer while the MIDI

application is running.

If you are using Windows 2000, you may not be

able to suspend/resume normally, depending on

the particular environment (USB Host Controller,

etc.). Even so, simply disconnecting and

connecting the USB cable will allow you to use

the instrument functions again.

[Windows Me/98]

1 When the instrument is recognized cor-

rectly, double-click “System” in the Con-

trol Panel to open the System window.

2 Double-click the “Device Manager” tab,

select “YAMAHA USB MIDI Driver” and

delete it.

3 Use the MS-DOS prompt or Explorer to

delete the following three ﬁles.

The driver cannot be installed. When controlling the instrument from

your computer via USB, the instrument

does not operate correctly or no sound

is heard.

Playback response is delayed.

Cannot suspend or resume the

computer correctly.

How can I delete or re-install the

driver?

98 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

4 Disconnect the USB cable.

5 Restart the computer.

6 Re-install the driver.

ATTENTION

SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT

PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (“AGREE-

MENT”) CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE. YOU ARE

ONLY PERMITTED TO USE THIS SOFTWARE PURSUANT TO THE

TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THIS AGREEMENT

IS BETWEEN YOU (AS AN INDIVIDUAL OR LEGAL ENTITY) AND

YAMAHA CORPORATION (“YAMAHA”).

BY BREAKING THE SEAL OF THIS PACKAGE YOU ARE AGREEING TO

BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE

WITH THE TERMS, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY, OR OTHERWISE USE THIS

SOFTWARE.

1. GRANT OF LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT

Yamaha hereby grants you the right to use one copy of the software program(s)

and data (“SOFTWARE”) accompanying this Agreement. The term SOFT-

WARE shall encompass any updates to the accompanying software and data.

The SOFTWARE is owned by Yamaha and/or Yamaha’s licensor(s), and is pro-

tected by relevant copyright laws and all applicable treaty provisions. While

you are entitled to claim ownership of the data created with the use of SOFT-

WARE, the SOFTWARE will continue to be protected under relevant copy-

rights.

• You may use the SOFTWARE on a single computer.

• You may make one copy of the SOFTWARE in machine-readable form for

backup purposes only, if the SOFTWARE is on media where such backup

copy is permitted. On the backup copy, you must reproduce Yamaha’s copy-

right notice and any other proprietary legends that were on the original copy

of the SOFTWARE.

• You may permanently transfer to a third party all your rights in the SOFT-

WARE, provided that you do not retain any copies and the recipient reads

and agrees to the terms of this Agreement.

2. RESTRICTIONS

• You may not engage in reverse engineering, disassembly, decompilation or

otherwise deriving a source code form of the SOFTWARE by any method

whatsoever.

• You may not reproduce, modify, change, rent, lease, or distribute the SOFT-

WARE in whole or in part, or create derivative works of the SOFTWARE.

• You may not electronically transmit the SOFTWARE from one computer to

another or share the SOFTWARE in a network with other computers.

• You may not use the SOFTWARE to distribute illegal data or data that vio-

lates public policy.

• You may not initiate services based on the use of the SOFTWARE without

permission by Yamaha Corporation

Copyrighted data, including but not limited to MIDI data for songs, obtained

by means of the SOFTWARE, are subject to the following restrictions which

you must observe.

• Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be used for any com-

mercial purposes without permission of the copyright owner.

• Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be duplicated, trans-

ferred, or distributed, or played back or performed for listeners in public

without permission of the copyright owner.

• The encryption of data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be

removed nor may the electronic watermark be modiﬁed without permission

of the copyright owner.

3. TERMINATION

This Agreement becomes effective on the day that you receive the SOFT-

WARE and remains effective until terminated. If any copyright law or provi-

sions of this Agreement is violated, the Agreement shall terminate

automatically and immediately without notice from Yamaha. Upon such ter-

mination, you must immediately destroy the licensed SOFTWARE, any

accompanying written documents and all copies thereof.

4. LIMITED WARRANTY ON MEDIA

As to SOFTWARE sold on tangible media, Yamaha warrants that the tangible

media on which the SOFTWARE is recorded will be free from defects in mate-

rials and workmanship under normal use for a period of fourteen (14) days

from the date of receipt, as evidenced by a copy of the receipt. Yamaha’s entire

liability and your exclusive remedy will be replacement of the defective media

if it is returned to Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha dealer within fourteen days

with a copy of the receipt. Yamaha is not responsible for replacing media dam-

aged by accident, abuse or misapplication. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT

PERMITTED BY LAW, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY

IMPLIED WARRANTIES ON THE TANGIBLE MEDIA, INCLUDING THE

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR

A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

5. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY ON SOFTWARE

You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of the SOFTWARE is at your

sole risk. The SOFTWARE and related documentation are provided “AS IS”

and without warranty of any kind. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER

PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DIS-

CLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AS TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS, AND

IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WAR-

RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS.

SPECIFICALLY, BUT WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING,

YAMAHA DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET

YOUR REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE

WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN

THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED.

6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

YAMAHA’S ENTIRE OBLIGATION HEREUNDER SHALL BE TO PER-

MIT USE OF THE SOFTWARE UNDER THE TERMS HEREOF. IN NO

EVENT SHALL YAMAHA BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PER-

SON FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY

DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,

EXPENSES, LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA OR OTHER DAMAGES ARIS-

ING OUT OF THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFT-

WARE, EVEN IF YAMAHA OR AN AUTHORIZED DEALER HAS BEEN

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. In no event shall

Yamaha’s total liability to you for all damages, losses and causes of action

(whether in contract, tort or otherwise) exceed the amount paid for the SOFT-

WARE.

7. THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE

Third party software and data (“THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE”) may be

attached to the SOFTWARE. If, in the written materials or the electronic data

accompanying the Software, Yamaha identiﬁes any software and data as

THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, you acknowledge and agree that you must

abide by the provisions of any Agreement provided with the THIRD PARTY

SOFTWARE and that the party providing the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is

responsible for any warranty or liability related to or arising from the THIRD

PARTY SOFTWARE. Yamaha is not responsible in any way for the THIRD

PARTY SOFTWARE or your use thereof.

•Yamaha provides no express warranties as to the THIRD PARTY SOFT-

WARE. IN ADDITION, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL

IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR

A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.

•Yamaha shall not provide you with any service or maintenance as to the

THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.

•Yamaha is not liable to you or any other person for any damages, including,

without limitation, any direct, indirect, incidental or consequential damages,

expenses, lost proﬁts, lost data or other damages arising out of the use, mis-

use or inability to use the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.

8. GENERAL

This Agreement shall be interpreted according to and governed by Japanese

law without reference to principles of conﬂict of laws. Any dispute or proce-

dure shall be heard before the Tokyo District Court in Japan. If for any reason

a court of competent jurisdiction ﬁnds any portion of this Agreement to be

unenforceable, the remainder of this Agreement shall continue in full force and

effect.

9. COMPLETE AGREEMENT

This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with

respect to use of the SOFTWARE and any accompanying written materials

and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements,

written or oral, regarding the subject matter of this Agreement. No amend-

ment or revision of this Agreement will be binding unless in writing and

signed by a fully authorized representative of Yamaha.

•To delete these ﬁles using Explorer, select “Folder Options” from

the Tool (View) menu, and select “Show all ﬁles” (and folders).

• \WINDOWS\INF\OTHER\1037.INF

• \WINDOWS\SYSTEM\Xgusb.drv

• \WINDOWS\SYSTEM\Ymidusb.sys

NOTE

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 99

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping

sound is temporarily produced.

This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical power.

When using a mobile phone, noise is produced.

Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce interfer-

ence. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the

instrument.

There is no sound even when the keyboard is played or

when a song or style is being played back.

Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on the rear

panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is output.

Check the Local Control on/off. (See page 87.)

Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard

does not produce any sound.

When using the Dictionary function (page 77), the keys in the right hand area

are used only for entering the chord root and type.

• The volume is too soft.

• The sound quality is poor.

• The rhythm stops unexpectedly or will not play.

• The recorded data of the song, etc. does not play cor-

rectly.

• The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and all panel

settings are reset.

The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with completely new

ones, or use the optional AC adaptor.

The style or song does not play back when the

[START/STOP] button is pressed.

Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF; refer to

“External Clock” on page 87.

The style does not sound properly.

Make sure that the Style Volume (page 83) is set to an appropriate level.

Is the split point set at an appropriate key for the cords you are playing? Set the

split point at an appropriate key (page 72).

Is the “ACMP ON” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing press the

[ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show.

No rhythm accompaniment plays when the [START/

STOP] button is pressed after selecting style number

138 or a style between 150 and 162 (Pianist).

This is not a malfunction. Style number 138 and style numbers 150–162 (Pia-

nist) have no rhythm parts, so no rhythm will play. The other parts will begin

playing when you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard if

style playback is turned on.

Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound

seems to be cut off.

The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes. If the Dual voice or

Split voice is being used and a style or song is playing back at the same time,

some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “stolen”) from the accompaniment or

song.

Some notes don’t sound when playing multiple notes

simultaneously on the keyboard, or some notes don’t

sound when playing arpeggios.

You have exceeded 32 simultaneous notes, which is the maximum polyphony

(the maximum number of notes that can be played simultaneously) of the

instrument. The instrument will play normally as long as no more than 32 notes

are being played at once, both on the keyboard and by any automatic playback

functions.

The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the

opposite effect. For example, pressing the footswitch

cuts off the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds.

The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug is

properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power.

The sound of the voice changes from note to note.

This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings

(samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual

sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note.

The wrong notes sound when the keyboard is played.

Perhaps the performance assistant technology is turned on.

Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button to turn it off.

The ACMP ON indicator does not appear when the

[ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed.

Is the [STYLE] button lit? Always press the [STYLE] button ﬁrst when you are

going to use any style-related function.

There is no harmony sound.

The harmony effects (01–26) behave differently according to their type. Types

01–05 function when style playback is on, chords are played in the accompani-

ment range of the keyboard, and a melody is played in the right-hand range.

Types 06–26 will function whether style playback is on or off. For types 06 = 12

you need to play two notes at the same time.

Appendix

100 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Scores

This demo is an example of how the Easy Song Arranger can be used to change styles throughout a piece.

Hallelujah Chorus

Song No. 9 qq

=123

(Function Demo for Easy Song Arranger)

Scores

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 101

Scores

102 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

This score is provided with the intent that the pitch will be corrected by the performance assistant technol-

ogy feature. If you play the “Play These Notes” part using the performance assistant technology feature, the

part will be corrected and played so that it matches the backing part.

Ave Maria

Song No. 10 qq

=61

(Function Demo for performance assistant technology)

Repeatedly Play the Same Key.

P.A.T.

Your Turn.

Type =CHORD

Scores

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 103

Scores

104 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

This score is provided with the intent that the pitch will be corrected by the performance assistant technol-

ogy feature. If you play the “Play These Notes” part using the performance assistant technology feature, the

part will be corrected and played so that it matches the backing part.

Nocturne op.9-2

Song No. 11 qq

=108

(Function Demo for performance assistant technology)

P.A.T.

You Can Even Play the Same Keys!

Type =CHORD

Scores

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 105

106 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Let’s play the Tabla

■ Instruction Flow:

Press the [VOICE] button.

Use the dial or the number buttons to

select 129 (Teen Tal C).

Press and hold the [ACMP ON/OFF] but-

ton for longer than a second and “Split-

Pnt” will appear in the display.

Use the dial or the number buttons to

change the split point to 83.

Press the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button and

split voice icon will appear in the dis-

play.

Press and hold the [SPLIT ON/OFF] but-

ton for longer than a second and

“S.Voice” will appear in the display.

Use the dial or the number buttons to

select the Split Voice number 145 (Har-

monium 2).

Press the CATEGORY [ ] button twice

and “S.Octave” will appear in the dis-

play.

Press the number [0] button to set the

octave 0.

Play the keyboard.

Set the Voice

number to 129

(Teen Tal C).

Set the split

point to 83.

Set the Split Voice

number to 145

(Harmonium 2).

Set the octave

range for the Split

Voice to 0.

Now play

the Tabla.

● Changing the Tabla type

You can change the Tabla type by selecting the Arpeggio type (51–62). Press and hold the

[ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button for longer than a second and select the arpeggio type (51–62).

Split

point

Harmonium 2 Teen Tal C

Hold the Keyboards.Play the Keyboards.

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 107

Voice List

■ Maximum Polyphony ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

The instrument has 32-note maximum polyphony. This means

that it can play a maximum of up to 32 notes at once, regard-

less of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a

number of the available notes, so when auto accompaniment

is used the total number of available notes for playing on the

keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the

Split Voice and Song functions. If the maximum polyphony is

exceeded, earlier played notes will be cut off and the most

recent notes have priority (last note priority).

● Panel Voice List

• The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for

each voice. Use these program change numbers when

playing the instrument via MIDI from an external device.

• Program Numbers 001 to 128 directly relate to MIDI Pro-

gram Change Numbers 000 to 127. That is, Program

Numbers and Program Change Numbers differ by a value

of 1. Remember to take this into consideration.

• Some voices may sound continuously or have a long

decay after the notes have been released while the sus-

tain pedal (footswitch) is held.

NOTE

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

PIANO

001 000 112 001 Grand Piano

002 000 112 002 Bright Piano

003 000 112 007 Harpsichord

004 000 112 004 Honky-tonk Piano

005 000 112 003 MIDI Grand Piano

006 000 113 003 CP 80

E.PIANO

007 000 114 005 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano

008 000 113 006 Hyper Tines

009 000 112 005 Funky Electric Piano

010 000 112 006 DX Modern Electric Piano

011 000 114 006 Venus Electric Piano

012 000 112 008 Clavi

ORGAN

013 000 118 019 Cool! Organ

014 000 117 019 Cool! Rotor Organ

015 000 112 017 Jazz Organ 1

016 000 113 017 Jazz Organ 2

017 000 112 019 Rock Organ

018 000 114 019 Purple Organ

019 000 112 018 Click Organ

020 000 116 017 Bright Organ

021 000 127 019 Theater Organ

022 000 121 020 16'+2' Organ

023 000 120 020 16'+4' Organ

024 000 113 020 Chapel Organ

025 000 112 020 Church Organ

026 000 112 021 Reed Organ

ACCORDION

027 000 112 022 Musette Accordion

028 000 113 022 Traditional Accordion

029 000 113 024 Bandoneon

030 000 113 023 Modern Harp

031 000 112 023 Harmonica

GUITAR

032 000 112 025 Classical Guitar

033 000 112 026 Folk Guitar

034 000 112 027 Jazz Guitar

035 000 117 028 60’s Clean Guitar

036 000 113 026 12Strings Guitar

037 000 112 028 Clean Guitar

038 000 113 027 Octave Guitar

039 000 112 029 Muted Guitar

040 000 112 030 Overdriven Guitar

041 000 112 031 Distortion Guitar

BASS

042 000 112 034 Finger Bass

043 000 112 033 Acoustic Bass

044 000 112 035 Pick Bass

045 000 112 036 Fretless Bass

046 000 112 037 Slap Bass

047 000 112 039 Synth Bass

048 000 113 039 Hi-Q Bass

049 000 113 040 Dance Bass

STRINGS

050 000 112 049 String Ensemble

051 000 112 050 Chamber Strings

052 000 113 050 Slow Strings

053 000 112 045 Tremolo Strings

054 000 112 051 Synth Strings

055 000 112 046 Pizzicato Strings

056 000 112 041 Violin

057 000 112 043 Cello

058 000 112 044 Contrabass

059 000 112 047 Harp

060 000 112 106 Banjo

061 000 112 056 Orchestra Hit

CHOIR

062 000 112 053 Choir

063 000 113 053 Vocal Ensemble

064 000 112 055 Air Choir

065 000 112 054 Vox Humana

SAXOPHONE

066 000 117 067 Sweet! Tenor Sax

067 000 113 065 Sweet! Soprano Sax

068 000 112 067 Tenor Sax

069 000 112 066 Alto Sax

070 000 112 065 Soprano Sax

071 000 112 068 Baritone Sax

072 000 114 067 Breathy Tenor Sax

073 000 112 072 Clarinet

074 000 112 069 Oboe

075 000 112 070 English Horn

076 000 112 071 Bassoon

TRUMPET

077 000 115 057 Sweet! Trumpet

078 000 112 057 Trumpet

079 000 112 058 Trombone

080 000 113 058 Trombone Section

081 000 112 060 Muted Trumpet

082 000 112 061 French Horn

083 000 112 059 Tuba

BRASS

084 000 112 062 Brass Section

085 000 113 062 Big Band Brass

086 000 113 063 80’s Brass

087 000 119 062 Mellow Horns

088 000 114 063 Techno Brass

089 000 112 063 Synth Brass

FLUTE

090 000 114 074 Sweet! Flute

091 000 113 076 Sweet! Pan Flute

092 000 112 074 Flute

093 000 112 073 Piccolo

094 000 112 076 Pan Flute

095 000 112 075 Recorder

096 000 112 080 Ocarina

SYNTH LEAD

097 000 112 081 Square Lead

098 000 112 082 Sawtooth Lead

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

Voice List

108 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

● XGlite Voice/XGlite Optional Voice* List

099 000 115 082 Analogon

100 000 119 082 Fargo

101 000 112 099 Star Dust

102 000 112 086 Voice Lead

103 000 112 101 Brightness

SYNTH PAD

104 000 112 092 Xenon Pad

105 000 112 095 Equinox

106 000 112 089 Fantasia

107 000 113 090 Dark Moon

108 000 113 101 Bell Pad

PERCUSSION

109 000 112 012 Vibraphone

110 000 112 013 Marimba

111 000 112 014 Xylophone

112 000 112 115 Steel Drums

113 000 112 009 Celesta

114 000 112 011 Music Box

115 000 112 015 Tubular Bells

116 000 112 048 Timpani

DRUM KITS

117 127 000 001 Standard Kit 1

118 127 000 002 Standard Kit 2

119 127 000 009 Room Kit

120 127 000 017 Rock Kit

121 127 000 025 Electronic Kit

122 127 000 026 Analog Kit

123 127 000 113 Dance Kit

124 127 000 033 Jazz Kit

125 127 000 041 Brush Kit

126 127 000 049 Symphony Kit

127 126 000 001 SFX Kit 1

128 126 000 002 SFX Kit 2

ARPEGGIO

129 126 000 116 Teen Tal C

130 126 000 116 Teen Tal F

131 126 000 116 Teen Tal A

132 126 000 116 Dadra D

133 126 000 116 Dadra E

134 126 000 116 Dadra G

135 000 112 081 Synth Sequence

136 000 096 082 Chord Sequence

137 000 000 081 Square Pulse

138 000 113 063 Trance

139 000 114 063 Synth Echo

140 000 112 001 Piano Arpeggio

141 000 117 028 Guitar Chord

142 000 112 025 Guitar Arpeggio

143 127 000 002 Massive Percussion

INDIAN

144 000 113 021 Harmonium 1 (Single Reed)

145 000 114 021 Harmonium 2 (Double Reed)

146 000 115 021 Harmonium 3 (Triple Reed)

147 000 117 074 Bansuri

148 000 112 105 Sitar 1

149 000 113 105 Sitar 2

150 000 115 105 Sarod

151 000 114 105 Tanpura

152 126 000 116 Tabla Kit

153 126 000 115 Indian Kit

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

PIANO

154 000 000 001 Grand Piano

155 000 001 001 Grand Piano KSP

156 000 040 001 Piano Strings

157 000 041 001 Dream

158 000 000 002 Bright Piano

159 000 001 002 Bright Piano KSP

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

160 000 000 003 Electric Grand Piano

161 000 001 003 Electric Grand Piano KSP

162 000 032 003 Detuned CP80

163 000 000 004 Honky-tonk Piano

164 000 001 004 Honky-tonk Piano KSP

165 000 000 005 Electric Piano 1

166 000 001 005 Electric Piano 1 KSP

167 000 032 005 Chorus Electric Piano 1

168 000 000 006 Electric Piano 2

169 000 001 006 Electric Piano 2 KSP

*170 000 032 006 Chorus Electric Piano 2

171 000 041 006 DX + Analog Electric Piano

172 000 000 007 Harpsichord

173 000 001 007 Harpsichord KSP

174 000 035 007 Harpsichord 2

175 000 000 008 Clavi

176 000 001 008 Clavi KSP

CHROMATIC

177 000 000 009 Celesta

178 000 000 010 Glockenspiel

179 000 000 011 Music Box

180 000 064 011 Orgel

181 000 000 012 Vibraphone

182 000 001 012 Vibraphone KSP

183 000 000 013 Marimba

184 000 001 013 Marimba KSP

185 000 064 013 Sine Marimba

186 000 097 013 Balimba

187 000 098 013 Log Drums

188 000 000 014 Xylophone

189 000 000 015 Tubular Bells

190 000 096 015 Church Bells

191 000 097 015 Carillon

192 000 000 016 Dulcimer

193 000 035 016 Dulcimer 2

194 000 096 016 Cimbalom

195 000 097 016 Santur

ORGAN

196 000 000 017 Drawbar Organ

197 000 032 017 Detuned Drawbar Organ

198 000 033 017 60’s Drawbar Organ 1

199 000 034 017 60’s Drawbar Organ 2

200 000 035 017 70’s Drawbar Organ 1

201 000 037 017 60’s Drawbar Organ 3

202 000 040 017 16+2'2/3

203 000 064 017 Organ Bass

204 000 065 017 70’s Drawbar Organ 2

205 000 066 017 Cheezy Organ

206 000 067 017 Drawbar Organ 2

207 000 000 018 Percussive Organ

208 000 024 018 70’s Percussive Organ

209 000 032 018 Detuned Percussive Organ

210 000 033 018 Light Organ

211 000 037 018 Percussive Organ 2

212 000 000 019 Rock Organ

213 000 064 019 Rotary Organ

214 000 065 019 Slow Rotary

215 000 066 019 Fast Rotary

216 000 000 020 Church Organ

217 000 032 020 Church Organ 3

218 000 035 020 Church Organ 2

219 000 040 020 Notre Dame

220 000 064 020 Organ Flute

221 000 065 020 Tremolo Organ Flute

222 000 000 021 Reed Organ

223 000 040 021 Puff Organ

224 000 000 022 Accordion

225 000 000 023 Harmonica

226 000 032 023 Harmonica 2

227 000 000 024 Tango Accordion

228 000 064 024 Tango Accordion 2

GUITAR

229 000 000 025 Nylon Guitar

230 000 043 025 Velocity Guitar Harmonics

231 000 096 025 Ukulele

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

Voice List

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 109

232 000 000 026 Steel Guitar

233 000 035 026 12-string Guitar

234 000 040 026 Nylon & Steel Guitar

235 000 041 026 Steel Guitar with Body Sound

236 000 096 026 Mandolin

237 000 000 027 Jazz Guitar

238 000 032 027 Jazz Amp

239 000 000 028 Clean Guitar

240 000 032 028 Chorus Guitar

241 000 000 029 Muted Guitar

242 000 040 029 Funk Guitar

243 000 041 029 Muted Steel Guitar

244 000 045 029 Jazz Man

245 000 000 030 Overdriven Guitar

246 000 043 030 Guitar Pinch

247 000 000 031 Distortion Guitar

248 000 040 031 Feedback Guitar

249 000 041 031 Feedback Guitar 2

250 000 000 032 Guitar Harmonics

251 000 065 032 Guitar Feedback

252 000 066 032 Guitar Harmonics 2

BASS

253 000 000 033 Acoustic Bass

254 000 040 033 Jazz Rhythm

255 000 045 033 Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass

256 000 000 034 Finger Bass

257 000 018 034 Finger Dark

258 000 040 034 Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar

259 000 043 034 Finger Slap Bass

260 000 045 034 Finger Bass 2

261 000 065 034 Modulated Bass

262 000 000 035 Pick Bass

263 000 028 035 Muted Pick Bass

264 000 000 036 Fretless Bass

265 000 032 036 Fretless Bass 2

266 000 033 036 Fretless Bass 3

267 000 034 036 Fretless Bass 4

268 000 000 037 Slap Bass 1

269 000 032 037 Punch Thumb Bass

270 000 000 038 Slap Bass 2

271 000 043 038 Velocity Switch Slap

272 000 000 039 Synth Bass 1

273 000 040 039 Techno Synth Bass

274 000 000 040 Synth Bass 2

275 000 006 040 Mellow Synth Bass

276 000 012 040 Sequenced Bass

277 000 018 040 Click Synth Bass

278 000 019 040 Synth Bass 2 Dark

*279 000 040 040 Modular Synth Bass

280 000 041 040 DX Bass

STRINGS

281 000 000 041 Violin

282 000 008 041 Slow Violin

283 000 000 042 Viola

284 000 000 043 Cello

285 000 000 044 Contrabass

286 000 000 045 Tremolo Strings

287 000 008 045 Slow Tremolo Strings

288 000 040 045 Suspense Strings

289 000 000 046 Pizzicato Strings

290 000 000 047 Orchestral Harp

291 000 040 047 Yang Chin

292 000 000 048 Timpani

ENSEMBLE

293 000 000 049 Strings 1

294 000 003 049 Stereo Strings

295 000 008 049 Slow Strings

296 000 035 049 60’s Strings

297 000 040 049 Orchestra

298 000 041 049 Orchestra 2

299 000 042 049 Tremolo Orchestra

300 000 045 049 Velocity Strings

301 000 000 050 Strings 2

302 000 003 050 Stereo Slow Strings

303 000 008 050 Legato Strings

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

304 000 040 050 Warm Strings

305 000 041 050 Kingdom

306 000 000 051 Synth Strings 1

307 000 000 052 Synth Strings 2

308 000 000 053 Choir Aahs

309 000 003 053 Stereo Choir

310 000 032 053 Mellow Choir

311 000 040 053 Choir Strings

312 000 000 054 Voice Oohs

313 000 000 055 Synth Voice

314 000 040 055 Synth Voice 2

315 000 041 055 Choral

316 000 064 055 Analog Voice

317 000 000 056 Orchestra Hit

318 000 035 056 Orchestra Hit 2

319 000 064 056 Impact

BRASS

320 000 000 057 Trumpet

321 000 032 057 Warm Trumpet

322 000 000 058 Trombone

323 000 018 058 Trombone 2

324 000 000 059 Tuba

325 000 000 060 Muted Trumpet

326 000 000 061 French Horn

327 000 006 061 French Horn Solo

328 000 032 061 French Horn 2

329 000 037 061 Horn Orchestra

330 000 000 062 Brass Section

331 000 035 062 Trumpet & Trombone Section

332 000 000 063 Synth Brass 1

333 000 020 063 Resonant Synth Brass

334 000 000 064 Synth Brass 2

335 000 018 064 Soft Brass

336 000 041 064 Choir Brass

REED

337 000 000 065 Soprano Sax

338 000 000 066 Alto Sax

339 000 040 066 Sax Section

340 000 000 067 Tenor Sax

341 000 040 067 Breathy Tenor Sax

342 000 000 068 Baritone Sax

343 000 000 069 Oboe

344 000 000 070 English Horn

345 000 000 071 Bassoon

346 000 000 072 Clarinet

PIPE

347 000 000 073 Piccolo

348 000 000 074 Flute

349 000 000 075 Recorder

350 000 000 076 Pan Flute

351 000 000 077 Blown Bottle

352 000 000 078 Shakuhachi

353 000 000 079 Whistle

354 000 000 080 Ocarina

SYNTH LEAD

355 000 000 081 Square Lead

356 000 006 081 Square Lead 2

357 000 008 081 LM Square

358 000 018 081 Hollow

359 000 019 081 Shroud

360 000 064 081 Mellow

361 000 065 081 Solo Sine

362 000 066 081 Sine Lead

363 000 000 082 Sawtooth Lead

364 000 006 082 Sawtooth Lead 2

365 000 008 082 Thick Sawtooth

366 000 018 082 Dynamic Sawtooth

367 000 019 082 Digital Sawtooth

368 000 020 082 Big Lead

369 000 096 082 Sequenced Analog

370 000 000 083 Calliope Lead

371 000 065 083 Pure Lead

372 000 000 084 Chiff Lead

373 000 000 085 Charang Lead

374 000 064 085 Distorted Lead

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

Voice List

110 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

The voice number with an asterisk (*) is XGlite optional voice.

375 000 000 086 Voice Lead

376 000 000 087 Fifths Lead

377 000 035 087 Big Five

378 000 000 088 Bass & Lead

379 000 016 088 Big & Low

380 000 064 088 Fat & Perky

381 000 065 088 Soft Whirl

SYNTH PAD

382 000 000 089 New Age Pad

383 000 064 089 Fantasy

384 000 000 090 Warm Pad

385 000 000 091 Poly Synth Pad

386 000 000 092 Choir Pad

387 000 066 092 Itopia

388 000 000 093 Bowed Pad

389 000 000 094 Metallic Pad

390 000 000 095 Halo Pad

391 000 000 096 Sweep Pad

SYNTH EFFECTS

392 000 000 097 Rain

393 000 065 097 African Wind

394 000 066 097 Carib

395 000 000 098 Sound Track

396 000 027 098 Prologue

397 000 000 099 Crystal

398 000 012 099 Synth Drum Comp

399 000 014 099 Popcorn

400 000 018 099 Tiny Bells

401 000 035 099 Round Glockenspiel

402 000 040 099 Glockenspiel Chimes

403 000 041 099 Clear Bells

404 000 042 099 Chorus Bells

405 000 065 099 Soft Crystal

406 000 070 099 Air Bells

407 000 071 099 Bell Harp

408 000 072 099 Gamelimba

409 000 000 100 Atmosphere

410 000 018 100 Warm Atmosphere

411 000 019 100 Hollow Release

412 000 040 100 Nylon Electric Piano

413 000 064 100 Nylon Harp

414 000 065 100 Harp Vox

415 000 066 100 Atmosphere Pad

416 000 000 101 Brightness

417 000 000 102 Goblins

418 000 064 102 Goblins Synth

419 000 065 102 Creeper

420 000 067 102 Ritual

421 000 068 102 To Heaven

422 000 070 102 Night

423 000 071 102 Glisten

424 000 096 102 Bell Choir

425 000 000 103 Echoes

426 000 000 104 Sci-Fi

WORLD

427 000 000 105 Sitar

428 000 032 105 Detuned Sitar

429 000 035 105 Sitar 2

430 000 097 105 Tamboura

431 000 000 106 Banjo

432 000 028 106 Muted Banjo

433 000 096 106 Rabab

434 000 097 106 Gopichant

435 000 098 106 Oud

436 000 000 107 Shamisen

437 000 000 108 Koto

438 000 096 108 Taisho-kin

439 000 097 108 Kanoon

440 000 000 109 Kalimba

441 000 000 110 Bagpipe

442 000 000 111 Fiddle

443 000 000 112 Shanai

PERCUSSIVE

444 000 000 113 Tinkle Bell

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

445 000 096 113 Bonang

446 000 097 113 Altair

447 000 098 113 Gamelan Gongs

448 000 099 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs

449 000 100 113 Rama Cymbal

450 000 000 114 Agogo

451 000 000 115 Steel Drums

452 000 097 115 Glass Percussion

453 000 098 115 Thai Bells

454 000 000 116 Woodblock

455 000 096 116 Castanets

456 000 000 117 Taiko Drum

457 000 096 117 Gran Cassa

458 000 000 118 Melodic Tom

459 000 064 118 Melodic Tom 2

460 000 065 118 Real Tom

461 000 066 118 Rock Tom

462 000 000 119 Synth Drum

463 000 064 119 Analog Tom

464 000 065 119 Electronic Percussion

465 000 000 120 Reverse Cymbal

SOUND EFFECTS

466 000 000 121 Fret Noise

467 000 000 122 Breath Noise

468 000 000 123 Seashore

469 000 000 124 Bird Tweet

470 000 000 125 Telephone Ring

471 000 000 126 Helicopter

472 000 000 127 Applause

473 000 000 128 Gunshot

474 064 000 001 Cutting Noise

475 064 000 002 Cutting Noise 2

476 064 000 004 String Slap

477 064 000 017 Flute Key Click

478 064 000 033 Shower

479 064 000 034 Thunder

480 064 000 035 Wind

481 064 000 036 Stream

482 064 000 037 Bubble

483 064 000 038 Feed

484 064 000 049 Dog

485 064 000 050 Horse

486 064 000 051 Bird Tweet 2

487 064 000 056 Maou

488 064 000 065 Phone Call

489 064 000 066 Door Squeak

490 064 000 067 Door Slam

491 064 000 068 Scratch Cut

492 064 000 069 Scratch Split

493 064 000 070 Wind Chime

494 064 000 071 Telephone Ring 2

495 064 000 081 Car Engine Ignition

496 064 000 082 Car Tires Squeal

497 064 000 083 Car Passing

498 064 000 084 Car Crash

499 064 000 085 Siren

500 064 000 086 Train

501 064 000 087 Jet Plane

502 064 000 088 Starship

503 064 000 089 Burst

504 064 000 090 Roller Coaster

505 064 000 091 Submarine

506 064 000 097 Laugh

507 064 000 098 Scream

508 064 000 099 Punch

509 064 000 100 Heartbeat

510 064 000 101 Footsteps

511 064 000 113 Machine Gun

512 064 000 114 Laser Gun

513 064 000 115 Explosion

514 064 000 116 Firework

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 111

Drum Kit List

•“ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”.

• Each percussion voice uses one note.

• The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard Note # and Note. For example, in “117: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H” (Note# 36/

Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0).

•Key Off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released.

•Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 ... 4) cannot be played simultaneously. (They are designed to be played alternately with each other.)

F#1

G#1

A#1

D#1

C#1

F#2

G#2

A#2

D#2

C#2

F#3

G#3

A#3

D#3

C#3

F#4

G#4

A#4

D#4

C#4

F#5

G#5

A#5

D#5

C#5

Voice No. 117 118 119 120 121 122

MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) 127/000/001 127/000/002 127/000/009 127/000/017 127/000/025 127/000/026

Keyboard MIDI

Key

Off

Alternate

Group

Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit

Note# Note Note# Note

25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute

26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open

27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q

28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap

29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch H

30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch L

31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap

32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise

33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click

34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell

35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L

36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H

37 C# 125C# 0 Brush Tap

38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl

39 D# 127D# 0 Brush Slap

40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal

41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll Snare Roll 2

42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2

43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare Soft Snare Soft 2 Snare Noisy

Snare Snappy Electro

Snare Noisy 4

44 G# 132G# 0 Sticks

45 A 1 33 A 0 Kick Soft Kick Tight 2 Kick 3 Kick Tight 2

46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot

Open Rim Shot H Short

47 B 1 35 B 0 Kick Tight Kick Tight Short Kick 2 Kick Gate Kick Analog Short

48 C 2 36 C 1 Kick Kick Short Kick Gate Kick Gate Heavy Kick Analog

49 C# 237C# 1 Side Stick Side Stick Analog

50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare Snare Short Snare Snappy Snare Rock Snare Noisy 2 Snare Analog

51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap

52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare Tight Snare Tight H Snare Tight Snappy Snare Rock Rim Snare Noisy 3 Snare Analog 2

53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Tom Room 1 Tom Rock 1 Tom Electro 1 Tom Analog 1

54 F# 242F# 11Hi-Hat Closed

Hi-Hat Closed Analog

55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Tom Room 2 Tom Rock 2 Tom Electro 2 Tom Analog 2

56 G# 244G# 11Hi-Hat Pedal

Hi-Hat Closed Analog 2

57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Tom Room 3 Tom Rock 3 Tom Electro 3 Tom Analog 3

58 A# 246A# 11Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Analog

59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Tom Room 4 Tom Rock 4 Tom Electro 4 Tom Analog 4

60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Tom Room 5 Tom Rock 5 Tom Electro 5 Tom Analog 5

61 C# 349C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Analog

62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom Tom Room 6 Tom Rock 6 Tom Electro 6 Tom Analog 6

63 D# 351D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1

64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal

65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup

66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine

67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal

68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell Cowbell Analog

69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2

70 A# 358A# 2 Vibraslap

71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2

72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H

73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L

74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Conga Analog H

75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open Conga Analog M

76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L Conga Analog L

77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H

78 F# 466F# 3 Timbale L

79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H

80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L

81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa

82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas Maracas 2

83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba Whistle H

84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba Whistle L

85 C# 573C# 4 Guiro Short

86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long

87 D# 575D# 4 Claves Claves 2

88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H

89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L

90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute Scratch H 2 Scratch H 2

91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open Scratch L 2 Scratch L 3

92 G# 580G# 42Triangle Mute

93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open

94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker

95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bells

96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree

97 C# 685C# 5

98 D 6 86 D 5

99 D# 687D# 5

100 E 6 88 E 5

101 F 6 89 F 5

102 F# 690F# 5

103 G 6 91 G 5

Drum Kit List

112 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Voice No. 117 123 124 125 126 127 128

MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) 127/000/001 127/000/113 127/000/033 127/000/041 127/000/049 126/000/001 126/000/002

Keyboard MIDI

Key

Off

Alternate

Group

Standard Kit 1 Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2

Note# Note Note# Note

25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute

26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open

27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q

28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap

29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch H

30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch L

31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap

32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise

33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click

34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell

35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L

36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H

37 C# 125C# 0 Brush Tap

38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl

39 D# 127D# 0 Brush Slap

40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal

41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll

42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet Hi Q 2

43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare Soft Snare Techno Snare Jazz H Brush Slap 2

44 G# 132G# 0 Sticks

45 A 1 33 A 0 Kick Soft Kick Techno Q Kick Soft 2

46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot Rim Gate

47 B 1 35 B 0 Kick Tight Kick Techno L Gran Cassa

48 C 2 36 C 1 Kick Kick Techno Kick Jazz Kick Small Gran Cassa Mute Cutting Noise Phone Call

49 C# 237C# 1 Side Stick Side Stick Analog Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak

50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare Snare Clap Snare Jazz L Brush Slap 3 Band Snare Door Slam

51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap String Slap Scratch Cut

52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare Tight Snare Dry Snare Jazz M Brush Tap 2 Band Snare 2 Scratch H 3

53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Tom Analog 1 Tom Jazz 1 Tom Brush 1 Tom Jazz 1 Wind Chime

54 F# 242F# 11Hi-Hat Closed

Hi-Hat Closed Analog3

Telephone Ring 2

55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Tom Analog 2 Tom Jazz 2 Tom Brush 2 Tom Jazz 2

56 G# 244G# 11Hi-Hat Pedal

Hi-Hat Closed Analog 4

57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Tom Analog 3 Tom Jazz 3 Tom Brush 3 Tom Jazz 3

58 A# 246A# 11Hi-Hat Open

Hi-Hat Open Analog 2

59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Tom Analog 4 Tom Jazz 4 Tom Brush 4 Tom Jazz 4

60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Tom Analog 5 Tom Jazz 5 Tom Brush 5 Tom Jazz 5

61 C# 349C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Analog Hand Cymbal

62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom Tom Analog 6 Tom Jazz 6 Tom Brush 6 Tom Jazz 6

63 D# 351D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1

Hand Cymbal Short

64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition

65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Car Tires Squeal

66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine Car Passing

67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal Car Crash

68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell Cowbell Analog Siren

69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Hand Cymbal 2 Train

70 A# 358A# 2 Vibraslap Jet Plane

71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2

Hand Cymbal 2 Short

Starship

72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H Burst

73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L Roller Coaster

74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Conga Analog H Submarine

75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open Conga Analog M

76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L Conga Analog L

77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H

78 F# 466F# 3 Timbale L

79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H

80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L Shower Laugh

81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa Thunder Scream

82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas Maracas 2 Wind Punch

83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba Whistle H Stream Heartbeat

84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba Whistle L Bubble Footsteps

85 C# 573C# 4 Guiro Short Feed

86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long

87 D# 575D# 4 Claves Claves 2

88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H

89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L

90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute Scratch H 2

91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open Scratch L 3

92 G# 580G# 42Triangle Mute

93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open

94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker

95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bells

96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree Dog Machine Gun

97 C# 685C# 5 Horse Laser Gun

98 D 6 86 D 5 Bird Tweet 2 Explosion

99 D# 687D# 5 Firework

100 E 6 88 E 5

101 F 6 89 F 5

102 F# 690F# 5

103 G 6 91 G 5 Maou

F#1

G#1

A#1

D#1

C#1

F#2

G#2

A#2

D#2

C#2

F#3

G#3

A#3

D#3

C#3

F#4

G#4

A#4

D#4

C#4

F#5

G#5

A#5

D#5

C#5

Drum Kit List

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 113

Voice No. 152 153 — —

MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128)

126/000/116 126/000/115 126/000/117 126/000/040

Keyboard MIDI

Tabla Kit (Panel)

Alternate

Group

Indian Kit (Panel)

Alternate

Group

Tabla Kit Indian Kit

Alternate

Group

Note# Note Note# Note

25 C# 013C# -1

Baya ke / ge

(Velocity 1-47 / 48-127)

26 D 0 14 D -1

27 D# 015D# -1 Hand Clap

28 E 0 16 E -1 A Tabla na 6 Dafli Open

29 F 0 17 F -1 A Tabla tin 6 Dafli Slap 1

30 F# 018F# -1 A Tabla Center tin 6 Dafli Rim 1

31 G 0 19 G -1 A Tabla ti 01 6 Duff Open

32 G# 020G# -1 A Tabla ti 02 6 Duff Slap

33 A 0 21 A -1 A Tabla ri 6 Duff Rim

34 A# 022A# -1 A Tabla kat 6 Hatheli Long 2 Hateli Long

35 B 0 23 B -1 A Tabla tu 6 Hatheli Short 2 Hateli Short

36 C 1 24 C 0 Open Baya 7 Baya ge 3 Baya ge 1

37 C# 125C# 0 Mid Baya 7 Baya ke 3 Baya ke 1

38 D 1 26 D 0 Press Baya 7 Baya ghe 3 Baya ghe 1

39 D# 127D# 0 Bend Baya Slow 7 Baya ka 3 Baya ka 1

40 E 1 28 E 0 Bend Baya Fast 7 Tabla na 4 Tabla na 2

41 F 1 29 F 0 Click 7 Tabla tin 4 Tabla tin 2

42 F# 130F# 0 Open Click 7 Tablabaya dha 3 Tablabaya dha 1

43 G 1 31 G 0 G Low Tabla Tharang Dhol 1 Open Tabla tun 2

44 G# 132G# 0G# Low Tabla Tharang Dhol 1 Slap 5 Tablabaya dhin 1

45 A 1 33 A 0 A Low Tabla Tarang Dhol 1 Mute 5 Tabla di 2

46 A# 134A# 0A# Low Tabla Tarang Dhol 1 Open Slap 5 Tablabaya dhe 1

47 B 1 35 B 0 B Low Tabla Tarang Dhol 1 Roll Tabla ti 2

48 C 2 36 C 1 C Low Tabla Tarang Dandia Short 6 Tabla ne 2

49 C# 237C# 1C# Low Tabla Tarang Dandia Long 6 Tabla taran 2

50 D 2 38 D 1 D Low Tabla Tarang Chutki Tabla tak 2

51 D# 239D# 1D# Low Tabla Tarang Chipri Chipri

52 E 2 40 E 1 E Low Tabla Tarang Khanjira Open Kanjira Open 3

53 F 2 41 F 1 F Low Tabla Tarang Khanjira Slap Kanjira Slap 3

54 F# 242F# 1F# Low Tabla Tarang Khanjira Mute Kanjira Mute 3

55 G 2 43 G 1 G Low Tabla Tarang Khanjira Bendup Kanjira Bend up 3

56 G# 244G# 1G# Low Tabla Tarang Khanjira Benddown Kanjira Bend down 3

57 A 2 45 A 1 A Low Tabla Tarang Dholak 1 Open Dholak Open 4

58 A# 246A# 1A# Low Tabla Tarang Dholak 1 Mute 7 Dholak Mute 4

59 B 2 47 B 1 B Low Tabla Tarang Dholak 1 Slap 7 Dholak Slap 4

60 C 3 48 C 2 C Tabla na 1 Dhol 2 Open

Baya ka / ghe

(Velocity 1-47 / 48-127)

Dhol Open 5

61 C# 349C# 2C Tabla tin 1 Dhol 2 Slap 8 Dhol Mute 5

62 D 3 50 D 2 C Tabla Center tin 1 Dhol 2 Rim 8 Dhol Slap 5

63 D# 351D# 2C Tabla ti 01 1 Mridangam na 9 Dhol Slide 5

64 E 3 52 E 2 C Tabla ti 02 1 Mridangam din 9 Mridangam Normal 6

65 F 3 53 F 2 C Tabla ri 1 Mridangam ki 9 Mridangam Open 6

66 F# 354F# 2C Tabla kat 1 Mridangam ta 9 Mridangam Mute 6

67 G 3 55 G 2 C Tabla tu 1 Mridangam Chapu 9 Mridangam Slap 6

68 G# 356G# 2D Tabla na 2 Mridangam Lo Closed 10 Mridangam Rim 6

69 A 3 57 A 2 D Tabla tin 2 Mridangam Lo Open 10 Chimta Open 7

70 A# 358A# 2D Tabla Center tin 2 Chimta Normal 11 Chimta Normal 7

71 B 3 59 B 2 D Tabla ti 01 2 Chimta Ring 11 Chimta Ring 7

72 C 4 60 C 3 D Tabla ti 02 2 Dholki Hi Open 12

Tabla ne / na

(Velocity 1-47 / 48-127)

Dholki Open 8

73 C# 461C# 3D Tabla ri 2 Dholki Hi Mute 12 Dholki Mute 8

74 D 4 62 D 3 D Tabla kat 2 Dholki Lo Open 13 Dholki Slap 8

75 D# 463D# 3D Tabla tu 2 Dholki Hi Slap 12 Dholki Slide 8

76 E 4 64 E 3 E Tabla na 3 Dholki Lo Slide 13 Dholki Rim 8

77 F 4 65 F 3 E Tabla tin 3 Khol Open 14 Khol Open 9

78 F# 466F# 3E Tabla Center tin 3 Khol Slide Khol Slide 9

79 G 4 67 G 3 E Tabla ti 01 3 Khol Mute 14 Khol Mute 9

80 G# 468G# 3E Tabla ti 02 3 Manjira Open 15 Manjira Open 10

81 A 4 69 A 3 E Tabla ri 3 Manjira Close 15 Manjira Close 10

82 A# 470A# 3E Tabla kat 3 Jhanji Open 16 Jhanji Open 11

83 B 4 71 B 3 E Tabla tu 3 Jhanji Close 16 Jhanji Close 11

84 C 5 72 C 4 F Tabla na 4 Mondira Open 17

Tabla ne / tin

(Velocity 1-47 / 48-127)

Mondira Open 12

85 C# 573C# 4F Tabla tin 4 Mondira Close 17 Mondira Close 12

86 D 5 74 D 4 F Tabla Center tin 4 Bhangra Scat 1 Mridang Open 13

87 D# 575D# 4F Tabla ti 01 4 Bhangra Scat 2 Mridang Mute 13

88 E 5 76 E 4 F Tabla ti 02 4 Bhangra Scat 3 Mridang Rim 13

89 F 5 77 F 4 F Tabla ri 4 Bhangra Scat 4 Mridang Slide 13

90 F# 578F# 4F Tabla kat 4 Khomokh Normal Khomokh Normal

91 G 5 79 G 4 F Tabla tu 4 Khomokh Mute Khomokh Mute

92 G# 580G# 4G Tabla na 5 Khomokh Mltatk Khomokh Mltatk

93 A 5 81 A 4 G Tabla tin 5 Thavil Open Madal-A2

94 A# 582A# 4G Tabla Center tin 5 Thavil Slap Madal-A#2

95 B 5 83 B 4 G Tabla ti 01 5 Thavil Mute Madal-B2

96 C 6 84 C 5 G Tabla ti 02 5 Khartaal

Tabla ne / di

(Velocity 1-47 / 48-127)

Madal-C3

97 C# 685C# 5G Tabla ri 5 Dholak 2 Open 18 Madal-C#3

98 D 6 86 D 5 G Tabla kat 5 Dholak 2 Slide 18 Madal-D3

99 D# 687D# 5G Tabla tu 5 Dholak 2 Rim 1 Madal-D#3

100 E 6 88 E 5 Dholak 2 Rim 2 Madal-E3

101 F 6 89 F 5 Dholak 2 Ring Madal-F3

102 F# 690F# 5 Dholak 2 Slap Madal-F#3

103 G 6 91 G 5 Dholak 2 Body Madal-G3

F#1

G#1

A#1

D#1

C#1

F#2

G#2

A#2

D#2

C#2

F#3

G#3

A#3

D#3

C#3

F#4

G#4

A#4

D#4

C#4

F#5

G#5

A#5

D#5

C#5

114 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Style List

Style No. Style Name

8BEAT

001 8BeatModern

002 Cool8Beat

003 60’sGuitarPop

004 8BeatAdria

005 60’s8Beat

006 BubblegumPop

007 BritPopSwing

008 8Beat

009 OffBeat

010 60’sRock

011 HardRock

012 RockShuffle

013 8BeatRock

16BEAT

014 16Beat

015 PopShuffle1

016 PopShuffle2

017 GuitarPop

018 16BeatUptempo

019 KoolShuffle

020 JazzRock

021 HipHopLight

BALLAD

022 PianoBallad

023 LoveSong

024 6/8ModernEP

025 6/8SlowRock

026 6/8OrchBallad

027 OrganBallad

028 PopBallad

029 16BeatBallad1

030 16BeatBallad2

DANCE

031 EuroTrance

032 Ibiza

033 DreamDance

034 NewHipHop

035 PopR&B

036 TrancePop

037 ChartPop

038 HouseMusik

039 SwingHouse

040 TechnoPolis

041 Clubdance

042 ClubLatin

043 Garage1

044 Garage2

045 TechnoParty

046 UKPop

047 HipHopGroove

048 HipShuffle

049 HipHopPop

DISCO

050 70’sDisco1

051 70’sDisco2

052 LatinDisco

053 DiscoPhilly

054 SaturdayNight

055 DiscoChocolate

056 DiscoHands

SWING&JAZZ

057 BigBandFast

058 BigBandMedium

059 BigBandBallad

060 BigBandShuffle

061 JazzClub

062 Swing1

063 Swing2

064 OrchestraSwing

065 Five/Four

066 JazzBallad

067 Dixieland

068 Ragtime

069 AfroCuban

070 Charleston

R&B

071 Soul

072 DetroitPop1

073 60’sRock&Roll

074 6/8Soul

075 ModernR&B

076 CrocoTwist

077 Rock&Roll

078 DetroitPop2

079 BoogieWoogie

080 ComboBoogie

081 6/8Blues

COUNTRY

082 Country8Beat

083 CountryPop

084 CountrySwing

085 CountryBallad

086 Country2/4

087 CowboyBoogie

088 CountryShuffle

089 Bluegrass

INDIAN

090 Bolly Mix 1

091 Bolly Mix 2

092 Indian Pop

093 Bhangra

094 Boliyan

095 Goan Pop

096 Garba

097 Rajstahan

098 Qawwali

099 Bhajan

100 Tamil

101 Kerala

LATIN

102 BrazilianSamba

103 BossaNova

104 PopBossa

105 Tijuana

106 DiscoLatin

107 Mambo

108 Salsa

109 Beguine

110 GuitarRumba

111 RumbaFlamenco

112 RumbaIsland

113 Reggae

Style No. Style Name

BALLROOM

114 VienneseWaltz

115 EnglishWaltz

116 Slowfox

117 Foxtrot

118 Quickstep

119 Tango

120 Pasodoble

121 Samba

122 ChaChaCha

123 Rumba

124 Jive

TRAD/WORLD

125 USMarch

126 6/8March

127 GermanMarch

128 PolkaPop

129 OberPolka

130 Tarantella

131 Showtune

132 ChristmasSwing

133 ChristmasWaltz

134 ScottishReel

135 Hawaiian

WALTZ

136 ItalianWaltz

137 MariachiWaltz

138 GuitarSerenade

139 SwingWaltz

140 JazzWaltz1

141 JazzWaltz2

142 CountryWaltz

143 OberWaltzer

144 Musette

CHILDREN

145 Learning2/4

146 Learning4/4

147 Learning6/8

148 Fun 3/4

149 Fun 4/4

PIANIST

150 Stride

151 PianoBlues1

152 PianoBlues2

153 PianoRag

154 PianoRock&Roll

155 PianoBoogie

156 PianoJazzWaltz

157 PianoJazzBld

158 Arpeggio

159 Musical

160 SlowRock

161 8BtPianoBallad

162 PianoSwing

Style No. Style Name

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 115

Arpeggio List

Arpeggio No. Arpeggio Name

01 UpOct1

02 DownOct1

03 UpDnOct2

04 SynArp1

05 SynArp2

06 SyncEcho

07 PulsLine

08 Random

09 Down&Up

10 SuperArp

11 AcidLine

12 TekEcho

13 VelGruv

14 Trance1

15 Trance2

16 SynChord

17 PfArp

18 PfBallad

19 PfChd8th

20 PfShfl

21 PfRock

22 Clavi

23 ChordUp

24 ChdDance

25 Salsa1

26 Salsa2

27 Reggae

28 Strum

29 GuitChd1

30 GuitChd2

31 GuitChd3

32 GuitArp

33 FngrPck1

34 FngrPck2

35 Samba

36 SlapBs

37 AcidBs

38 TranceBs

39 LatinBs

40 FunkyBs

41 PercArp

42 Perc1

43 Perc2

44 African

45 Tamb

46 R&B

47 Funk

48 HipHop

49 Latin

50 Arabic

51 TeenTalC

52 TeenTalD

53 TeenTalE

54 TeenTalF

55 TeenTalG

56 TeenTalA

57 Dadra C

58 Dadra D

59 Dadra E

60 Dadra F

61 Dadra G

62 Dadra A

116 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Music Database List

MDB No. Song Name

POP

001 AlvFever

002 BoySumer

003 CoinLane

004 Croco Rk

005 DayPdise

006 DwnTown

007 EasySday

008 GoMyWay

009 HighTide

010 HoldDown

011 HowDeep!

012 HurryLuv

013 I breath

014 I’m Torn

015 Imagine

016 Infatuat

017 ISurvive

018 JustCall

019 JustWay

020 LeadPack

021 LoveFeel

022 LoveMeT

023 LveMeDo

024 Mi Shell

025 My Baby

026 NikitTrp

027 NoMatter

028 ProudGtr

029 RainOnMe

030 SailngSx

031 SeeAgain

032 Sept.Pop

033 SultanSw

034 Sure

035 SweetLrd

036 ThnkMsic

037 TitanicH

038 UNeedLv

039 UptnGirl

040 WantToBe

041 WatchGrl

042 WhatALoo

043 WhitePle

044 WhleAgn

045 Woman

046 YelowSub

047 YesterPf

ROCK

048 DavAgain

049 JumpRock

050 OyComCha

051 PickUpPc

052 RdRiverR

053 SatsfyGt

054 Sheriff

055 SmokeWtr

056 TwistAgn

057 VenusPop

DANCE

058 2 of Us

059 B Leave

060 Back St

061 Crockett

062 DialEmma

063 DsrtRose

064 FunkyTwn

065 Kids

066 KillSoft

067 Nine PM

068 SingBack

069 StrandD

BALLAD

070 AdelineB

071 ArgenCry

072 BeautBdy

073 Bl Bayou

074 CatMemry

075 CavaSolo

076 E Weiss

077 ElizSere

078 ElvGhett

079 Feeling

080 Fly Away

081 Fnl Date

082 GreenSlv

083 GtCncert

084 HrdToSay

085 IBThere

086 LonlyPan

087 MBoxDnce

088 Mn Rivr

089 My Song

090 NorwWood

091 OnMyMnd

092 OverRbow

093 Red Lady

094 ReleseMe

095 SavingLv

096 Shore Cl

097 SierraMd

098 SilverMn

099 SmokyEye

100 SndOfSil

101 SumerPlc

102 TblWater

103 WhereLov

104 WhisprSx

105 WomanLov

R & B

106 AmazingG

107 BoogiePf

108 Clock Rk

109 CU later

110 GreenDor

111 HappyDay

112 JohnnyB

113 MercySax

114 OldHouse

115 RisingSn

116 S Preems

117 ShookUp

118 SuperStv

119 TeddyBer

120 Yeh Orgn

SWING & JAZZ

121 Alex Rag

122 Blue Set

123 ChooChoo

124 DayOfW&R

125 HighMoon

126 InMood

MDB No. Song Name

127 MistySax

128 MoonLit

129 New York

130 PanthrSw

131 PetiteCl

132 RedRoses

133 SaintMch

134 SatinDll

135 SF Heart

136 ShearJz

137 SplnkyBr

138 SunnySde

139 TstHoney

140 Tunisia

141 TwoFoot5

142 USPatrol

143 WhatsNew

144 Wild Cat

145 WondrLnd

EASY LISTENING

146 Arriva

147 BlackFst

148 ByeBlues

149 CaliBlue

150 CiaoCpri

151 Close2U

152 DAmorStr

153 DolanesM

154 ElCondor

155 Entrtain

156 Frippers

157 LoveLove

158 LuckySax

159 LuvStory

160 MyPrince

161 OSoleMio

162 PupetStr

163 Raindrop

164 RedMouln

165 R’ticGtr

166 Schiwago

167 ShadowGt

168 SingRain

169 SmallWld

170 SpkSoft

171 SpnishEy

172 StrangeN

173 TieRibbn

174 TimeGoes

175 WhteXmas

176 WishStar

177 WondrWld

LATIN

178 BambaLa

179 BeHappy!

180 CopaLola

181 DayNight

182 Ipanema

183 JamboMbo

184 MarinaAc

185 MuchoTrp

186 SmoothLt

187 SunOfLif

188 Sunshine

189 Tico Org

190 TrbWave

MDB No. Song Name

Music Database List

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 117

COUNTRY

191 ABitMore

192 BlownWnd

193 Bonanza

194 BoxerFlt

195 CntryRds

196 GreenGrs

197 Jambala

198 LondonSt

199 LooseEL

200 TopWorld

201 YlwRose

DISCO & PARTY

202 AlhHwaii

203 Babylon

204 Barbados

205 DnceBird

206 FestaMex

207 HandsPty

208 LuvTheme

209 ModrnTlk

210 NxtAlice

211 PalomaFl

212 PubPiano

213 Tijuana

214 Why MCA?

BALLROOM

215 BrazilBr

216 CherryTp

217 DanubeWv

218 MantoStr

219 SandmnFx

220 SpainTwn

221 SundyNvr

222 TangoAc

223 Tea4Two

224 TulipWtz

225 YesSirQk

TRADITIONAL

226 AlpenTri

227 AnchorAw

228 Balalaik

229 BlkSheep

230 CampRace

231 Ceilidh

232 Cielito

233 CielPari

234 Cl Polka

235 Comrades

236 DAmorCl

237 FrogSong

238 Funiculi

239 GrndClok

240 HappyPlk

241 Herzlin

242 HornPipe

243 JacknJil

244 JinglBel

245 Kufstein

246 MexiHat

247 MickMrch

248 RkABaby

249 RlBarrel

250 Showbiz

251 SnowWtz

252 StarMrch

MDB No. Song Name

253 WashPost

254 WdCuttrs

255 XmasWalz

256 YankDood

MDB No. Song Name

118 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Songs Provided On the Supplied CD-ROM

The easy song arranger can only be used with songs that include chord data.

File Name Song Name Composer

001Nutcr.mid Danse des Mirlitons from “The Nutcracker” P.I. Tchaikovsky

002Orphe.mid “Orphée aux Enfers” Ouverture J. Offenbach

003Slavo.mid Slavonic Dances op.72-2 A. Dvorák

004Prima.mid La Primavera (from Le Quattro Stagioni) A. Vivaldi

005Medit.mid Méditation (Thaïs) J. Massenet

006Guill.mid Guillaume Tell G. Rossini

007Fruhl.mid Frühlingslied F. Mendelssohn

008Ungar.mid Ungarische Tänze Nr.5 J. Brahms

009Fruhl.mid Fruhlingsstimmen J. Strauss II

010Dolly.mid Dolly’s Dreaming and Awakening T.Oesten

011Cande.mid La Candeur J.F.Burgmüller

012Arabe.mid Arabesque J.F.Burgmüller

013Pasto.mid Pastorale J.F.Burgmüller

014Petit.mid Petite Réunion J.F.Burgmüller

015Innoc.mid Innocence J.F.Burgmüller

016Progr.mid Progrès J.F.Burgmüller

017Taren.mid Tarentelle J.F.Burgmüller

018Cheva.mid La Chevaleresque J.F.Burgmüller

019Etude.mid Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de l’adieu” F.Chopin

020Marci.mid Marcia alla Turca L.v. Beethoven

021Turki.mid Turkish March W.A. Mozart

022Valse.mid Valse op.64-1 “Petit Chien” F.Chopin

023Menue.mid Menuett L. Boccherini

024Momen.mid Moments Musicaux op.94-3 F. Schubert

025Enter.mid The Entertainer S. Joplin

026Prelu.mid Prelude (Wohltemperierte Klavier 1-1) J.S. Bach

027Violl.mid La Viollette L.Streabbog

028Angel.mid Angels Serenade Traditional

029Saraf.mid Krasnyj Sarafan Traditional

030Ameri.mid America the Beautiful S.A. Ward

031Brown.mid Little Brown Jug Traditional

032Lomon.mid Loch Lomond Traditional

033Bonni.mid My Bonnie Traditional

034Londo.mid Londonderry Air Traditional

035Banjo.mid Ring de Banjo S.C. Foster

036Vogle.mid Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär ? Traditional

037Lorel.mid Die Lorelei F. Silcher

038Funic.mid Funiculi Funicula L. Denza

039Turke.mid Turkey in the Straw Traditional

040Campt.mid Camptown Races S.C. Foster

041Jingl.mid Jingle Bells J.S. Pierpont

042Muss.mid Muss i denn F. Silcher

043Liebe.mid Liebesträume Nr.3 F. Liszt

044Jesu.mid Jesu, Joy Of Man’s Desiring J.S. Bach

045Joy.mid Ode to Joy L.v. Beethoven

046Pearl.mid Pearl Fisher G. Bizet

047Gavot.mid Gavotte F.J. Gossec

048Seren.mid Serenade/Haydn F.J. Haydn

049Menue.mid Menuett BWV. Anh.114 J.S. Bach

050Canon.mid Canon in D J. Pachelbel

051Vogel.mid Der Vogelfanger Bin Ich Ja “Die Xauberflote” W.A Mozart

052Piano.mid Piano Sonate No.14 op.27-2 “Mondschein” L.v. Beethoven

053Surpr.mid The “Surprise” Symphony No.94 F.J. Haydn

054WildR.mid To a Wild Rose E.A. MacDowell

055Chans.mid Chanson du Toreador G. Bizet

056Babbi.mid O Mio Babbino Caro G. Puccini

057RowRo.mid Row Row Row Your Boat (DUET) Traditional

058Smoky.mid On Top of Old Smoky (DUET) Traditional

059WeWis.mid We Wish You A Merry Christmas (DUET) Traditional

060ImMai.mid Im Mai (DUET) Traditional

061Chris.mid O Christmas Tree (DUET) Traditional

062MaryH.mid Mary Had a Little Lamb (DUET) Traditional

063TenLi.mid Ten Little Indians (DUET) Septimus Winner

064PopGo.mid Pop Goes The Weasel (DUET) Traditional

065Twink.mid Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (DUET) Traditional

066Close.mid Close Your Hands, Open Your Hands (DUET) J.J. Rousseau

067Cucko.mid The Cuckoo (DUET) Traditional

068Augus.mid O du lieber Augustin (DUET) Traditional

069Londo.mid London Bridge (DUET) Traditional

070Three.mid Three Blind Mice (DUET) Traditional

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 119

Effect Type List

● Harmony Types

● Reverb Types

● Chorus Types

No. Harmony Type Description

01 Duet

Harmony types 01–05 are pitch-based and add one-, two- or three-note harmonies to the sin-

gle-note melody played in the right hand. These types sound when chords are played in the auto

accompaniment range of the keyboard. These Harmony types will also work when playing

songs that contain chord data.

02 Trio

03 Block

04 Country

05 Octave

06 Trill 1/4 note

Types 6–26 are rhythm-based effects and add embellishments or delayed repeats in

time with the auto accompaniment. These types sound whether the auto accompani-

ment is on or not; however, the actual speed of the effect depends on the Tempo set-

ting (page 27). The individual note values in each type let you synchronize the effect

precisely to the rhythm. Triplet settings are also available: 1/6 = quarter-note triplets,

1/12 = eighth-note triplets, 1/24 = sixteenth-note triplets.

• The Trill effect Types (06–12) create two-note trills (alternating notes) when two

notes are held.

• The Tremolo effect Types (13–19) repeat all held notes (up to four).

• The Echo effect Types (20–26) create delayed repeats of each note played.

07 Trill 1/6 note

08 Trill 1/8 note

09 Trill 1/12 note

10 Trill 1/16 note

11 Trill 1/24 note

12 Trill 1/32 note

13 Tremolo 1/4 note

14 Tremolo 1/6 note

15 Tremolo 1/8 note

16 Tremolo 1/12 note

17 Tremolo 1/16 note

18 Tremolo 1/24 note

19 Tremolo 1/32 note

20 Echo 1/4 note

21 Echo 1/6 note

22 Echo 1/8 note

23 Echo 1/12 note

24 Echo 1/16 note

25 Echo 1/24 note

26 Echo 1/32 note

No. Reverb Type Description

01–03 Hall 1–3 Concert hall reverb.

04–05 Room 1–2 Small room reverb.

06–07 Stage 1–2 Reverb for solo instruments.

08–09 Plate 1–2 Simulated steel plate reverb.

10 Off No effect.

No. Chorus Type Description

01–02 Chorus 1–2 Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.

03–04 Flanger 1–2 Pronounced three-phase modulation with a slight metallic sound.

05 Off No effect.

120 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

MIDI Implementation Chart

YAMAHA [ PortaTone ] Date:18-MAY-2007

Model PSR-I425 MIDI Implementation Chart Version : 1.0

Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Function...

Basic Default 1 - 16 1 - 16

Channel Changed x x

Default 3 3

Mode Messages x x

Altered ************** x

Note 0 - 127 0 - 127

Number : True voice ************** 0 - 127

Velocity Note ON o 9nH,v=1-127 o 9nH,v=1-127

Note OFF x 9nH,v=0 x

After Key's x x

Touch Ch's x x

Pitch Bend o 0-24 semi o 0-24 semi

0,32 o o Bank Select

1,11,84 x *1 o

6,38 o o Data Entry

7,10 o o

Control 64 o o Sustain

71-74 o o Sound Controller

Change 91,93 o o Effect Depth

96-97 x *1 o RPN Inc,Dec

100-101 o o RPN LSB,MSB

MIDI Implementation Chart

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 121

*1 Refer to #2 on page 122.

Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO o : Yes

Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO x : No

Prog o 0 - 127 o 0 - 127

Change : True # **************

System Exclusive o o

: Song Pos. x x

Common : Song Sel. x x

: Tune x x

System : Clock o o

Real Time: Commands o o

Aux :All Sound OFF x o(120,126,127)

:Reset All Cntrls x o(121)

:Local ON/OFF x o(122)

:All Notes OFF x o(123-125)

Mes- :Active Sense o o

sages:Reset x x

122 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

MIDI Data Format

NOTE:

1 By default (factory settings) the instrument ordinarily functions

as a 16-channel multi-timbral tone generator, and incoming

data does not affect the panel voices or panel settings. How-

ever, the MIDI messages listed below do affect the panel

voices, auto accompaniment, and songs.

• MIDI Master Tuning

• System exclusive messages for changing the Reverb Type

and Chorus Type.

2 Messages for these control change numbers cannot be trans-

mitted from the instrument itself. However, they may be trans-

mitted when playing the accompaniment, song or using the

Harmony effect.

3 Exclusive

<GM System ON> F0H, 7EH, 7FH, 09H, 01H, F7H

• This message automatically restores all default settings for

the instrument, with the exception of MIDI Master Tuning.

<MIDI Master Volume> F0H, 7FH, 7FH, 04H, 01H, ll, mm, F7H

• This message allows the volume of all channels to be

changed simultaneously (Universal System Exclusive).

• The values of “mm” is used for MIDI Master Volume. (Values

for “ll” are ignored.)

<MIDI Master Tuning> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 27H, 30H, 00H, 00H,

mm, ll, cc, F7H

• This message simultaneously changes the tuning value of

all channels.

• The values of “mm” and “ll” are used for MIDI Master Tuning.

• The default value of “mm” and “ll” are 08H and 00H, respec-

tively. Any values can be used for “n” and “cc”.

<Reverb Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 00H, mmH,

llH, F7H

• mm : Reverb Type MSB

• ll : Reverb Type LSB

Refer to the Effect Map (page 122) for details.

<Chorus Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 20H, mmH,

llH, F7H

• mm : Chorus Type MSB

• ll : Chorus Type LSB

Refer to the Effect Map (page 122) for details.

4 When the accompaniment is started, an FAH message is trans-

mitted. When accompaniment is stopped, an FCH message is

transmitted. When the clock is set to External, both FAH

(accompaniment start) and FCH (accompaniment stop) are rec-

ognized.

5 Local ON/OFF

<Local ON> Bn, 7A, 7F

<Local OFF> Bn, 7A, 00

Value for “n” is ignored.

■ Effect map

* When a Type LSB value is received that corresponds to no effect type, a value corresponding to the effect type (coming the closest

to the speciﬁed value) is automatically set.

* The numbers in parentheses in front of the Effect Type names correspond to the number indicated in the display.

● REVERB

● CHORUS

TYPE

MSB

TYPE LSB

00 01 02 08 16 17 18 19 20

000 No Effect

001 (01)Hall1 (02)Hall2 (03)Hall3

002 Room (04)Room1 (05)Room2

003 Stage (06)Stage1 (07)Stage2

004 Plate (08)Plate1 (09)Plate2

005...127 No Effect

TYPE

MSB

TYPE LSB

00 01 02 08 16 17 18 19 20

000...063 No Effect

064 Thru

065 Chorus (02)Chorus2

066 Celeste (01)Chorus1

067 Flanger (03)Flanger1 (04)Flanger2

068...127 No Effect

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 123

Speciﬁcations

Keyboards

• 61 standard-size keys (C1–C6), with Touch Response.

Display

• LCD display (backlit)

Setup

• STANDBY/ON

• MASTER VOLUME: MIN–MAX

Panel Controls

• SONG, VOICE, STYLE, EASY SONG ARRANGER,

PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT ON/OFF, ARPEGGIO ON/

OFF, LESSON L/R, LESSON START, METRONOME ON/

OFF, PORTABLE GRAND, DEMO, FUNCTION, MUSIC

DATABASE, TOUCH ON/OFF, HARMONY ON/OFF,

DUAL ON/OFF, SPLIT ON/OFF, TEMPO/TAP, [0]–[9], [+],

[-], CATEGORY, Dial, ASSIGN, (ACMP ON/OFF), A-B

REPEAT (SYNC STOP), PAUSE (SYNC START), START/

STOP, REW (INTRO/ENDING/rit.), FF (MAIN/AUTO

FILL), REGIST MEMORY ([●] (MEMORY/BANK), [1], [2]),

SONG MEMORY (REC, [1]–[5], [A])

Realtime Control

• Pitch Bend Wheel

• Nobs A, B

A: Cutoff, Reverb, Attack, Style Cutoff, Style Tempo

B: Resonance, Chorus, Release, Style Resonance

Voice

• 514 Voices (116 Panel Voices + 10 Indian Voices + 361

XGlite Voices + 12 Drum/SFX Kits +15 Arpeggio Voices)

• Polyphony: 32

• DUAL

• SPLIT

Style

• 162 Preset Styles + 1 User Style File

• Style Control: ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC STOP,

SYNC START, START/STOP,

INTRO/ENDING/rit., MAIN/AUTO FILL

• Fingering: Multi Finger

• Style Volume

Music Database

• 256

Education Feature

• Dictionary

• Lesson 1–3, Repeat & Learn

Registration Memory

•8 banks x 2 types

Function

• VOLUME: Style Volume, Song Volume

• OVERALL: Tuning, Transpose, Split Point, Touch Sensi-

tivity, Pitch Bend Range

• MAIN VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,

Chorus Level, Attack Time, Release Time,

Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance

• DUAL VOICE: Voice, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,

Chorus Level, Attack Time, Release Time,

Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance

• SPLIT VOICE: Voice, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,

Chorus Level, Attack Time, Release Time,

Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance

• EFFECT: Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Master EQ Type

• HARMONY: Harmony Type, Harmony Volume

• ARPEGGIO: Arpeggio Type, Arpeggio Velocity

• SFF Load: Style File Load

•

PC: PC Mode

•

MIDI: Local On/Off, External Clock, Initial Send,

Keyboard Out, Style Out, Song Out

• METRONOME: Time Signature Numerator, Time Signature

Denominator, Metronome Volume

• LESSON: Lesson Track (R), Lesson Track (L)

• UTILITY: Grade, Demo Cancel

Effects

• Reverb: 9 types

• Chorus: 4 types

• Harmony: 26 types

• Arpeggio: 62 types

Song

• 30 Preset Songs + 5 User Songs + Accessory CD-ROM

Songs (70)

• Song Clear, Track Clear

• Song Volume

• Song Control: , A-B REPEAT, PAUSE, REW, FF,

START/STOP

Performance assistant technology

Recording

• Song

User Song: 5 Songs

Recording Tracks: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, STYLE

MIDI

• Local On/Off • Initial Send • External Clock

• Keyboard Out • Style Out • Song Out

Auxiliary jacks

• PHONES/OUTPUT, DC IN 12V, USB, SUSTAIN

Ampliﬁer

• 2.5W + 2.5W

Speakers

• 12cm x 2 + 3cm x 2

Power Consumption

• 10W

Power Supply

• Adaptor: Yamaha PA-3C, or an equivalent

• Batteries:

Six “D” size, R20P (LR20) or equivalent batteries

Dimensions (W x D x H)

• 952 x 388 x 146 mm (37-1/2" x 15-1/4" x 5-3/4")

Weight

• 7.0kg (15 lbs. 7 oz.) (not including batteries)

Included Accessories

• Music Rest

• Accessory CD-ROM

• Owner’s Manual

* Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for

information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right

to change or modify products or specifications at any time

without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or op-

tions may not be the same in every locale, please check with

your Yamaha dealer.

Optional Accessories

• AC Power Adaptor: Yamaha PA-3C, or an equivalent

• Footswitch: FC4/FC5

• Keyboard Stand: L-2C/L-2L

• Headphones: HPE-150

124 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

Index

+, - .................................................. 12, 58

........................................................ 57

0–9 .................................................. 12, 58

A-B REPEAT ................................. 13, 78

ACMP ON/OFF ............................. 12, 34

ARPEGGIO ON/OFF .................... 12, 14

ASSIGN ......................................... 12, 18

CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] .......... 12, 58

DC IN 12V ..................................... 10, 13

DEMO ............................................ 12, 40

Dial ................................................. 12, 58

DUAL ON/OFF ............................. 12, 29

EASY SONG ARRANGER .......... 12, 50

FF ................................................... 13, 40

FUNCTION .................................... 12, 82

HARMONY ON/OFF .................... 12, 60

INTRO/ENDING/rit. ...................... 13, 71

KNOB A, B .................................... 12, 18

LESSON L/R ................................. 12, 44

LESSON START ........................... 12, 44

MAIN/AUTO FILL ........................ 13, 71

MASTER VOLUME ..................... 12, 24

MEMORY/BANK, 1, 2 ................. 13, 80

METRONOME ON/OFF ............... 12, 63

MUSIC DATABASE ..................... 12, 49

PAUSE ........................................... 13, 40

PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT

ON/OFF ...................................... 12, 23

PHONES/OUTPUT ....................... 11, 13

PITCH BEND wheel ...................... 13, 66

PORTABLE GRAND .................... 12, 31

REC, 1–5, A ................................... 13, 52

REGIST MEMORY ....................... 13, 80

................................................. 12, 48

REW ............................................... 13, 40

SONG ............................................. 12, 39

SONG MEMORY .......................... 13, 52

SPLIT ON/OFF .............................. 12, 30

STANDBY/ON ...............................11-12

START/STOP ................................ 13, 58

STYLE ........................................... 12, 33

SUSTAIN ....................................... 11, 13

SYNC START ............................... 13, 70

SYNC STOP .................................. 13, 71

TEMPO/TAP .................................. 13, 27

TOUCH ON/OFF ........................... 12, 65

USB ................................................ 13, 86

VOICE ............................................ 12, 28

A-B Repeat ...........................................78

Accessories .............................................7

ACMP ...................................................34

Arpeggio ...............................................14

Arpeggio List ......................................115

Arpeggio Type ......................................15

Arpeggio Velocity ................................67

Attack ....................................................20

Auto Accompaniment Range ................34

Auto-Accompaniment ..........................34

AWM ......................................................6

Backup ..................................................56

CD-ROM ..............................................92

Channel Message ..................................86

Chord .................................. 36, 38, 75-76

Chord Dictionary ..................................77

CHORD ROOT ....................................77

CHORD TYPE .....................................77

Chorus .............................................19, 62

Chorus Type .................................62, 119

Computer ..............................................86

Cutoff ....................................................19

Default Setting ......................................82

Delete (Song Track) ..............................55

Delete (User Song) ...............................55

Demo ....................................................40

Demo Cancel ........................................84

Display ..................................................59

Drum Kit ...............................................32

Drum Kit List ......................................111

Dual Voice ............................................29

Dual Voice Chorus Level .....................83

Dual Voice Octave ................................83

Dual Voice Pan .....................................83

Dual Voice Reverb Level .....................83

Dual Voice Volume ..............................83

Easy Chords ..........................................38

Easy Song Arranger ..............................50

Effect Map ..........................................122

Effect Type List ..................................119

Evaluation .............................................45

External Song .......................................42

Filter ..................................................... 19

Filter (Style) ......................................... 20

Flash Memory ...................................... 42

Foot Switch .......................................... 11

Function .......................................... 82-83

Grade .................................................... 45

Harmony ............................................... 60

Harmony Type ..................................... 60

Harmony Volume ................................. 69

Headphones .......................................... 11

Initial Send ..................................... 84, 89

Initialization ......................................... 56

Keyboard Out ....................................... 87

Lesson .................................................. 43

Load SFF .............................................. 74

Local ..................................................... 87

L-Part ................................................... 91

Main Voice ........................................... 28

Main Voice Chorus Level .................... 83

Main Voice Octave .............................. 83

Main Voice Pan .................................... 83

Main Voice Reverb Level .................... 83

Main Voice Volume ............................. 83

Master EQ Type ................................... 69

Measure ................................................ 59

Melody Voice ................................. 51, 79

Metronome ........................................... 63

MIDI ..................................................... 85

MIDI Data Format ............................. 122

MIDI Implementation Chart .............. 120

Music Database .................................... 49

Music Database List ........................... 116

Music Rest .............................................. 7

Mute ..................................................... 79

Notation ................................................ 59

Panel controls and terminals Alphabetical order

Index

PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 125

One Touch Setting ................................ 68

PC Mode ............................................... 88

Performance assistant technology ........ 23

Pitch Bend Range ................................. 83

Power Adaptor ..................................... 10

Preset Song ................................39, 41-42

Recording ............................................. 52

Registration Memory ........................... 80

Release ................................................. 20

Remote control ..................................... 88

Repeat ................................................... 48

Resonance ............................................ 19

Reverb ............................................ 19, 61

Reverb Type ....................................... 119

R-Part ................................................... 91

Save (Panel Setting) ............................. 80

Save (User File) .................................... 91

Score ............................................100-105

SMF (Standard MIDI File) ................... 89

Software Licensing Agreement ............ 98

Song ...................................................... 39

Song Clear ............................................ 55

Song List ...................................... 41, 118

Song Memory ....................................... 52

Song Out ............................................... 87

Song Volume ........................................ 78

Specifications ..................................... 123

Split Point ....................................... 30, 72

Split Voice ............................................ 30

Split Voice Chorus Level ..................... 83

Split Voice Octave ............................... 83

Split Voice Pan ..................................... 83

Split Voice Reverb Level ..................... 83

Split Voice Volume .............................. 83

Standard Chords ................................... 38

Style ...........................................33-37, 70

Style File .............................................. 74

Style List ............................................ 114

Style Out ............................................... 87

Style Tempo ......................................... 20

Style Volume ........................................ 72

Sustain (Footswitch) ............................. 11

Synchro Start ............................ 34, 36, 70

Synchro Stop ........................................ 71

System Message ................................... 86

Tempo ...................................................27

Time Denominator ................................64

Time Numerator ...................................64

Time Signature .....................................63

Touch Response ....................................65

Touch Sensitivity ..................................65

Track ............................................... 52-55

Track Clear ...........................................55

Transfer ........................................... 89-91

Transpose ..............................................66

Troubleshooting (Installation) ..............97

Troubleshooting (Instrument) ...............99

Tuning ...................................................66

USB ......................................................86

USB MIDI Driver ........................... 95-96

User file ................................................91

User Song .............................................52

Voice .....................................................28

Voice List ...........................................107

XGlite .....................................................6

126 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below.

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.

Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,

Col. Guadalupe del Moral

C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México

Tel: 55-5804-0600

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.

Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi,

CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL

Tel: 011-3704-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Sucursal de Argentina

Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 1-4371-7021

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá

Tel: +507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM

Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

IRELAND

Danfay Ltd.

61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin

Tel: 01-2859177

GERMANY

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Switzerland

Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland

Tel: 01-383 3990

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/

HUNGARY/SLOVENIA

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Austria, CEE Department

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-602039025

POLAND

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Sp.z. o.o. Oddzial w Polsce

ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland

Tel: 022-868-07-57

THE NETHERLANDS/

BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Benelux

Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands

Tel: 0347-358 040

FRANCE

Yamaha Musique France

BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A.

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230

Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain

Tel: 91-639-8888

GREECE

Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House

147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece

Tel: 01-228 2160

SWEDEN

Yamaha Scandinavia AB

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1

Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

YS Copenhagen Liaison Ofﬁce

Generatorvej 6A

DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy

Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,

SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland

Tel: 09 618511

NORWAY

Norsk ﬁlial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB

Grini Næringspark 1

N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 77 70

ICELAND

Skifan HF

Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120

IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland

Tel: 525 5000

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-3030

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali,

Dubai, United Arab Emirates

Tel: +971-4-881-5868

INDIA

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.

25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West),

Jingan, Shanghai, China

Tel: 021-6247-2211

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: 2737-7688

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 21-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,

Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 080-004-0022

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.

Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 3-78030900

PHILIPPINES

Yupangco Music Corporation

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,

Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines

Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.

#03-11 A-Z Building

140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015

Tel: 747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.

Taiwan 104, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2511-8688

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

891/1 Siam Motors Building, 15-16 ﬂoor

Rama 1 road, Wangmai, Pathumwan

Bangkok 10330, Thailand

Tel: 02-215-2626

OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2317

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,

Victoria 3006, Australia

Tel: 3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.

146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,

Auckland, New Zealand

Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-3273

[PK] 40

U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation

WK62010 XXXPOXXX.X-01A0

Printed in China

Yamaha Home Keyboards Home Page (English Only)

http://music.yamaha.com/homekeyboard

Yamaha Manual Library

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

Transcripción de documentos

Owner’s Manual EN 2 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual OBSERVERA! Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av. ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sålæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — også selvom der or slukket på apparatets afbryder. VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta verkosta. (standby) Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb Deutschlands) Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batterien oder Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können bei einer Sammelstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll abgegeben werden. Informieren Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune. (battery) The serial number of this product may be found on the bottom of the unit. You should note this serial number in the space provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft. Model No. PSR-I425 Serial No. (bottom) PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 3 PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor Water warning • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Use the specified adaptor (PA-3C, or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. • Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. If you notice any abnormality Do not open • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: • Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not intended to be charged. Power supply/AC power adaptor • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. • When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long time, remove the batteries from the instrument to prevent possible leakage of the battery fluid. • Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during electrical storms. • Keep batteries away from children. • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked fluid. If the battery fluid should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or skin, wash immediately with water and consult a doctor. Battery fluid is corrosive and may possibly cause loss of sight or chemical burns. Battery Location • Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/- polarity markings. Failure to do so might result in overheating, fire, or battery fluid leakage. • Always replace all batteries at the same time. Do not use new batteries together with old ones. Also, do not mix battery types, such as alkaline batteries with manganese batteries, or batteries from different makers, or different types of batteries from the same maker, since this can cause overheating, fire, or battery fluid leakage. • Do not dispose of batteries in fire. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. (4)-12 4 • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. 1/2 • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other cables. Handling caution • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. • Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand or rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over. • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. Connections • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Saving data Saving and backing up your data Maintenance • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. The panel settings and some other types of data is lost when you turn off the power to the instrument. Save the data to the Registration Memory (page 80.) Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to an external device such as a computer. Backing up the external media • To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto two external media. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. When using a power adaptor, even when the power switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet. Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations. The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may be different from the ones on your instrument. ● Trademarks • Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation in the United States and other countries. • The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. (4)-12 2/2 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 5 Copyright Notice The following is the title, credits and copyright notices for the song pre-installed in this electronic keyboard: Composition Title : Against All Odds Composer’s Name : Collins 0007403 Copyright Owner’s Name : EMI MUSIC PUBLISHING LTD / HIT & RUN MUSIC LTD All Rights Reserved, Unauthorized copying, public performance and broadcasting are strictly prohibited. This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES. This device is capable of using various types/formats of music data by optimizing them to the proper format music data for use with the device in advance. As a result, this device may not play them back precisely as their producers or composers originally intended. Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. Panel Logos GM System Level 1 “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level. XGlite As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format. Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects. USB USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with peripheral Devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the power to the computer is on). Stereo Sampled Piano The instrument has a special Portable Grand Piano Voice—created by state-of-the-art stereo sampling technology and using Yamaha’s sophisticated AWM (Advanced Wave memory) tone generation system. Touch Response The exceptionally natural Touch Response feature, with a convenient front panel on/off switch, gives you maximum expressive level control over the voices. It also works in conjunction with the Dynamic Filter, which dynamically adjusts the timbre or tone of a voice according to your playing strength—just a like a real musical instrument! STYLE FILE The Style File Format is Yamaha’s original style file format which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types. 6 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Congratulations and thank you for purchasing the Yamaha PSR-I425 PortaTone! Please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the instrument in order to take full advantage of its various features. Make sure to keep this manual in a safe and handy place even after you finish reading, and refer to it often when you need to better understand an operation or function. Included Accessories The PSR-I425 package includes the following items. Please check that you have them all. • Music rest • Accessory CD-ROM • Owner’s Manual ● Music Rest Insert the music rest into the slots as shown. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 7 Special Features of the PSR-I425 ■ Creating New Sounds Page 18 By adjusting just two knobs you can add varying degrees of distortion, “sweetness,” or other characteristics to a sound to change it subtly or drastically. Parameters that can be assigned to the knobs include effect, filter, envelope generator and more. You can create new sounds in real time! ■ Arpeggio Function Page 14 Similar to the arpeggio functions provided on some synthesizers, this function automatically produces arpeggios (broken chords) when you simply play the appropriate notes on the keyboard. A variety of arpeggios can be produced by changing your fingering or the arpeggio type. ■ Performance assistant technology Page 23 Play along with a song on the instrument’s keyboard and produce a perfect performance every time ... even if you play wrong notes! All you have to do is play on the keyboard—alternately on the left- and right-hand ranges of the keyboard, for example—and you’ll sound like a pro as long as you play in time with the music. ■ Play a Variety of Instrument Voices Page 28 The instrument voice that sounds when you play the keyboard can be changed to violin, flute, harp, or any of an extensive range of voices. You can change the mood of a song written for piano, for example, by using violin to play it instead. Experience a whole new world of musical variety. ■ Play Along with Styles Page 33 Want to play with full accompaniment? Try the auto-accompaniment Styles. The accompaniment styles provide the equivalent of a full backing band covering a wide variety of styles from waltzes to 8-beat to euro-trance ... and much more. Select a style that matches the music you want to play, or experiment with new styles to expand your musical horizons. 8 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual PopBossa 104 Contents Copyright Notice .................................................................... 6 Panel Logos ........................................................................... 6 Included Accessories ............................................................. 7 Special Features of the PSR-I425 ......................................... 8 Setting Up 10 Power Requirements ........................................................... 10 Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack)........... 11 Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack) .......................... 11 Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal) ......................... 11 Turning the Power On.......................................................... 11 Panel Controls and Terminals 12 Front Panel .......................................................................... 12 Rear Panel ........................................................................... 13 Quick Guide Creating Arpeggios 14 Create Original Sounds 18 Assigning Effects to the Knobs ............................................ 18 Using the Knobs................................................................... 21 The Easy Way to Play Piano 23 Play with Both Hands........................................................... 23 Change the Song Tempo..................................................... 27 Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 28 Select and Play a Voice—MAIN .......................................... 28 Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL............................ 29 Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands —SPLIT .......................................................................... 30 Play the Grand Piano Voice................................................. 31 Drum Kits 32 Select and Play the Drum Kit ............................................... 32 Playing Styles 33 Select a Style Rhythm.......................................................... 33 Play Along with a Style ........................................................ 34 Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords.................................. 38 Using Songs 39 Select and Listen to a Song ................................................. 39 Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause.................... 40 Types of Songs .................................................................... 42 Select a Song For a Lesson 43 Lesson 1—Waiting............................................................... 43 Lesson 2—Your Tempo ....................................................... 46 Lesson 3—Minus One ......................................................... 47 Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn........................ 48 Play Using the Music Database 49 Change a Song’s Style 50 Listen to the DEMO Song for Easy Song Arranger.............. 50 Using the Easy Song Arranger ............................................ 50 Record Your Own Performance 52 Track Configuration.............................................................. 52 Recording Procedure ........................................................... 52 Song Clear—Deleting User Songs ...................................... 55 Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track from a User Song............................................................ 55 Backup and Initialization 56 Backup ................................................................................. 56 Initialization .......................................................................... 56 Basic Operation and Displays 57 Basic Operation ................................................................... 57 Display Items ....................................................................... 59 Reference Adding Effects 60 Harmony............................................................................... 60 Adding Reverb ..................................................................... 61 Adding Chorus ..................................................................... 62 Handy Performance Features 63 The Metronome.................................................................... 63 Setting the Number of Beats per Measure, and the Length of Each Beat .......................................... 64 Adjusting the Metronome Volume ........................................ 64 Tap Start .............................................................................. 65 Touch Response Sensitivity................................................. 65 Pitch Bend............................................................................ 66 Pitch Controls....................................................................... 66 Controlling Arpeggio Volume with Keyboard Dynamics....... 67 One Touch Setting ............................................................... 68 Adjusting the Harmony Volume............................................ 69 Select an EQ Setting for the Best Sound ............................. 69 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions 70 Pattern Variation (Sections) ................................................. 70 Adjusting the Style Volume .................................................. 72 Setting the Split Point........................................................... 72 Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment) ................................................... 73 Loading Style Files............................................................... 74 Chord Basics........................................................................ 75 Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary .................. 77 Song Settings 78 Song Volume........................................................................ 78 A-B Repeat........................................................................... 78 Muting Independent Song Parts........................................... 79 Change the Melody Voice .................................................... 79 Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings 80 Saving to the Registration Memory ...................................... 80 Recalling a Registration Memory ......................................... 81 The Functions 82 Selecting and Setting Functions........................................... 82 Connecting to a Computer 85 What Is MIDI? ...................................................................... 85 Connecting a Personal Computer ........................................ 86 Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer..... 87 Remote Control of MIDI Devices.......................................... 88 Initial Send ........................................................................... 89 Transferring Data between the Computer and Instrument... 89 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide 92 Important Notices about the CD-ROM ................................. 92 CD-ROM Contents ............................................................... 93 System Requirements.......................................................... 94 Software Installation............................................................. 94 Appendix Troubleshooting................................................................. 99 Scores ............................................................................... 100 Let’s play the Tabla.......................................................... 106 Voice List .......................................................................... 107 Drum Kit List .................................................................... 111 Style List ........................................................................... 114 Arpeggio List.................................................................... 115 Music Database List ........................................................ 116 Songs Provided On the Supplied CD-ROM ................... 118 Effect Type List ................................................................ 119 MIDI Implementation Chart ............................................. 120 MIDI Data Format ............................................................. 122 Specifications................................................................... 123 Index.................................................................................. 124 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 9 Setting Up Be sure to do the following operations BEFORE turning on the power. Power Requirements Although the instrument will run either from an optional AC adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an AC adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is more environmentally friendly than batteries and does not deplete resources. ■ Using an AC Power Adaptor Make sure that the [STANDBY/ON] switch of the instrument is set to STANDBY. WARNING • Use the specified adaptor (PA-3C, or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) only. The use of other adaptors may result in irreparable damage to both the adaptor and the instrument. Connect the AC power adaptor to the power supply jack. Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet. CAUTION • Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the instrument, or during electrical storms. Adaptor AC outlet For battery operation the instrument requires six 1.5V “D” size, R20P (LR20) or equivalent batteries. (Alkaline batteries are recommended.) When battery power becomes too low for proper operation, make sure to replace all batteries, following the precautions listed below. If necessary, also make sure to save all important User data (see page 56), since custom panel settings are lost when the batteries are removed. CAUTION ■ Using Batteries Open the battery compartment cover located on the instrument’s bottom panel. Insert the six new batteries, being careful to follow the polarity markings on the inside of the compartment. Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it locks firmly in place. NOTE • Connecting the AC power adaptor automatically supplies power from the adaptor and overrides battery power, even when batteries are installed. 10 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual • Use only manganese or alkaline batteries for this instrument. Other types of batteries (including rechargeable batteries) may exhibit a sudden drop in power when the batteries are low, possibly resulting in a loss of flash memory data. • Be sure to install the batteries in the same direction, maintaining the correct polarity (as shown). Incorrect battery installation may result in heat, fire and/or leaking of corrosive chemicals. • When the batteries run down, replace them with a complete set of six new batteries. NEVER mix old and new batteries. Do not use different kinds of batteries (e.g. alkaline and manganese) at the same time. • If the instrument will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the batteries to prevent possible fluid leakage. • Please use the power adaptor when transferring data to flash memory. Batteries (including rechargeable types) can be drained rapidly by this type of operation. If the batteries do become drained during a data transfer, both the data being transferred and the data currently in the transfer destination will be lost. Setting Up Make all necessary connections below BEFORE turning the power on. Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack) Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal) The PSR-I425 speakers are automatically shut off when a plug is inserted into this jack. The PHONES/OUTPUT jack also functions as an external output. You can connect the PHONES/OUTPUT jack to a keyboard amplifier, stereo system, mixer, tape recorder, or other line-level audio device to send the instrument’s output signal to that device. WARNING • Avoid listening with the headphones at high volume for long periods of time; doing so may not only result in ear fatigue, it may be damaging to your hearing. CAUTION • To prevent damage to the speakers, set the volume of the external devices at the minimum setting before connecting them. Failure to observe these cautions may result in electric shock or equipment damage. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all devices at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Connect the instrument’s USB terminal to the USB terminal of a computer, and you can transfer performance data and song files between the two (page 86). To use the USB data-transfer features you’ll need to do the following: • First, make sure the POWER switch on the instrument is set to OFF, then use a USB cable to connect the instrument to the computer. After making the connections, turn on the power of the instrument. • Install the USB MIDI driver on your computer. Installation of the USB MIDI driver is described on page 94. NOTE • Make sure to purchase a quality USB cable at a musical instrument store, computer store or electrical appliance store. Turning the Power On Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack) The sustain function lets you produce a natural sustain as you play by pressing a footswitch. Plug the Yamaha FC4 or FC5 footswitch into this jack and use it to switch sustain on and off. NOTE • Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. • Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing this changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed footswitch operation. Turn down the volume by turning the [MASTER VOLUME] control to the left and press the [STANDBY/ON] switch to turn on the power. Press the [STANDBY/ON] switch again to turn the power OFF. Backup data in the flash memory is loaded to the instrument when the power is turned on. If no backup data exists on flash memory, all instrument settings are restored to the initial factory defaults when the power is turned on. CAUTION • Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet, and/or remove the batteries from the instrument. CAUTION • Never attempt to turn the power off when a “WRITING!” message is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the flash memory and result in data loss. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 11 Panel Controls and Terminals Front Panel Song Category List (page 41) q w @3 @4 @5 Style Category List (page 114) e r t y u i !0 @6 @7 @8 !2 !3 !4 !5 o !1 @9 #0 Display (page 59) GrandPno 001 001 #1 #4 w [MASTER VOLUME] control.... pages 11, 24 e [TOUCH ON/OFF] button ................ page 65 r [HARMONY ON/OFF] button .......... page 60 t [DUAL ON/OFF] button ................... page 29 !5 [PORTABLE GRAND] button .......... page 31 !6 Dial ............................................pages 58, 82 !7 CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons......................................pages 58, 82 r q [STANDBY/ON] switch .................... page 11 !4 [METRONOME ON/OFF] button ..... page 63 f Front Panel !8 [SONG] button................................. page 39 y [SPLIT ON/OFF] button ................... page 30 !9 [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button............................................... page 50 u [DEMO] button ................................. page 40 @0 [STYLE] button................................ page 33 i LESSON [START] button ................ page 44 @1 [VOICE] button ................................ page 28 o LESSON [L/R] button ...................... page 44 @2 Number buttons [0]–[9], [+] and [-] buttons ....................pages 58, 82 !0 [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button.......... page 14 !1 [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT ON/OFF] button .......... page 23 @3 [ASSIGN] button.............................. page 18 !2 [FUNCTION] button ......................... page 82 @5 [ ](REPEAT & LEARN)/ [ACMP ON/OFF] button ...........pages 48, 34 !3 [MUSIC DATABASE] button ............ page 49 12 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual @4 [A] and [B] knobs ............................ page 21 Panel Controls and Terminals Music Database List (page 116) !7 !6 #2 Voice Category List (page 107) !8 !9 @0 @1 @2 #3 #5 Rear Panel #6 @6 [A-B REPEAT]/ [SYNC STOP] button ............... pages 78, 71 @7 [PAUSE]/ [SYNC START] button ............. pages 40, 70 @8 [REW]/ [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button .... pages 40, 71 #7 #8 #9 Rear Panel #6 USB terminal ............................pages 11, 86 #7 SUSTAIN jack................................... page 11 #8 PHONES/OUTPUT jack ................... page 11 #9 DC IN 12V jack................................. page 10 @9 [FF]/ [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button ....... pages 40, 71 #0 [START/STOP] button ....... pages 33, 40, 58 #1 [TEMPO/TAP] button ....................... page 27 #2 REGIST MEMORY [●] (MEMORY/BANK), [1], [2] buttons ................................. page 80 #3 SONG MEMORY [REC], [1]–[5], [A] buttons............... page 52 #4 PITCH BEND wheel ......................... page 66 #5 Drum Kit icons................................. page 32 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 13 e d ck Gui ui Q Creating Arpeggios Quick Guide The arpeggio function lets you create arpeggios (broken chords) by simply playing the required notes on the keyboard. For example, you could play the notes of a triad—the root, third, and fifth—and the arpeggio function will automatically create a variety of interesting arpeggiotype phrases. By changing the arpeggio type and the notes you play it is possible to create a wide range of patterns and phrases that can be used for music production as well as performance. 1 Press the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button to turn the arpeggio function on. GrandPno 001 001 The ARPEGGIO icon appears when the arpeggio function is on. ● Voices and the Arpeggio Function This instrument lets you select a variety of “voices” that you can play via the keyboard. When you select a voice number between 129 and 143 the arpeggio function will automatically be engaged so you can start playing arpeggios immediately. The arpeggio function will automatically be turned off when you select any other voice. If you want to use voices 129–143 for normal performance without the arpeggio function, press the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button to turn the arpeggio function off after selecting the voice. ● Voices for which the arpeggio function is automatically turned on. Voice No. 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 14 Voice Name Teen Tal C Teen Tal F Teen Tal A Dadra D Dadra E Dadra G Synth Sequence Chord Sequence PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Voice No. 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 Voice Name Square Pulse Trance Synth Echo Piano Arpeggio Guitar Chord Guitar Arpeggio Massive Percussion NOTE • See “Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices” on page 28. Creating Arpeggios 2 Select an arpeggio type. The most suitable arpeggio type is automatically selected when you select a voice, but you can easily select any other arpeggio type. ARP Type Hold for longer than a second DownOct1 02 The currently selected arpeggio type Hold the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button for longer than a second and the name of the current arpeggio type will appear in the display. Rotate the dial to select the desired arpeggio type. A list of the available arpeggio types is provided on page 115. 3 Play the keyboard. The sound of the arpeggio produced will change according to the number of notes you play and the area of the keyboard you play in. You can save the instrument’s settings at this point and then recall them at any time you want to repeat your performance (page 80). You can also record your performance (page 52). NOTE • Make sure that you are not pressing any of the keyboard’s keys while turning the arpeggio function on or off. The arpeggio function applies only to the main and dual voices, and does not affect split voices. The arpeggio function cannot be used at the same time as the harmony function. 4 When you have finished playing with the arpeggio function, press the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button to turn it off. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 15 Creating Arpeggios Create a Pop Tune You can play a style and specify the style chords with your left hand while playing arpeggios with your right hand to create interesting sonic textures and backgrounds. 1 Select the keyboard voice (page 28). For this example we’ll use a grand piano voice, so press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button. This convenient voice selection method lets you instantly select a voice with a single button press. 2 After turning the arpeggio function on, select an arpeggio type (steps 1 and 2 on the preceding page). For this example select “02 DownOct1”. That completes preparation to use the arpeggio function. 3 Select the style you want to play along with the arpeggio function. A “style” is an automatic accompaniment pattern. Press the [STYLE] button and the name of the currently selected style will appear in the display. Rotate the dial to select the desired style. For this example we’ll use the “001 8BtModrn” (8 Beat Modern) style. 8BtModrn 001 NOTE • Refer to “Playing Styles” on page 33. 16 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Creating Arpeggios 4 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto accompaniment on. 8BtModrn 001 The ACMP ON icon will appear. When auto accompaniment is turned on, the left-hand section of the keyboard is used only for specifying accompaniment chords. NOTE • Refer to “When automatic accompaniment is on ...” on page 34. 5 Press the [START/STOP] button. The rhythm accompaniment will start. 6 Begin playing. C Am F G7sus4 Listen carefully to the rhythm of the style, then play the notes shown in the score at the beginning of a measure. The style and arpeggio will begin playing together. The accompaniment will change accordingly each time you play a new left-hand chord. Of course you can also change your right-hand fingering to produce interesting changes. If you’re not comfortable with right-hand playing yet, you could use the performance assistant technology feature described on page 23. When the performance assistant feature is on, playing any right-hand key will always produce musically appropriate notes! Split point Whenever you’re playing a style as well as a right-hand part, be sure that your left hand plays only to the left of the split point and your right hand plays only to the right of the split point. (page 30) PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 17 e d ck Gui ui Q Create Original Sounds The two knobs located in the lower left area of the panel can be used to add variations to the sound being played, transforming the sound in a variety of musical ways. Filter, envelope generator, and other effects can be assigned to the two knobs as required. In this section we’ll explain how effects can be assigned to the knobs, and provide a few tips for their use. Assigning Effects to the Knobs Repeatedly press the [ASSIGN] button to sequentially select the five effect combinations provided: z → x → c → v → b → z → ... etc. The currently selected combination is shown in the display. GrandPno 001 001 Number/Effect Knob A Knob B z Filter Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance x Effect Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level c EG Attack Time Release Time v Style Filter Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance b Style Tempo Tempo –No Effect– The assignable knob effects are pre-programmed in the pairs listed above. It is not possible to assign different effect combinations. z–c affect the main and dual voices only. Split voices will not be affected. Styles and songs will also not be affected. v–b affect styles only. 18 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Create Original Sounds z Filter Filter effects shape sound by allowing only a specified range of frequencies to pass and/or by producing a resonance peak at the filter’s “cutoff” frequency. Filter effects can be used to create a range of synthesizer-like sounds. * Filter effects can sometimes cause distortion in the bass frequencies. Some hints for using the filter effects are provided on page 22. Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance Knob A adjusts the filter’s cutoff frequency, and therefore the brightness of the sound. Level Cutoff Frequency Frequency Frequencies in this range are passed. Frequencies in this range are cut off. Knob B adjusts the amount of resonance applied at the filter’s cutoff frequency. Increasing the resonance emphasizes the frequencies at the cutoff frequency, and thus “strengthens” the perceived effect of the filter. Level Resonance Frequency x Effect Reverb reproduces the acoustic ambience of a concert hall or club, while chorus produces a layered “multi-instrument” effect. Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level Knob A adjusts the depth of the reverb effect, and Knob B adjusts the depth of the chorus effect. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 19 Create Original Sounds c EG (Envelope Generator) Envelope Generator effects determine how the level of the sound varies over time. You can make the attack faster for a more percussive sound or slower for a violin-like sound, for example. Or you can lengthen or shorten the sustain to most ideally match the music. Attack Time Release Time Knob A adjusts attack time (the amount of time it takes the sound to reach maximum level when a key is played). Knob B adjusts release time (the amount of time it takes for the sound to decay to silence after a key is released). Level Sustain Level ATTACK DECAY Key Played RELEASE Time Key Released v Style Filter Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance In this case the knobs apply the filter effect to the style being played. Knob A and Knob B have the same functions as for “z Filter” described on the preceding page. b Style Tempo Tempo –No Effect– Knob A adjusts the tempo of the style and arpeggios. Rotating the knob clockwise increases the tempo while rotating it counterclockwise decreases the tempo. The knob’s center position produces the initial default tempo. 20 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Create Original Sounds Using the Knobs 1 Select the voice you want to play on the keyboard. SquareLd 097 The name of the currently selected voice will appear in the display when you press the [VOICE] button. Use the dial to select the desired voice. For this example we want to use a synth-lead type voice, so select “97 SquareLd” (Square-wave Lead). 2 Press the [ASSIGN] button as many times as necessary to select “z FILTER” (“z” will appear in the display). SquareLd 097 “z” appears here. Knob A can now be used to adjust the filter cutoff frequency, and Knob B can be used to adjust the resonance. 3 Rotate Knob B to its maximum setting (all the way to the right). Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance Rotating the knob to the right while the volume is set to a high level can result in distortion. If this occurs, reduce the volume level. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 21 Create Original Sounds 4 Play with the right hand while operating Knob A with the left hand. Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance If you select a different keyboard voice the knobs will be reset and the ideal settings for the selected voice will be automatically recalled. In the same way, if the “v STYLE FILTER” effect is selected, the knobs will be reset if a different style is selected. If you create an original setting you like, it might be a good idea to save it in the instrument’s Registration Memory (page 80) so you can recall the same settings again at any time. You can also record performances using original sounds you’ve created (page 52). The chart below lists some interesting ways to use the various effects that can be assigned to the knobs. Changing the knob settings does not immediately change the sound. Newly assigned effects will only change the sound when the knobs are first operated after the new effect has been selected. ● Some Ideas for Using the Knobs Number/Effect Try This z FILTER Select a synth-type lead or pad voice (page 107). Turn Knob B all the way up and operate Knob A while playing for some spacey, floating 1980’s effects. x EFFECT Select a voice that sounds as though it already has reverb and chorus effects applied, and turn Knob A and Knob B all the way down to hear the “direct” sound of the voice. You can then turn the Knob A and Knob B settings up to add extra impact and richness to the voice. c EG Select a piano voice, and turn Knob B all the way up and Knob A to about the 3 o’clock position. This should give you a majestic, organ-like sound. The attack time is quite long so play the keys and hold them to let the sound come in fully. Ideal for slow pieces. v STYLE FILTER Select style 31, Euro Trance. Turn accompaniment on and start style playback (page 34). Set Knob B to about 3 o’clock, and Knob A to about 8 o’clock. The overall sound of the style should be a bit muffled, with the drums emphasized for solid rhythmic impact. b STYLE TEMPO Play a style and/or arpeggio (page 14) and use Knob A to adjust the tempo. 22 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual e d ck Gui ui Q The Easy Way to Play Piano This instrument includes a performance assistant technology feature that lets you play along with a song and sound like a great pianist (even though you might be making lots of mistakes)! In fact, you can play any notes and still sound good! So even if you can’t play piano and can’t read a note of music, you can have some musical fun. It’s never too late to start learning! Refer to page 25 for more information on using performance assistant technology to help you play. Play with Both Hands 1 Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT ON/OFF] button. This turns on the performance assistant technology feature. The P.A.T. icon and “PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT” will be displayed. Nocturne 011 Icon will appear when performance assistant technology is on. Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT ON/ OFF] button to turn the function on or off. 2 Select a song. Press the [SONG] button, and the song number and name will be displayed. You can use the dial or other selection controls to select a different song. For this example try selecting the “010 AveMaria”. Song name AveMaria 010 Song number The song displayed here will be played. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 23 The Easy Way to Play Piano ● What is a “Song”? Of course you know the normal meaning of the word, but for this instrument the term “song” also refers to the data that makes up a piece of music. You can listen to the songs, use them for lessons, and use them with a range of other functions (page 39). 3 Press the [START/STOP] button. Adjusts volume. Song playback will begin. The basic pattern will repeat. Listen to four measures while memorizing the basic pattern. It’s your tune to play the part from the fifth measure. 4 Play on the keyboard. Play the score on the left along with the accompaniment using both hands. You can even play the same keys over and over: C, E, G, C, E, G, C, E. Performance assistant technology will make sure that the notes will come out as if they were played according to the score on the right. Keep playing, and performance assistant technology will continue to “correct” the notes that you play. You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. 24 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual The Easy Way to Play Piano 5 Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assistant technology feature off. The complete score for Ave Maria is provided on page 102. Use the Performance Assistant to Play Like a Pro! To begin, try to feel the rhythm of the song. Then, with your hands spread as shown in the illustration, simply play the keyboard alternately with your left and right hands (any notes will do). You will get even better results if you match your left-hand rhythm to the rhythm of the chord indicator in the display. Sounds like you’re playing the right notes! How does it sound? You’ll get acceptable results no matter where you play thanks to performance assistant technology! Next try the three playing methods illustrated below. Different ways of playing produce different results. ● Play with the left and right hands at the same timing—type 1. Play 3 notes at once with your right hand. ● Play with the left and right hands at the same timing—type 2. ● Play alternately with the left and right hands—type 3. Play 1 note at a time with your right hand (for example: index finger → middle finger → ring finger). Play 3 notes at once with your right hand. Once you get a feel for it, try playing chords with your left hand and a melody with your right ... or any other combination. To use the performance assistant technology feature it is necessary to play a song that includes chord data, or a style with auto accompaniment on. If a song includes the required data, the chords are shown on the right side of the display (page 59). PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 25 The Easy Way to Play Piano Next try playing the Chopin Nocturne. 1 The procedure is that same as that described for playing Ave Maria on pages 23–25. Select “011 Nocturne”. Nocturne 011 2 Listen to eight measures, then begin playing from the ninth measure. Play the keys shown in the illustration. Keep playing F, A and C with your left hand and the correct notes will sound as the song proceeds. When you get used to playing the left hand part, refer to “The Easy Way to Play Piano” on page 23 and try adding the right-hand part. 3 Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assistant technology feature off. The complete score for Nocturne is provided on page 104. 26 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual The Easy Way to Play Piano Change the Song Tempo When using the performance assistant technology or in other situations in which the tempo of the song is too fast or too slow for you, you can change the tempo as required. Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button. The tempo display will appear and you can use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the [0] to [9] number buttons to set to tempo to anywhere from 011 and 280 quarter-note beats per minute. Tempo 090 Current tempo value You can return to the original tempo by simultaneously pressing the [+] and [-] buttons. ● About the Beat Display The arrow marks in the beat display flash in time with the rhythm of the song or style. First beat of measure Second beat Third beat Fourth beat PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 27 e d ck Gui ui Q Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments, this instrument has a large range of voices that includes guitar, bass, strings, sax, trumpet, drums and percussion, sound effects … a wide variety of musical sounds. Select and Play a Voice—MAIN This procedure selects the main voice you will play on the keyboard. 1 Press the [VOICE] button. The voice number and name will be displayed. Voice name GrandPno 001 Appears when the Voice mode is engaged. Voice number Select the voice you want to play. NOTE • You can also select the voice using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons after pressing the [VOICE] button. (page 58) f While watching the displayed voice name rotate the dial. The available voices will be selected and displayed in sequence. The voice selected here becomes the main voice. For this example select the “092 Flute” voice. r 2 Flute 092 3 Play the keyboard. Try selecting and playing a variety of voices. 28 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Select 092 Flute Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL You can select a second voice which will play in addition to the main voice when you play the keyboard. The second voice is known as the “dual” voice. 1 Press the [DUAL ON/OFF] button. The [DUAL ON/OFF] button turns the dual voice on or off. When turned on the dual voice icon will appear in the display. The currently selected dual voice will sound in addition to the main voice when you play the keyboard. NOTE • The dual voice feature cannot be used during a song lesson (page 43). Flute 092 Dual voice icon Press and hold the [DUAL ON/OFF] button for longer than a second. D.Voice Hold for longer than a second Marimba 110 3 NOTE • You can also select the Dual Voice display by pressing the [FUNCTION] button and then using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the “D.Voice” item. f “D.VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, then the currently selected dual voice will be displayed. r 2 The currently selected dual voice Select the desired dual voice. Watch the displayed dual voice and rotate the dial until the voice you want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the dual voice. For this example try selecting the “109 Vibraphone” voice. Vibes 109 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 29 Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 4 Play the keyboard. Two voices will sound at the same time. Try selecting and playing a range of dual voices. Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—SPLIT In the split mode you can play different voices to the left and right of the keyboard “split point”. The main and dual voices can be played to the right of the split point, while the voice played to the left of the split point is known as the “split voice”. The split point setting can be changed as required (page 72). Split point Split voice 1 Main voice and dual voice Press the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button. The [SPLIT ON/OFF] button turns the split voice on or off. When turned on the split voice icon will appear in the display. The currently selected split voice will sound to the left of the keyboard split point. NOTE • The split voice feature cannot be used during a song lesson (page 43). Flute 092 Split voice icon S.Voice NOTE • You can also select the Split Voice display by pressing the [FUNCTION] button and then using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the “S.Voice” item. f “S.VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, then the currently selected split voice will be displayed. r 2 Press and hold the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button for longer than a second. FngrBass Hold for longer than a second 30 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 042 The currently selected SPLIT voice Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 3 Select the desired split voice. Watch the displayed split voice and rotate the dial until the voice you want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the split voice which will play to the left of the keyboard split point. For this example try selecting the “033 Folk Guitar” voice. Folk Gtr 033 4 Play the keyboard. Try selecting and playing a range of split voices. Play the Grand Piano Voice When you just want to play piano, all you have to do is press one convenient button. Press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button. The “001 Grand Piano” voice will be selected. NOTE • When you press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button all settings other than touch sensitivity are turned off. The dual and split voices will also be turned off, so only the Grand Piano voice will play over the entire keyboard. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 31 ck Gui ui Q e d Drum Kits This instrument includes a range of drum kits and unique sound effects you can use for entertainment. Laughter, babbling brooks, jet fly-bys, eerie effects, and much more. These sounds can be a great way to enhance the mood at parties. Select and Play the Drum Kit Drum kits are collections of drum and percussion instruments. When drum kits (Voice numbers 117–128, 152, 153) are selected, you can play different percussion sounds directly from the keyboard. 1 2 Press the [VOICE] button. Select the desired Drum kit. Select one of the Voice numbers from 117–128, 152, 153 by rotating the dial. Example: 117 Standard Kit 1 Std.Kit1 ui ca Tr Mut ia ng e l Sh e M u ak er te C G C o L ar ac as M og Ag ui ro Sh o la ve rt s n pe L O le H ba m Ti L o ga ng on C Bo i-H H H at C lo se d Pe i-H da l at O pe n C ra sh C R ym id e ba C ym l 1 ba Ta l1 m bo u C ow rine be ll Vi br as la p p at C d i-H H H an St la ick im n de Si pe O ne s ick St ta as C R t ap Sl Ta p h h us us Br Br Sh ot 117 H lic k h C h us q us Br Br Se S Ta wir l p Sn Sw ar irl e Sn R ar oll e S Ki o f t ck Ki Sof t ck Ti gh t Ki ck S n Sn ar are e Fl T oo igh r t Fl Tom oo rT L om Lo H w M To id m T M om id L To C H mH hi ig n h R ese To id C m e C ym y Sp mb bal la al C C sh C up ra sh ym ba C y R id mb l e C al 2 ym ba C Bo l 2 on ng ga o H H M C ute on Ti ga m L ba l Ag e H og o Sa C H m ba ab Sa W asa h m ba istl W eH h G istle W uiro L oo L d on W Blo g oo ck d B H C loc ui ca k L Tr O ia ng pe n le O Ji ng pen le B Be ells ll T re e C3 * When Voice number 117 is selected, the icons printed above the keyboard indicates the instruments assigned to each key. 3 Try out each key. You’ll hear bongo drums, congas, maracas, and more-a comprehensive variety of drum and percussion sounds. Details on the instruments and key assignments of each drum kit can be found in the Drum Kit List on page 111. ● Drum Kit List 117 118 119 120 121 32 Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 122 123 124 125 126 Analog Kit Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit 127 128 152 153 SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 Tabla Kit Indian Kit e d ck Gui ui Q Playing Styles This instrument has an auto accompaniment feature that produces accompaniment (rhythm + bass + chords) in the style you choose to match chords you play with your left hand. You can select from 162 different styles covering a range of musical genres and time signatures (see page 114 for a complete list of the available styles). In this section we’ll learn how to use the auto accompaniment features. Select a Style Rhythm Most styles includes a rhythm part. You can select from a wide variety of rhythmic types—indian, rock, blues, Euro trance, and many, many more. Let’s begin by listening to just the basic rhythm. The rhythm part is played using percussion instruments only. 1 Press the [STYLE] button. The style number and name will appear in the display. Style Name 8BtModrn 001 This icon appears when a style number and name is displayed. Style Number 2 Select a style. Use the dial to select the style you want to use. A list of all the available styles is provided on page 114. PopBossa 104 3 Press the [START/STOP] button. The style rhythm will start playing. Press the [START/STOP] button a second time when you want to stop playback. NOTE • Style numbers 138, 150–162 have no rhythm part and therefore no rhythm will play if you use them for the above example. For these styles first turn auto accompaniment on as described on page 34, press the [SYNC START] button, and the accompaniment bass and chord parts will begin playing when you play a key to the left of the keyboard split point. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 33 Playing Styles Play Along with a Style You learned how to select a style rhythm on the preceding page. Here we’ll see how to add bass and chord accompaniment to the basic rhythm to produce a full, rich accompaniment that you can play along with. 1 2 Press the [STYLE] button and select the desired style. Turn automatic accompaniment on. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button. Pressing this button a second time will turn automatic accompaniment off. PopBossa 104 This icon appears when automatic accompaniment is on. NOTE ● When automatic accompaniment is on ... The area of the keyboard to the left of the split point (54 : F#2) becomes the “auto accompaniment range” and is used only for specifying the accompaniment chords. • The keyboard split point can be changed as required: refer to page 72. Split point (54 : F#2) Auto accompaniment range 3 Turn sync start on. Press the [SYNC START] button to turn the sync start function on. PopBossa 104 Flashes when sync start is on. When sync start is on, the bass and chord accompaniment included in a style will start playing as soon as you play a note to left of the keyboard split point. Press the button a second time to turn the sync start function off. 34 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Playing Styles 4 Play a left-hand chord to start the style. You can still “play” chords even if you don’t actually know any chords. This instrument will recognize even a single note as a chord. Try playing from one to three notes at the same time to the left of the split point. The accompaniment will change according to the left-hand notes you play. Try this! Scores for some chord progressions are provided on page 36. These examples should help you get a feel for what types of chord progressions sound good with the styles. Split point Auto accompaniment range 5 Play a variety of left-hand chords while playing a melody with your right hand. Split point Auto accompaniment range 6 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop style playback when you’re done. You can switch style “sections” to add variety to the accompaniment. Refer to “Pattern Variation (Sections)” on page 70. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 35 Playing Styles Styles Are More Fun When You Understand Chords Chords, created by playing multiple notes at the same time, are the basis for harmonic accompaniment. In this section we’ll take a look at sequences of different chords played one after another, or “chord sequences.” Since each chord has it’s own unique “color”—even if it’s different fingerings of the same chord—the chords you choose to use in your chord progressions have a huge influence on the overall feel of the music you play. On page 34 you learned how to play colorful accompaniments using styles. Chord progressions are vital to creating interesting accompaniments, and with a little chord know-how you should be able to take your accompaniments to a new level. On these pages we’ll introduce three easy-to-use chord progressions. Be sure to try them out with the instrument’s accompaniment styles. The style will respond to the chord progression you play, effectively creating a complete song. ■Playing the Chord Progressions ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Play the scores with the left hand. Before playing the scores follow steps 1 through 3 of “Play Along with a Style” on page 34. * The scores provided here are not standard song scores, but rather simplified scores that indicate which notes to play to produce the chord progressions. Split point Play to the left of the split point. Recommended Style 031 Euro Trance —Dance music with simple chords— Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. F C G Am This is a simple-but-effective chord progression. When you play through to the end of the score, start again from the beginning. When you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button and the auto accompaniment function will create a perfect ending. 36 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Playing Styles Recommended Style 155 Piano Boogie —3-chord boogie-woogie— Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. C F C G F C Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. This progression provides varied harmonic backing with just three chords. When you get a feel for the progression in the score, try changing the order of the chords! Recommended Style 103 Bossa Nova —Bossa nova with jazz-style chords— Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. Dm Bm7 5 G7 CM7 FM7 E7 Am A7 This progression includes jazzy “two-five” (II-V) changes. Try playing it through several times. When you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 37 Playing Styles Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords There are two ways of playing auto-accompaniment chords: ● Easy Chords ● Standard Chords The instrument will automatically recognize the different chord types. This function is called Multi Fingering. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto-accompaniment on (page 34). The keyboard to the left of the split point (default: 54/F#2) becomes the “accompaniment range”. Play the accompaniment chords in this area of the keyboard. Split point (default: 54/F#2) Db Eb F# G# Bb Db Eb F# C D E F GA B C D E F Accompaniment range Root notes and the corresponding keys ■Easy Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two, or three fingers. ■Standard Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● This method lets you produce accompaniment by playing chords using normal fingerings in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. ● How to play Standard Chords [Example for “C” chords] C (9) C C C M7 C M7 (9) C6 C6 (b5) C7 (#11) (9) C M7 C sus4 Cm Cm C (b5) ) ) C M7 ( ( ) • To play a minor chord Press the root note together with the nearest black key to the left of it. ( Cm ( ( ) ) • To play a major chord Press the root note of the chord. C aug C M7aug C m6 C m7 C mM7 C mM7 ( ) ( • To play a minor seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white and black keys to the left of it (three keys altogether). (9) (9) (11) C m7 C m7 (9) (b5) C m7 C mM7 C7 C7 ) (9) C7 ) ) C7 (#9) (b5) C7 ( C 7sus4 C7 ) ) ) ( ( ) (13) C7 ( C 1+2+5 ( ) C 7aug (b13) (b9) ( (#11) C7 C dim7 C dim ( (b5) ( ) ( ) ( ( ) ( ) C m7 ) • To play a seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white key to the left of it. * Notes enclosed in parentheses ( ) are optional; the chords will be recognized without them. 38 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual e d ck Gui ui Q Using Songs With this instrument the term “song” refers the data that makes up a piece of music. You can simply enjoy listening to the 30 internal songs, or use them with just about any of the many functions provided—the performance assistant technology feature, lessons, and more. The songs are organized by category. In this section we’ll learn how to select and play songs, and briefly describe the 30 songs provided. Song Listen Lesson Record Select and Listen to a Song 1 Press the [SONG] button. The song number and name will be displayed. You can use the dial to select a different song. Nocturne 011 The currently selected song and number are displayed 2 Select a song. Select a song after referring to the preset song category list on page 41. Use the dial to select the song you want to listen to. ForElise NOTE • You can also play songs you have recorded yourself (User Songs) or songs that have been transferred to the instrument from a computer in the same way that you play the internal songs. 012 The song displayed here can be played PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 39 Using Songs 3 001–030 Built in Songs (see next page) 031–035 User Songs (Songs you record yourself). 036– Songs transferred from a computer (pages 89–91) Listen to the song. Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the selected song. You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button again. Song start! ● Using the [DEMO] button Press the [DEMO] button to play Songs 001–008 in sequence. Playback will continue repeatedly starting again from the first Song (001). You can select a song by using the [-] and [+] buttons after pressing the [DEMO] button. You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [DEMO] button. Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause These are just like the transport controls on a cassette deck or CD player, letting you fast forward [FF], rewind [REW] and pause [PAUSE] playback of the song. NOTE • When an A-B repeat range is specified the fast reverse and forward function will only work within that range. PAUSE Press the pause button to pause playback. 40 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual REW Press the fast reverse button to rapidly return to an earlier point in the song. FF Press the fast forward button to rapidly skip ahead to a later point in the song. Using Songs ● Song List These 30 songs include songs that effectively demonstrate the instrument’s easy song arranger feature, songs that are ideally suited for use with the performance assistant technology feature, and more. The “Suggested Uses” column provides some ideas as to how the songs can most effectively used. Category Main Demo Voice Demo Function Demo Piano Solo Piano Ensemble Piano Accompaniment CHORD No. Name 1 CHORD Bhajan Demo 2 CHORD Bhangra Demo 3 CHORD South Indian Folk Demo 4 CHORD Grand Piano Demo 5 CHORD Sweet! TenorSax Demo 6 CHORD Cool! RotorOrgan Demo 7 CHORD Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano Demo 8 CHORD ModernHarp & Sweet Soprano Demo 9 CHORD Hallelujah Chorus 10 CHORD Ave Maria 11 CHORD Nocturne op.9-2 12 For Elise 13 Maple Leaf Rag 14 The Last Rose of Summer 15 CHORD Amazing Grace 16 CHORD Die Lorelei 17 Piano Concerto No.21 2nd mov. 18 CHORD Scarborough Fair 19 CHORD Old Folks at Home 20 CHORD Ac Ballad (Against All Odds: Collins 0007403) 21 CHORD Ep Ballad 22 CHORD Boogie Woogie 23 CHORD Rock Piano 24 CHORD Salsa 25 CHORD Country Piano 26 CHORD Gospel R&B 27 CHORD Medium Swing 28 CHORD Jazz Waltz 29 CHORD Medium Bossa 30 CHORD SlowRock Suggested Uses The songs in this category are original Indian songs. They’re designed for your listening pleasure and provide a wonderful introduction to the advanced capabilities of this instrument. These songs features some of the instrument’s many useful voices. They make maximum use of the characteristics of each voice, and might serve as inspiration for your own compositions. Use these songs to experience some of the instrument’s advanced features: song number 9 for the easy song arranger, and songs 10 and 11 for the performance assistant technology feature. These piano solo pieces are ideally suited for use as lesson songs. A selection of piano ensemble songs that are also well suited for use as lesson songs. When you need to practice backing (accompaniment) patterns, these are the songs to do it with. This is ability you’ll need if you’re invited to play with a band. These songs allow you to practice backing parts one hand at a time, which can be the easiest way to master this important skill. : Includes chord data. The scores for the internal songs—except for songs 1–11, and song 20 which are copyrighted, are provided in the Song Book on the CD-ROM. The scores for songs 9–11 are provided in this manual. Some of the classic and/or traditional songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may not be exactly the same as the original. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 41 Using Songs Types of Songs The following three types of songs can be used by the PSR-I425. ● Preset Songs (the 30 songs built into the instrument) ................Song numbers 001–030. ● User Songs (recordings of your own performances) ..................Song numbers 031–035. ● External song files (song data transferred from a computer*) ...Song numbers 036–. * The Accessory CD-ROM includes a selection of 70 MIDI songs. See page 90 for instructions on how to transfer the songs to the instrument. The chart below shows the basic PSR-I425 processes flow for using the preset songs, user songs, and external song files—from storage to playback. Computer Your own performance External song file Record Transfer (page 52) (page 90) External song files can be saved to flash memory (036–134). PSR-I425 Song Storage locations Preset Songs (001–030) User Songs (031–035) Flash Memory (036–134) The 30 songs built into the instrument. Stored in the internal flash memory. Save to internal flash memory. Currently available. Play 42 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual NOTE • Different flash memory areas are used to store user songs and external song files transferred from a computer. User songs cannot be directly transferred to the external song file flash memory area, and vice versa. e d ck Gui ui Q Select a Song For a Lesson Yamaha Education Suite You can select song you like and use it for a left-hand, right-hand, or both-hands lesson. You can also use songs (only SMF format 0) downloaded from the Internet and saved to flash memory. (pages 89–91) During the lesson you can play as slowly as you like, and you can even play wrong notes. Song playback will slow down to a speed you can handle. It’s never too late to start learning! Lesson Flow: Select a song from the Piano Solo, Piano Ensemble category! Select the song you want to learn. Select the part you want to work on (right hand, left hand, both hands). Select lesson 1, 2, or 3. Lesson start! The practice methods: ● Lesson 1 ..............Learn to play the correct notes. ● Lesson 2 ..............Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing. ● Lesson 3 ..............Learn to play the correct notes at the correct timing along with the song. Lesson 1—Waiting In this lesson, try playing the correct notes. Play the note shown in the display. The song will wait until you play the right note. 1 Select a song for your lesson. Press the [SONG] button, and rotate the dial to select the song you want to use for your lesson. As listed on page 42 there are a variety of song types. For this example try selecting the “012 ForElise”. ForElise 012 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 43 Select a Song For a Lesson 2 3 Select the part you want to practice. Each time you press the LESSON [L/R] button the parts are selected in sequence: right hand → left hand → both hands → right hand .... The currently selected part is shown in the display. Right Right-hand lesson Left Left-hand lesson BothHand Both-hands lesson Start Lesson 1. Press the LESSON [START] button to select Lesson 1. Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Lesson 1 …. The currently selected mode is shown in the display. Waiting (Lesson 1) r1 YourTemp (Lesson 2) r2 MinusOne (Lesson 3) r3 ForElise (Song Lesson off) 012 Song playback will begin automatically when you select Lesson 1. 44 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Start the lesson! Select a Song For a Lesson Play the note shown in the display. When you play the correct note, the next note you need play is shown. The song will wait until you play the correct note. Waiting r1 Left-hand part In this case “r1” indicate that right-hand lesson 1 has been selected. 007 Right-hand part (In the case of a right-hand lesson) 4 Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/ STOP] button. Once you’ve mastered Lesson 1, move on to Lesson 2. ■See How You’ve Done ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ~~~~~~~~ Excellent Very Good ~~~~~~ ~~~~ Good ~~ OK When the lesson song has played all the way through your performance will be evaluated in 4 levels: OK, Good, Very Good, or Excellent. “Excellent!” is the highest evaluation. After the evaluation display has appeared, the lesson will start again from the beginning. NOTE • The evaluation feature can be turned off via the FUNCTION Grade item (page 84). PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 45 Select a Song For a Lesson Lesson 2—Your Tempo Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing. Song playback tempo will vary to match the speed you are playing at. The song will slow down when you play wrong notes, so you can learn at your own pace. 1 Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and 2 on pages 43, 44). 2 Start Lesson 2. Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Lesson 1 ... YourTemp r2 Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 2 is selected. In this case “r2” indicate that righthand lesson 2 has been selected. Start the lesson! Play the note shown in the display. Try to play the notes at the correct timing. As you learn to play the right notes at the right timing the tempo will increase until eventually you’ll be playing at the song’s original tempo. Left-hand part Right-hand part (In the case of a right-hand lesson) 3 Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/ STOP] button. Once you’ve mastered Lesson 2, move on to Lesson 3. 46 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Select a Song For a Lesson Lesson 3—Minus One Here’s where you can perfect your technique. The song will play at the normal tempo, minus the part you have chosen to play. Play along while listening to the song. 1 Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and 2 on pages 43, 44). 2 Start Lesson 3. Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Lesson 1 ... MinusOne r3 Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 3 is selected. In this case “r3” indicate that righthand lesson 3 has been selected. Start the lesson! Play the note shown in the display. Left-hand part Right-hand part (In the case of a right-hand lesson) 3 Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/ STOP] button. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 47 Select a Song For a Lesson Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn Use this feature when you want to start again just ahead of a section on which you made a mistake, or to repeatedly practice a section you find difficult. Press the [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button during a lesson. The song location will move back four measures from the point at which you pressed the button, and playback will begin after a one-measure count-in. Playback will continue up to the point at which you pressed the [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button, and then jump back four measures and begin again after a count-in. This process will repeat, so all you have to do is press the [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button when you make a mistake in order to repeat practice of that section until you get it right. e Jump back 4 measures and repeat playback q w Song playback direction Press immediately Oops! A mistake! 48 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual NOTE • You can change the number of measures the Repeat and learn function jumps back by pressing a number button [1]–[9] during repeat playback. e d ck Gui ui Q Play Using the Music Database You want to play music in your favorite style, but you’re not sure how to select the best voice and style for the type of music you want to play ... simply select the appropriate style from the Music Database. The panel settings will automatically be adjusted for the ideal combination of sounds and style! 1 Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button. AlvFever 001 A Music Database name will appear in the display. 2 Select a Music Database. Referring to the list on the panel or Music Database List on page 116 of the manual, use the dial to select a music database. Select one that matches the image of the song you intend to play. For this example select the “124 DayOfW&R”. DayOfW&R 124 3 Play the chords with your left hand and melody with your right. The jazz style will start playing when you play a left-hand chord to the left of the split point (page 30). Refer to page 38 for information about playing chords. Split Point Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 49 e d ck Gui ui Q Change a Song’s Style In addition to each song’s default style, you can select any other style to play the song with the Easy Song Arranger feature. This means that you can play a song that is normally a ballad, for example, as a bossa nova, as a hip-hop tune, etc. You can create totally different arrangements by changing the style with which a song is played. You can also change the song’s melody voice and the keyboard voice for a complete change of image. Listen to the DEMO Song for Easy Song Arranger The “Hallelujah Chorus” in the preset songs lets you experience the Easy Song Arranger. Playing it. Press the [SONG] button, then select a “009 Hallelujah Chorus” by using the dial. Press the [START/STOP] button to play it. Halleluj 009 As the song progresses, you will see only the style changes while the song remains the same. Keep in mind that you can enjoy using Easy Song Arranger with other songs as well—any songs that include chord data. Using the Easy Song Arranger 1 Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button. The song number and name will be displayed. Halleluj 009 2 50 Select a Song. Use the dial to select the song you want to arrange. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual The currently selected song number and name are displayed here. Change a Song’s Style 3 Listen to the song. Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the song. Move on to the next step while the song is playing. Song start! 4 NOTE • When playing song numbers 010, 011 and 020 to 030 while using the Easy Song Arranger, melody tracks will be automatically muted and no melody will sound. In order to hear the melody tracks you will need to press the SONG MEMORY buttons [3] to [5]. Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button. The style number and name will be displayed. PopShf 1 015 5 6 The currently selected style number and name are displayed here. Select a style. Rotate the dial and listen to how the song sounds with different styles. As you select different styles the song will remain the same while only the styles change. When you have selected a suitable style move on to the next step while the song is still playing (if you have stopped the song, start it again by pressing the [START/STOP] button). Select a voice you want to play as a song melody. NOTE • Because the Easy Song Arranger uses song data you can’t specify chords by playing in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. The [ACMP ON/ OFF] button will not function. • If the time signature of the song and style are different, the time signature of the song will be used. Press the [VOICE] button. The currently selected voice number and name will be displayed. Use the dial to select a different voice. GrandPno 001 7 The currently selected voice number and name are displayed here. Change the song’s melody voice. Press and hold the [VOICE] button for longer than a second. After SONG MELODY VOICE appears on the display the voice you selected in step 6 becomes the song’s melody voice. SONG MEL Hold for longer than a second PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 51 e d ck Gui ui Q Record Your Own Performance You can record up to 5 of your own performances and save them as user songs 031 through 035. The recorded song can be played back on the instrument. ■ Recordable Data You can record to a total of 6 tracks: 5 melody tracks and 1 style (chord) track. Each track can be recorded individually. ● Melody Track [1]–[5].......... Record the melody parts. ● Style Track [A] ................... Records the chord part. NOTE • Up to approximately 10,000 notes can be recorded if you record only to the melody tracks. Up to approximately 5,500 chord changes can be recorded if you record only to the style track. Track Configuration To record your own performance, first use the SONG MEMORY [1]–[5] and [A] buttons to specify the track(s) you want to record on. The track you record on determines the part that plays back later. Melody • Track [1]—Will play back as the right-hand melody part (MELODY R) Chords Specify track(s) and record • Track [2]—Will play back as the left-hand melody part (MELODY L) • Tracks [3]–[5]—Will play back as “other” performance data. Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 • Track [A]—Will play back as the Style (auto-accompaniment) part. Track A NOTE Right-hand melody Left-hand melody Other performance data • The Difference Between MELODY R and MELODY L … Songs are a combination of a melody and an auto-accompaniment style. Normally “melody” refers to the right-hand part, but in this instrument “melody” parts are provided for both the right and left hands. MELODY R is the melody part played by the right hand, and MELODY L is the melody part played by the left hand. Style The parts played by each track when a user song is played back. Recording Procedure 1 Press the [SONG] button, then use the dial to select the user song number (031–035) you want to record to. User 1 031 52 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Rotate the dial to select a song number between 031 and 035. Record Your Own Performance 2 Select the track(s) you want to record to and confirm your selection on the display. ◆ Record a Melody Track and the Accompaniment Track Together Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while holding the [REC] button. Next, press the [A] button while holding the [REC] button. The selected tracks will flash in the display. NOTE • Style accompaniment is automatically turned on when you select the style track [A] for recording. • Style accompaniment cannot turned on or off while recording is in progress. User 1 001 rEC CAUTION • If you record to a track that contains previously-recorded data the previous data will be overwritten and lost. Press and hold ◆ Record a Melody track Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while holding the [REC] button. The selected track will flash in the display. User 1 • If you use a split voice for recording, notes played to the left of the split point will not be recorded. NOTE • If style accompaniment is on and track [A] has not yet been recorded, the style track [A] will automatically be selected for recording when a melody track is selected. If you only want to record a melody track, be sure to turn the style track [A] off. 001 rEC To cancel recording to a selected track, press that track button a second time. Style accompaniment cannot be turned on or off while recording is in progress. 3 Recording will start when you play on the keyboard. NOTE You can also start recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button. The current measure will be shown on the display during recording. User 1 rEC 003 • If the memory becomes full during recording a warning message will appear and recording will stop automatically. Use the song clear or track clear (page 55) function to delete unwanted data and make more room available for recording, then do the recording again. Recording starts Current measure 4 Stop recording by pressing the [START/STOP] or [REC] button. or PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 53 Record Your Own Performance If you press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button while recording the style track an appropriate ending pattern will play and then recording will stop. When recording stops the current measure number will return to 001 and the recorded track numbers in the display will light. ● To Record Other Tracks Repeat steps 2 through 4 to record any of the remaining tracks. By selecting an unrecorded track—SONG MEMORY buttons [1]–[5], [A]—you can record the new track while listening to previously recorded tracks (the playback tracks will appear in the display). You can also mute previously recorded tracks (the muted tracks will not appear in the display) while recording new tracks. ● To Re-record a Track Simple select the track you want to re-record for recording in the normal way. The new material will overwrite the previous data. 5 When the recording is done ... ◆ To Play Back a User Song User songs are played back in the same way as regular songs (page 39). 1 Press the [SONG] button. 2 The current song number/name will be displayed—use the dial to select the user song (031–035) you want to play. 3 Press the [START/STOP] button to start playback. ● Data Recording Limitations • The split voice cannot be recorded. • The following data are recorded at the beginning of the track. Changes made during the song will not be recorded. reverb type, chorus type, time signature, style number, style volume, tempo 54 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Record Your Own Performance Song Clear—Deleting User Songs This function clears an entire user song (all tracks). 1 2 NOTE Press the [SONG] button, then select the user song (031– 035) you want to clear. • If you only want to clear a specific track from a user song use the Track Clear function. Press and hold the SONG MEMORY [1] button for longer than a second while holding the SONG MEMORY [A] button. A confirmation message will appear on the display. ClrUser1 Hold for longer than a second Press and hold 3 Press the [+] button. 4 Press the [+] button to clear the song. YES A confirmation message will appear on the display. You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button. NOTE • To execute the Song Clear function press the [+] button. Press [-] to cancel the Song Clear operation. The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while the song is being cleared. Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track from a User Song This function lets you delete a specified track from a user song. 1 2 Press the [SONG] button, then select the user song (031– 035) you want to clear. Press and hold the SONG MEMORY track button ([1]–[5], [A]) corresponding to the track you want to clear for longer than a second. A confirmation message will appear on the display. ClrTr1 YES Hold for longer than a second 3 Press the [+] button. 4 Press the [+] button to clear the track. A confirmation message will appear on the display. You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button. NOTE • To execute the Track Clear function press the [+] button. Press [-] to cancel the Track Clear operation. The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while the track is being cleared. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 55 Backup and Initialization Backup The following settings are always backed up, and are maintained even when the power is turned off. If you want to initialize the settings, use the Initialize operation as explained below. ● The Backup Parameters • User Songs • Style file of style number 163* • Touch Response on/off • Registration Memory • FUNCTION Settings: Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Volume, Song Volume, Metronome Volume, Grade, Demo Cancel, Master EQ type, Arpeggio Velocity * Refer to “Loading Style Files” on page 74 Initialization This function erases all backup data in the instrument’s flash memory and restores the initial default settings. The following initialization procedures are provided. ■Backup Clear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To clear data backed up to the internal flash memory—panel user setting, registration memory, user songs, style file of style number 163—turn the power on by pressing the [STANDBY/ON] switch while holding the highest white key on the keyboard. The backed up data will be erased and the default values restored. ■Flash Clear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To clear song data and style files that have been transferred to the internal flash memory from a computer, turn the power on by pressing the [STANDBY/ON] switch while simultaneously holding the highest white key on the keyboard and the three highest black keys. 56 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual CAUTION • When you execute the Flash Clear operation, song data you have purchased will also be cleared. Be sure to save data you want to keep to a computer. Basic Operation and Displays Basic Operation Overall PSR-I425 control is based on the following simple operations. 1 Press a button to select a basic function. 2 Use the dial to select an item or value. 3 Start a function. 3 Start a function. 2 Select an item or value. 1 Select a basic function. Display (page 59) GrandPno 001 001 ● Volume Adjustment Adjusts the volume of the sound heard via the instrument’s speakers or a pair of headphones plugged into the PHONES jack. Rotate counterclockwise to decrease the volume. 1 Rotate clockwise to increase the volume. The “Press & Hold” Symbol The “ ” symbol that appears next to some buttons indicates that the button can be pressed and held for longer than a second to call up a related function. This provides convenient direct access to a range of functions. Press a button to select a basic function. Select a song you want to listen to or a song you want to use for a lesson. Select an auto-accompaniment style. Select a voice you want to play on the keyboard. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 57 Basic Operation and Displays 2 Use the dial to select an item or value. When you select a basic function, the item corresponding to that function will be displayed. You can then use the dial or the number buttons [0]–[9] to select the desired item. ForElise 012 This portion of the display indicates the name and number of the currently selected song, voice and style. It also displays the name and current setting/ value of other functions. f ● CATEGORY [ Rotate the dial clockwise to increase the value of the selected item, or counterclockwise to decrease it’s value. Rotate the dial continuously to continuously increase or decrease the value. Increase ] and [ ] buttons When selecting a song, style, or voice, you can use these buttons to jump to the first item in the next or previous category. f Decrease r ● Dial r ■ Changing Values ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● The CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons are useful for selecting categorized items, as in the example below. ● [+] and [-] Buttons Press the [+] button briefly to increment the value by 1, or press the [-] button briefly to decrement the value by 1. Press and hold either button to continuously increment or decrement the value in the corresponding direction. Jump to the first item in the next or previous category. Example: VOICE SELECT SweetFlt Press briefly to decrement. Press briefly to increment. 090 The first voice in the selected category is selected. ● Number Buttons [0]–[9] Example: Song number “003” can be entered in three ways. • [0] → [0] → [3] • [0] → [3] (“003” will appear on the display after a brief delay) • [3] (“003” will appear on the display after a brief delay) 3 Press number buttons [0], [0], [3]. r In a display in which a category appears, selection is easy if you first use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the category containing the desired item, then use the dial or [+] and [-] buttons to select the item. This can be particularly handy when you have to select from a large number of voices. f The number buttons can be used to directly enter a song number or parameter value. Hundreds or tens digits that are “0” can be omitted (see below). In most procedures described throughout this owner’s manual the dial is recommended for selection simply because it is the easiest and most intuitive selection method. Please note however, that most items or values that can be selected using the dial can also be selected using the [+] and [-] buttons. Start a function. This is the [START/STOP] button. Press the [START/STOP] button after pressing the [SONG] or [STYLE] button to start playback of the selected song or style (rhythm). 58 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Basic Operation and Displays Display Items The display shows all of the current basic settings: song, style, voice. It also includes a range of indicators that show the on/off status of a range of functions. Notation Displays the melody and chord notes of a song when the Song Lesson function is in use, or the notes of chords you specify when the Dictionary function is in use. At other times the notes you play on the keyboard are displayed. BEAT number and MEASURE Indicates the beat number in a measure during the Metronome function. Indicates the current measure during playback of a song or style, and the currently set Tempo value for the song or style. (see page 27) 001 Chord Display NOTE • Any notes occurring below or above the staff are indicated by “8va” in the notation. • For a few specific chords, not all notes may be shown in the notation section of the display. This is due to space limitations in the display. TOUCH Indicates that Touch response is turned on. (see page 65) HARMONY Indicates that Harmony is turned on. (see page 60) Indicates the name of the chord currently being played back, or the name of the chord being played on the keyboard. Song Track Display Information related to the song tracks is shown here. (see page 52, 79) GrandPno 001 001 DUAL Indicates that the Dual voice is turned on. (see page 29) SPLIT Indicates that the Split voice is turned on. (see page 30) ARPEGGIO Beat Display Indicates the current style or song beat with flashing arrows. (see page 27) Indicates that the Arpeggio is turned on. (see page 14) Knob Assign Display Performance assistant technology Indicates that performance assistant technology is turned on. (see page 23) This display allows you to visually confirm parameters assigned to the knobs. (see page 18) ACMP ON Indicates that Accompaniment is turned on. (see page 34) SYNC STOP Indicates that SYNC STOP is turned on. (see page 71) PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 59 Reference e erenc ef R Adding Effects Harmony This feature adds harmony notes to the main voice. 1 Press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button to turn Harmony feature on. To turn Harmony off, press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button again. When harmony is on the harmony icon will appear in the display. 3 Use the dial to select a harmony type. Refer to the Effect Type List on page 119 for information about the available harmony types. Try playing the keyboard with the harmony function. The effect and operation of each Harmony Type is different-refer to the below section “How to sound each Harmony Type” as well as the Effect Type List for details. When you press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button to turn this feature on, the appropriate harmony type for the currently selected main voice is automatically selected. 2 Press and hold the [HARMONY ON/ OFF] button for longer than a second so that the Harmony Type item appears. “HarmType” appears in the display for a few seconds, and the currently selected harmony type will be displayed. Use the dial to select a different harmony type. NOTE • The harmony notes can be added only to the Main Voice, not to Dual or Split Voices. • The keys left of the Split Point of the keyboard produce no harmony notes when the auto accompaniment is on (ACMP ON is lit). HarmType Hold for longer than a second. Trio 02 The currently selected harmony type ● How to sound each Harmony Type • Harmony type 13 to 19 (Tremolo) • Harmony type 01 to 05 Keep holding down the keys. Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when the Auto Accompaniment is on (page 34). • Harmony type 20 to 26 (Echo) • Harmony type 06 to 12 (Trill) Keep holding down the keys. Hold down two keys. 60 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the Function Settings (page 69). Adding Effects Adding Reverb Reverb lets you play with a rich concert hall type ambience. When you select a style or song the optimum reverb type for the voice used is automatically selected. If you want to select a different reverb type, use the procedure described below. 1 Press the [FUNCTON] button. 3 Use the dial to select a reverb type. You can check how the selected reverb type sounds by playing on the keyboard. StyleVol 100 r f 2 Hall3 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the Reverb Type item. “Reverb” appears in the display for a few seconds, and the currently selected reverb type will be displayed. 03 Selected reverb type Refer to the Effect Type List on page 119 for information about the available reverb types. ● Adjusting the Reverb Send Level You can individually adjust the amount of reverb that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices. See page 83). Reverb Hall2 02 The currently selected reverb type PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 61 Adding Effects Adding Chorus The chorus effect creates a thick sound that is similar to many of the same voices being played in unison. When you select a style or song the optimum chorus type for the voice used is automatically selected. If you want to select a different chorus type, use the procedure described below. 1 Press the [FUNCTON] button. 3 Use the dial to select a chorus type. You can check how the selected chorus type sounds by playing on the keyboard. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Chorus Type item. “Chorus” appears in the display for a few seconds, and the currently selected chorus type will be displayed. Chorus2 2 Selected chorus type Refer to the Effect Type List on page 119 for information about the available chorus types. Chorus Chorus1 1 The currently selected chorus type 62 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual ● Adjusting the Chorus Send Level You can individually adjust the amount of chorus that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices. See page 83). e erenc ef R Handy Performance Features The Metronome The instrument includes a metronome with adjustable tempo and time signature. Use it to set the tempo that is most comfortable for you. ■Start the metronome ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Turn the metronome on and start it by pressing the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button. To stop the metronome, press the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button again. ■Adjusting the Metronome Tempo ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 1 Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the tempo setting. Tempo GrandPno 001 090 1 Current Tempo setting 2 Use the dial to select a tempo from 11 to 280. 1 Indicates the beat number in the measure PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 63 Handy Performance Features Setting the Number of Beats per Measure, and the Length of Each Beat In this example we’ll set up a 5/8 time signature. The available range is from 0 through 60. Select 5 for this example. NOTE • The metronome time signature will synchronize to a style or song that is playing, so these parameters cannot be changed while a style or song is playing. 3 Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select the beat length function “TimesigD”. The currently selected beat length will be displayed. f OFF] button for longer than a second to select the number of beats per measure function “TimesigN”. r 1 Press and hold the [METRONOME ON/ Hold for longer than a second. TimesigN 04 Number of beats per measure. TimesigD 2 Use the dial to select the number of beats per measure. A chime will sound on the first beat of each measure while the other beats will click. All beats will simply click with no chime at the beginning of each measure if you set this parameter to “00”. 04 The length of one beat. 4 Use the dial to select the beat length. Select the required length for each beat: 2, 4, 8, or 16 (half note, quarter note, eighth note, or 16th note). Select 8 for this example. Adjusting the Metronome Volume 1 Press the [FUNCTON] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 3 Use the dial to set the metronome volume as required. f r ] and [ ] buttons to select the Metronome Volume item. MtrVol 100 Metronome volume 64 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Handy Performance Features Tap Start You can supply a count-in at any tempo you like to start playback. Simply tap the [TEMPO/TAP] button at any tempo—4 times for time signatures in 4, and 3 times for time signatures in 3—and the selected style/ song will begin playing at the tapped tempo. Touch Response Sensitivity When touch response is on you can adjust the keyboard’s sensitivity to dynamics in three steps. 1 Press the [TOUCH ON/OFF] button to turn touch response on. The touch response icon will appear in the display when touch response is on (page 59). GrandPno 001 3 Use the dial in response to keyboard dynamics to select a touch sensitivity setting between 1 and 3. Higher values produce greater (easier) volume variation in response to keyboard dynamics—i.e. greater sensitivity. NOTE • The initial default touch sensitivity setting is “2”. Touch response icon 2 Press and hold the [TOUCH ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so that the Touch Sensitivity item appears. “TouchSns” appears in the display for a few seconds, and the currently selected touch sensitivity will be displayed. TouchSns Hold for longer than a second. Medium 2 Touch Sensitivity PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 65 Handy Performance Features Pitch Bend The pitch bend wheel can be used to add smooth pitch variations to notes you play on the keyboard. Roll the wheel upward to raise the pitch, or downward to lower the pitch. If you use this feature with a voice such as the “040 Overdriven” guitar voice, you can produce remarkably realistic string-bending effects. Pitch Controls ◆ Large Pitch Changes (Transpose) The overall pitch of the instrument can by shifted up or down by a maximum of 1 octave in semitone increments. ◆ Small Pitch Changes (Tuning) The overall tuning of the instrument can by shifted up or down by a maximum of 100 cents in 1-cent increments (100 cents = 1 semitone). 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 2 Use the CATEGORY [ Transpos 00 3 Use the dial to set the transpose value between -12 and +12 as required. NOTE • The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed. 66 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual r ] and [ ] buttons to select the Tuning item. f r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Transpose item. Tuning 000 3 Use the dial to set the tuning value between -100 and +100 as required. NOTE • The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed. Handy Performance Features Controlling Arpeggio Volume with Keyboard Dynamics 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the dial to select “2 Thru”. When “1 Original” is selected the arpeggio volume is the same regardless of changes in keyboard velocity. 2 Press the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select the arpeggio velocity function “ARP Velo”. “ARP Velo” will be shown in the display for a few seconds, then the currently selected arpeggio velocity setting will appear. ARP Velo Original 1 The currently selected arpeggio velocity. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 67 Handy Performance Features One Touch Setting Sometimes selecting the ideal voice to play with a song or style can be confusing. The One Touch Setting feature automatically selects a well-balanced voice for you when you select a style or song. Simply select voice number “000” to activate this feature. 1 Select voice number “000” (steps 1 to 2 on page 28). 4 Use the dial to change songs, then play the keyboard and listen to the voice. SweetSpr 000 Use the dial to select voice number 000. 2 Select and play back any song (steps 1 to 3 on page 39). 3 Play the keyboard and remember the sound of the voice. If you have stopped playback at some point during this procedure press the [START/STOP] button to start playback again. 68 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual You should hear a different keyboard voice than you played in step 3. Press the [VOICE] button after changing songs to see the name of the voice being used. Handy Performance Features Adjusting the Harmony Volume 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 3 Use the dial to set the harmony volume between 000 and 127. f r ] and [ ] buttons to select the Harmony Volume item. HarmVol 080 Select an EQ Setting for the Best Sound Five different master equalizer (EQ) settings are provided to give you the best possible sound when listening through different reproduction systems—the instrument’s internal speakers, headphones, or an external speaker system. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. The currently selected function will appear in the display. MasterEQ Speakerl 2 Press the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select the master EQ type function “MasterEQ”. “MasterEQ” will be shown in the display for a few seconds, then the currently selected EQ type will appear. 1 The currently selected master EQ type. 3 Use the dial to select the desired Master EQ setting. Five settings are available: 1–5. Settings 1 and 2 are best for listening via the instrument’s built-in speakers, setting 3 is for headphones, and settings 4 and 5 are ideal for listening via external speakers. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 69 e erenc ef R Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Basic operation of the Style (auto-accompaniment) feature is described on page 33 of the Quick Guide. Here are some other ways you can play the styles, the style volume adjustment procedure, how you can play chords using the styles, and more. Pattern Variation (Sections) The PSR-I425 features a wide variety of style “sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match the song you are playing. Intro Main A/B Ending Auto fill ● INTRO section This is used for the beginning of the Song. When the intro finishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the main section. The length of the intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. ● MAIN section This is used for playing the main part of the Song. It plays a main accompaniment pattern, and repeats indefinitely until another section’s button is pressed. There are two variations on the basic pattern (A and B), and the Style playback sound changes harmonically based on the chords you play with your left hand. ● Fill-in section This is automatically added before changing to section A or B. ● ENDING section This is used for the ending of the Song. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically. The length of the ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. 1 Press the [STYLE] button and then select a style. 3 Press the [SYNC START] button to turn synchro start on. 2 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto accompaniment on. Beat arrows will flash when the synchro start standby mode is engaged Appears when Auto Accompaniment is on. 70 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual ● Synchro Start When the synchro start standby mode is engaged, style playback will begin as soon as you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. You can disengage the synchro-start standby mode by pressing the [SYNC START] button again. Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions 4 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. 8 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. MAIN A ENDING The name of the selected section— MAIN A or MAIN B—will be displayed. 5 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. INTRO≥A You’re now ready to play the intro. 6 As soon as you play a chord with your This switches to the ending section. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button again while the ending is playing back. ● Synchro Stop When this function is selected the accompaniment style will only play while you are playing chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. Style playback will stop when you release the keys. To turn the function on, press the [SYNC STOP] button. left hand, the Intro of the selected Style starts. For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below). For information on how to enter chords, see “Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords” on page 38. Split point Appears when the synchro-stop function is engaged. Accompaniment range 7 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. The style will play while you are playing the keys Style playback will stop when you release the keys FILL A≥B When the fill-in is finished, it leads smoothly into the selected main section A/B. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 71 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Adjusting the Style Volume 2 Use the CATEGORY [ r ] and [ ] buttons to select the Style Volume item. f Press the [STYLE] button to engage the style function. 1 Press the [FUNCTON] button. StyleVol 100 3 Use the dial to set the style volume between 000 and 127. Setting the Split Point The initial default split point is key number 54 (the F#2 key), but you can change it to another key using the procedure described below. 1 Press the [STYLE] button. 2 Press and hold the [ACMP ON/OFF] for 3 Use the dial to set the split point to any key from 000 through 127. longer than a second so that the Split point item appears. Split point (54 : F#2) Main voice Split voice Hold for longer than a second SplitPnt NOTE • When you change the split point the auto-accompaniment split point also changes. • The split point cannot be changed during a song lesson. Split point 72 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual r NOTE • You can also access the Split Point item by pressing the [FUNCTION] button and using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to locate the item (page 82). f 054 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment) When auto accompaniment is on (the ACMP ON icon is showing) and Synchro Start is off, you can play chords in the left-hand accompaniment range of the keyboard while the style is stopped and still hear the accompaniment chords. This is “Stop Accompaniment”, and any of the chord fingerings recognized by the instrument can be used (page 38). Press the [STYLE] button to engage the style function, then press the [ACMP ON/ OFF] button to turn the auto accompaniment on. PopBossa 104 Appears when auto accompaniment is on Accompaniment range PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 73 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Loading Style Files This instrument features 162 internal styles, but other styles, such as those provided on the CD-ROM and others that can be obtained from the internet (only styles with the “.sty” suffix), can be loaded into style number 163 and used in the same way as the internal styles. In order to use the style file load function, the file must already have been transferred from the computer to the instrument. The procedure for transferring files from a computer to the instrument is described on page 89 (“Transferring Data between the Computer and Instrument”). The procedure described below loads a style file that has already been transferred from a computer to the instrument into style number 163. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Execute the load operation. The currently selected function will appear in the display. 2 Press the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select the style file load function “Sff Load”. Sff Load After about 2 seconds the name of a loadable style file will appear in the display. If multiple loadable style files have been transferred to the instrument, you can use the dial or the [+] and [-] buttons to select the other files in sequence. 74 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual With the name of the style file you want to load shown in the display, press the number [0] button. 4 A confirmation message for the load operation will appear. Press the [+/YES] button to actually load the file. Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Chord Basics Two or more notes played together constitute a “chord”. The most basic chord type is the “triad” consisting of three notes: the root, third, and fifth degrees of the corresponding scale. A C major triad, for example, is made up of the notes C (the root), E (the third note of the C major scale), and G (the fifth note of the C major scale). 3rd 3rd Root In the C major triad shown above, the lowest note is the “root” of the chord (this is the chord’s “root position” ... using other chord notes for the lowest note results in “inversions”). The root is the central sound of the chord, which supports and anchors the other chord notes. The distance (interval) between adjacent notes of a triad in root position is either a major or minor third. Major third–four half steps (semitones) Minor third–three half steps (semitones) The lowest interval in our root-position triad (between the root and the third) determines whether the triad is a major or minor chord, and we can shift the highest note up or down by a semitone to produce two additional chords, as shown below. Major chord CM Minor 3rd Minor chord Cm Major 3rd Augmented chord C aug Minor 3rd Major 3rd Major 3rd Major 3rd Diminished chord C dim Minor 3rd Minor 3rd The basic characteristics of the chord sound remain intact even if we change the order of the notes to create different inversions. Successive chords in a chord progression can be smoothly connected, for example, by choosing the appropriate inversions (or chord “voicings”). ● Reading Chord Names Chord names tell you just about everything you need to know about a chord (other than the inversion/voicing). The chord name tells you what the root of the chord is, whether it is a major, minor, or diminished chord, whether it requires a major or flatted seventh, what alterations or tensions it uses ... all at a glance. Cm Root note Chord type ● Some Chord Types (These are just some of the “Standard” chord types recognized by the PSR-I425.) Suspended 4 th 7 th C sus4 Perfect 5 th Perfect 4 th Minor/major 7 th Flatted 7 th Minor chord Major chord Flatted 7 th C M7 Minor chord Minor 7 th, flatted 5 th (b5) (b5) C m7 C7 Flatted 5 th Major 7 th C m7 7 th, flatted 5 th C mM7 Major 7 th Minor 7 th C7 7 th chord Flatted 5 th Minor 7 th chord Major 7 th Major chord 7 th, suspended 4 th C 7sus4 Flatted 7 th Suspended 4 th chord PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 75 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions ■Recognized Standard Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● All chords in the chart are “C-root” chords. Chord Name/[Abbreviation] Normal Voicing Chord (C) Major [M] 1-3-5 C Add ninth [(9)] 1-2-3-5 C Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6 Display C (9) C(9) C6 (9) Sixth ninth [6(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 C6 C6(9) * Major seventh [M7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - 7 C M7 CM7 Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 C M7 Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)] 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7 C M7 Flatted fifth [(b5)] 1 - 3 - b5 C (9) CM7 (9) * (#11) CM7(#11) * (b5) Cb5 * (b5) Major seventh flatted fifth [M7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - 7 C M7 CM7b5 * Suspended fourth [sus4] 1-4-5 C sus4 Csus4 Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - #5 C aug Caug Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - #5 - 7 C M7aug CM7aug * Minor [m] 1 - b3 - 5 Cm Minor add ninth [m(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - 5 Cm Cm(9) Minor sixth [m6] 1 - b3 - 5 - 6 C m6 Cm6 Minor seventh [m7] 1 - b3 - (5) - b7 C m7 Cm7 Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7 Cm (9) (9) C m7 (11) Cm7(9) 1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7) C m7 Cm7(11) * Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - b3 - (5) - 7 C mM7 CmM7 Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7 Minor seventh add eleventh [m7(11)] Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7b5] Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - b7 1 - b3 - b5 - 7 (9) C mM7 (b5) C m7 (b5) CmM7(9) * Cm7b5 CmM7b5 * Diminished [dim] 1 - b3 - b5 C mM7 C dim Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - b3 - b5 - 6 C dim7 Cdim7 Seventh [7] 1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - b7 C7 C7 Seventh flatted ninth [7(b9)] 1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7 Cdim (b9) C7(b9) (b13) C7(b13) (9) C7(9) (#11) C7(#11) (13) C7(13) (#9) C7 Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7(b13)] 1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7 Seventh ninth [7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7 Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)] 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7 C7 Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)] 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7 C7 C7 Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)] 1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7 C7(#9) Seventh flatted fifth [7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - b7 C 7b5 C7b5 * Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - #5 - b7 C 7aug C7aug Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - (5) - b7 C 7sus4 C7sus4 One plus two plus five [1+2+5] 1-2-5 C 1+2+5 C* * These chords are not shown in the Dictionary function. NOTE • Notes in parentheses can be omitted. • Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompaniment based only on the root. • A perfect fifth (1+5) produces accompaniment based only on the root and fifth which can be used with both major and minor chords. • The chord fingerings listed are all in “root” position, but other inversions can be used—with the following exceptions: m7, m7b5, 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7b5, 6(9), 1+2+5. 76 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual NOTE • Inversion of the 7sus4 and m7(11) chords are not recognized if the notes shown in parentheses are omitted. • The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related chords are played in sequence (e.g. some minor chords followed by the minor seventh). • Two-note fingerings will produce a chord based on the previously played chord. Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary The Dictionary function is essentially a built-in “chord book” that shows you the individual notes of chords. It is ideal when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it. 1 Press and hold the LESSON [START] button for longer than a second. Hold for longer than a second Dict. 3 Press the “M7” (major seventh) key in the section of the keyboard labeled “CHORD TYPE”. (The note doesn’t sound.) The notes you should play for the specified chord (root note and chord type) are shown in the display, both as notation and in the keyboard diagram. 2 As an example, we’ll learn how to play a GM7 (G major seventh) chord. Press the “G” key in the section of the keyboard labeled “ROOT”. (The note doesn’t sound.) The root note you set is shown in the display. Notation of chord Chord name (root and type) Dict. 001 Individual notes of chord (keyboard) To call up possible inversions of the chord, press the [+]/[-] buttons. Dict. 001 NOTE • About major chords: Simple major chords are usually indicated only by the root note. For example, “C” refers to C major. However, when specifying major chords here, make sure to select “M” (major) after pressing the root note. 4 Try playing a chord in the auto accom- paniment section of the keyboard, checking the indications in the display. When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell sound signals your success and the chord name in the display flash. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 77 e erenc ef R Song Settings Song Volume 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the dial to set the song volume between 000 and 127. NOTE • Song volume can be adjusted while a song is selected. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ f r ] and [ ] buttons to select the Song Volume item. SongVol 100 Song volume A-B Repeat You can specify a section of a song—“A” is the start point and “B” is the end point—for repeat playback. A 2 Press the [A-B REPEAT] button a sec- ond time at the end of the section you want to repeat (the “B” point). B 1 Play the song (page 39) and press the [A-B REPEAT] button at the beginning of the section you want to repeat (the “A” point). 3 The specified A-B section of the song will now play repeatedly. You can stop repeat playback at any time by pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button. NOTE • The repeat start and end points can be specified in one-measure increments. • The current measure number is shown in the display during playback. • If you want to set the start point “A” at the very beginning of the song press the [A-B REPEAT] button before starting playback of the song. 78 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Song Settings Muting Independent Song Parts Each “track” of a song plays a different part of the song—melody, percussion, accompaniment, etc. You can mute individual tracks and play the muted part on the keyboard yourself, or simply mute tracks other than the ones you want to listen to. Use the SONG MEMORY [1]–[5] and [A] buttons to mute or un-mute the corresponding tracks. The track number in the display disappears when that track is muted. Refer to page 52 for information about the song track configuration. Track number on—Track will playback Track number off—Track is muted or contains no data Change the Melody Voice You can change a song’s melody voice to any other voice you prefer. NOTE • You cannot change the melody voice of a user song. 1 Select the song and play it. 2 Rotate the dial to select the voice you 3 Press the [VOICE] button for longer than a second. “SONG MELODY VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, indicating that the voice selected in step #2 has replaced the song’s original melody voice. want to listen to after pressing the [VOICE] button. Strings 050 Hold for longer than a second SONG MEL PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 79 e erenc ef R Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you save your favorite settings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to 16 complete setups can be saved (8 banks of two setups each). 8 Banks Memory 1 Memory 2 Up to 16 presets (eight banks of two each) can be memorized. Saving to the Registration Memory 1 Set the panel controls as required— select a voice, accompaniment style, etc. 2 Press the [●] (MEMORY/BANK) button. 4 Press the REGIST MEMORY [1] or [2] button while holding the [●] (MEMORY/ BANK) button to store the current panel settings to the specified registration memory. A bank number will appear in the display when you release the button. Writing! Bank 1 Bank number 3 Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number but- tons to select a bank number from 1 to 8. NOTE • Data cannot be saved to the registration memory during song playback. 80 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual NOTE • If you select a Registration Memory number that already contains data, the previous data is deleted and overwritten by the new data. CAUTION • Do not turn off the power while saving settings to the registration memory, otherwise the data may be damaged or lost. Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings Recalling a Registration Memory 1 Press the [●] (MEMORY/BANK) button. A bank number will appear in the display when you release the button. ● Settings That Can be Saved to the Registration Memory • Style settings* Style number, Auto Accompaniment ON/OFF, Split Point, Style settings (Main A/B), Style Volume, Tempo Bank 1 Bank number 2 Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number buttons to select bank you want to recall. • Voice settings Main Voice setting (Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Send Level, Attack Time, Release Time, Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance, Chorus Send Level), Dual Voice settings (Dual ON/OFF, Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Send Level, Chorus Send Level, Attack Time, Release Time, Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance), Split Voice settings (Split ON/OFF, Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Send Level, Chorus Send Level) • Effect settings Reverb Type, Chorus Type • Arpeggio settings Arpeggio Type, Arpeggio ON/OFF • Harmony settings Harmony ON/OFF, Harmony Type, Harmony Volume • Other settings Transpose, Pitch Bend Range, Knob Assign * Style settings are not available for Registration Memory when using the Song features. 3 Press the REGIST MEMORY button, [1] or [2], containing the settings you want to recall. The recalled REGIST MEMORY number appears in the display for a few seconds. The panel controls will be instantly set accordingly. REGIST 1 1 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 81 e erenc ef R The Functions The “Functions” provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters for tuning, setting the split point, and adjusting the voices and effects. Take a look at the function list starting on the opposite page. There are 54 function parameters in all. When you locate a function you want to set up, simply select the function’s display name (shown to the right of the function name in the list) and adjust as required. Selecting and Setting Functions 1 Find the function you want to set in the list that begins on page 83. 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 4 Use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the [0]–[9] number buttons to set the selected function as required. The [+] and [-] buttons are used to make ON/ OFF type settings: [+] = ON, [-] = OFF. In some cases the [+] button will initiate execution of the selected function, and the [-] will cancel the selection. StyleVol 100 3 Select a function. r f Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary until the function’s display name appears in the display. Direct numeric entry. • Decrement value by 1. • OFF • Cancel Transpos • Increment value by 1. • ON • Execute Press simultaneously to recall the default setting. 00 The selected function. 82 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Some function settings are stored in memory as soon as they are changed. See “The Backup Parameters” on page 56 for information on the function settings that are stored on the instrument. To restore all initial factor default settings perform the “Backup Clear” procedure described in the “Initialization” section on page 56. The Functions ● Function Setting List Setting Item title Range/Settings Description Style Volume StyleVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Style. Song Volume SongVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Song. Transpose Transpos -12–12 Determines the pitch of the instrument by semitone increments. Tuning Tuning -100–100 Sets the pitch of the instrument’s sound in 1-cent increments. Pitch Bend Range PBRange 01–12 Sets the pitch bend range in semitone increments. Split Point SplitPnt 000–127 (C-2–G8) Determines the highest key for the Split voice and sets the Split “point”— in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower) and Main (upper) voices. The Split Point setting and Accompaniment Split Point setting are automatically set to the same value. Touch Sensitivity TouchSns 1(Soft), 2(Medium), 3(Hard) When Touch Response is on, this determines the sensitivity of the feature. Main Voice Volume M.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Main voice. Main Voice Octave M.Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Main voice. Main Voice Pan M.Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Determines the pan position of the Main voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Main Voice Reverb Level M.Reverb 000–127 Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Main Voice Chorus Level M.Chorus 000–127 Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Main Voice Attack Time M.Attack 000–127 Sets the Main voice attack time. Main Voice Release Time M.Releas 000–127 Sets the Main voice release time. Main Voice Filter Cutoff M.Cutoff 000–127 Sets the Main voice filter cutoff frequency. Main Voice Filter Resonance M.Reso. 000–127 Sets the Main voice filter resonance. Dual Voice D.Voice 001–514 Selects the Dual voice. Dual Voice Volume D.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Dual voice. Dual Voice Octave D.Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Dual voice. Dual Voice Pan D.Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Determines the pan position of the Dual voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Dual Voice Reverb Level D.Reverb 000–127 Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Dual Voice Chorus Level D.Chorus 000–127 Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Dual Voice Attack Time D.Attack 000–127 Sets the Dual voice attack time. Dual Voice Release Time D.Releas 000–127 Sets the Dual voice release time. Dual Voice Filter Cutoff D.Cutoff 000–127 Sets the Dual voice filter cutoff frequency. Dual Voice Filter Resonance D.Reso. 000–127 Sets the Dual voice filter resonance. Split Voice S.Voice 001–514 Selects the Split voice. Split Voice Volume S.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Split voice. Split Voice Octave S.Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Split voice. Split Voice Pan S.Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Determines the pan position of the Split voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Split Voice Reverb Level S.Reverb 000–127 Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Split Voice Chorus Level S.Chorus 000–127 Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 83 The Functions Setting Item title Range/Settings Description Reverb Type Reverb 01–10 Determines the Reverb type, including off (10). (See the list on page 119) Chorus Type Chorus 01–05 Determines the Chorus type, including off (05). (See the list on page 119) Master EQ Type MasterEQ Speaker1, Speaker2, Headphone, Line Out1, Line Out2 Sets the equalizer applied to the speaker output for optimum sound in different listening situations. Harmony Type HarmType 01–26 Determines the Harmony type. (See the list on page 119) Harmony Volume HarmVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Harmony effect. Arpeggio Type ARP Type 01–62 Determines the Arpeggio type. (See the list on page 14) Arpeggio Velocity ARP Velo 1 (Original), 2 (Thru) Sets the velocity mode for arpeggio playback. Style File Load Sff Load 001–nnn Loads a Style file. PC mode PC mode PC1/PC2/OFF Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer (page 88). Local On/Off Local ON/OFF Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the internal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF). (page 87) External Clock ExtClock ON/OFF Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON). (page 87) Keyboard Out KbdOut ON/OFF Determines whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF). Style Out StyleOut ON/OFF Determines whether Style data is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF) during Style playback. Song Out SongOut ON/OFF Determines whether Song data is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF) during Song playback. Initial Send InitSend YES/NO Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Press [+] to send, or press [-] to cancel. Time Signature Numerator TimesigN 00–60 Determines the time signature of the Metronome. Time Signature Denominator TimesigD Half note, Quarter note, Eighth note, Sixteenth note Sets the length of each metronome beat. Metronome Volume MtrVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Metronome. Lesson Track (R) R-Part GuideTrack 1–16 Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson. The setting is only effective for songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer. Lesson Track (L) L-Part GuideTrack 1–16 Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting is only effective for songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer. Grade Grade ON/OFF Determines whether the Grade function is on or off. Demo Cancel D-Cancel ON/OFF Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is set to ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO] button is pressed. * All these settings can be conveniently reset to their initial default values by pressing the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously. (The exception to this is Initial Send, which is an operation, not a setting.) 84 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual e erenc ef R Connecting to a Computer Nearly all of the electronic musical instruments made today—particularly synthesizers, sequencers and computer music related devices—use MIDI. MIDI is a worldwide standard that allows these devices to send and receive performance and setting data. Naturally, this instrument lets you save or send your keyboard performance as MIDI data, as well as the songs, styles and panel settings. The potential MIDI holds for your live performances and music creation/production is enormous—simply by connecting this instrument to a computer and transmitting MIDI data. In this section, you’ll learn the basics of MIDI and the specific MIDI functions provided by this instrument. What Is MIDI? No doubt you have heard the terms “acoustic instrument” and “digital instrument”. In the world today, these are the two main categories of instruments. Let’s consider a grand piano and a classical guitar as representative acoustic instruments. They are easy to understand. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some strings and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string and the note sounds. But how does a digital instrument go about playing a note? ● Acoustic guitar note production For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note using the grand piano sound on the instrument. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note, the electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as “with what voice”, “with which key”, “about how strong”, “when was it pressed”, and “when was it released”. Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays the stored sampling note. Example of Keyboard Information Pluck a string and the body resonates the sound. ● Digital instrument note production L Tone Generator Sampling (Electronic circuit) Sampling Note Note R Playing the keyboard Based on playing information from the keyboard, a sampling note stored in the tone generator is played through the speakers. As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument the sampling note (previously recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is played based on information received from the keyboard. So then what is the information from the keyboard that becomes the basis for note production? Voice number (with what voice) 1 (grand piano) Note number (with which key) 60 (C3) Note on (when was it pressed) and note off (when was it released) Timing expressed numerically (quarter note) Velocity (about how strong) 120 (strong) Your keyboard performance and all panel operations of this instrument are processed as MIDI data. The songs, auto accompaniment (styles), and User songs are also made up of MIDI data. MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface and it allows different musical instruments and devices to instantly communicate with each other, via digital data. The MIDI standard is used all over the world and was designed to transmit performance data between electronic musical instruments (or computers). Thanks to MIDI, you can control one instrument from another and transmit performance data between the devices-taking your creative and performance potential to even higher levels. MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Channel messages and System messages. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 85 Connecting to a Computer ● Channel Messages This instrument is capable of handling 16 MIDI channels simultaneously—meaning it can play up to sixteen different instruments at the same time. Channel messages transmit information such as Note ON/OFF, Program Change, for each of the 16 channels. Message Name ● System Messages This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI system. System messages include messages like Exclusive Messages that transmit data unique to each instrument manufacturer and Realtime Messages that control the MIDI device. Message Name Instrument Operation/Panel Setting Instrument Operation/Panel Setting Exclusive Message Reverb/chorus settings, etc. Note ON/OFF Performance data of the keyboard (contains note number and velocity data) Realtime Messages Start/stop operation Program Change Instrument selection (including bank select MSB/LSB, if necessary) Control Change Instrument settings (volume, pan, etc.) Connecting a Personal Computer The following functions become available when this instrument is connected to a computer. ● Performance data can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 87). ● Files can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 89). The connection procedure is as follows: 1 Install the USB-MIDI driver on your com- puter. The USB–MIDI driver is included on the CD-ROM. Installation of the USB MIDI driver is described on page 92. 2 Connect the USB terminal of the computer to the USB terminal on the instrument using a standard USB cable (USB cable sold separately). ■ USB Precautions Please observe the following precautions when connecting the instrument to a computer via a USB cable. Failure to do so can cause the instrument and/or the computer to hang up (freeze), possibly causing corruption or loss of data. If the instrument or computer does hang up, turn the power to both devices off and then on again, and restart the computer. CAUTION • Wake the computer from a sleep/suspended/standby mode before connecting the USB cable. The supplied CD-ROM also includes a Musicsoft Downloader application that allows you to transfer song files from your computer to the instrument’s flash memory. For instructions about how to install Musicsoft Downloader and how to transfer song files, see page 90. • Connect the USB cable to the instrument and computer before turning power to the instrument on. • Check the following points before turning the instrument’s power on or off, and before plugging or unplugging the USB cable. • Quit all applications. • Make sure that no data transfer is in progress (data is transferred whenever you play on the keyboard or play a song). • Allow at least 6 seconds between turning the instrument’s power on and off, and between plugging and unplugging the USB cable. • Directly connect the instrument to the computer using a single USB cable. Do not use a USB hub. NOTE • The Musicsoft Downloader application may not be able to access the instrument in the following cases: PSR-I425 USB cable 86 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual • During style playback. • During song playback. Connecting to a Computer Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer By connecting the instrument to a computer, the instrument’s performance data can be used on the computer, and performance data from the computer can be played on the instrument. ● When the instrument is connected with computer, it transmits/receives performance data. USB terminal USB terminal PSR-I425 USB cable ■MIDI settings ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● These settings pertain to performance data transmission and reception. Range/Settings Description Local ON/OFF Local control determines whether or not notes played on the instrument are sounded by its internal tone generator system: the internal tone generator is active when local control is on, and inactive when local control is off. External Clock ON/OFF These settings determine whether the instrument is synchronized to its own internal clock (OFF), or to a clock signal from an external device (ON). Keyboard Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF). Style Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether Style data is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Style playback. Song Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether Song data is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Song playback. • If you can’t get any sound out of the instrument, this most likely may be caused by Local Control being set to off. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the item you want to change its value. r CAUTION f Item CAUTION • If External Clock is ON and no clock signal is being received from an external device, the song, style, and metronome functions will not start. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the dial to select ON or OFF. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 87 Connecting to a Computer ■PC Mode ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● A number of MIDI settings need to be made when you want to transfer performance data between the computer and the instrument. The PC Mode item can conveniently make multiple settings for you in one operation. Three settings are available: PC1, PC2, and OFF. This setting is not necessary when transferring song or backup files between the computer and the instrument. * Set the PC mode to PC2 when using Digital Music Notebook. PC1 PC2* OFF Local OFF OFF ON External Clock ON OFF OFF Song Out OFF OFF OFF Style Out OFF OFF OFF Keyboard Out OFF ON ON 1 Press and hold the [DEMO] button for longer than a second so that the PC Mode item appears. PC mode oFF 2 Use the dial to select PC1, PC2, or OFF. NOTE • When the PC2 setting is selected the instrument’s style, song, demo, song recording, and lesson features cannot be used. r f NOTE • You can also access the PC Mode item by first pressing the [FUNCTION] button and then using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to locate it (page 82). Remote Control of MIDI Devices You can also use this instrument as a remote control device for the Digital Music Notebook application on your computer (via the USB connection)—controlling playback, stop and transport functions from the k eyboard. ■Remote control keys ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To use the remote control functions, simultaneously hold down the lowest two keys on the keyboard (C1 and C#1) and press the appropriate key (shown below). C#1 C1 C6: Fast forward B5: Start A5: Stop G5: Rewind F5: Top (move to the beginning of the song) E5: Metronome ON/OFF NOTE • Remote control of MIDI devices will function independently of the PC2 mode. 88 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Connecting to a Computer Initial Send This function lets you send the panel setup data to a computer. Before you record performance data to a sequencer application running on your computer, it is a good idea to first send and record the panel setup data before the actual performance data. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 3 Press [+/YES] to send, or press [-/NO] to cancel. r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Initial Send item. Transferring Data between the Computer and Instrument MIDI songs residing on a computer, as well as the 70 MIDI songs and 5 Style files provided on the CD-ROM, can be transferred to the instrument. Backup files can also be transferred from the instrument to the computer and back. Songs and styles transferred to the instrument can be used with the instrument’s lesson and other functions. In order to transfer songs between your computer and the instrument you will need to install the Musicsoft Downloader application and the USBMIDI Driver included on the Accessory CD-ROM on your computer. Refer to the Accessory CDROM Installation Guide on page 92 for installation details. ● Data that can be transferred from a computer to this instrument. • Song Capacity (max.): Flash memory 99 songs (Song 036–) • Data Capacity: Flash memory 373 kb • Data Format: SMF format 0, style file (extension: .sty), Backup File (06PK61.BUP) ● What is SMF (Standard MIDI File)? The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one of the most common and widely compatible sequence formats used for storing sequence data. There are two variations: Format 0 and Format 1. A large number of MIDI devices are compatible with SMF Format 0, and most commercially available MIDI sequence data is provided in SMF Format 0. ■With the Musicsoft Downloader You Can. ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Transfer MIDI songs you have downloaded from the Internet or created on your computer from the computer to the instrument’s flash memory. ⇒ refer to the procedure described on page 90. The procedure for transferring songs included on the Accessory CD-ROM from your computer to the instrument is given as an example. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 89 Connecting to a Computer ● Backup files can be transferred from the instrument to a computer and back. ⇒ refer to the procedure described on page 91. q Click the CD-ROM drive Use the Musicsoft Downloader application with Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher. ■Use Musicsoft Downloader To Transfer Songs From the Accessory CD-ROM To the Instrument’s flash memory ● ● ● ● ● NOTE • If a song or style is being played, stop playback before proceeding. 1 Install the Musicsoft Downloader and USB MIDI driver to your computer, then connect the computer and the instrument (page 94). w Double-click “SongData” Folder and e Click “Open” click a song file. 6 A copy of the selected MIDI song file will appear in the “List of files stored temporarily” at the top of the window. The memory medium will also be displayed at the bottom of the window to specify the destination for the transfer. Click the “Electronic Musical Instruments”, and then “Flash memory.” 2 Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. A start window will appear automatically. 3 Double-click the Musicsoft Downloader shortcut icon that is created on the desktop. This will launch the Musicsoft Downloader application and the main window will appear. NOTE • The instrument cannot be operated while the Musicsoft Downloader is running. 4 Click the “Add File” button and the Add File window will appear. 5 Click the button to the right of “Look in” and select the CD-ROM drive from the dropdown menu that appears. Double-click the “SongData” Folder on the window. Select the file you want to transfer to the instrument, and click “Open”. 90 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual q Click the “Electronic Musical Instruments”, and then “Flash Memory” 7 After selecting the file in the “List of files stored temporarily”, click the downward [Move] button and a confirmation message will appear. Click [OK] and the song will be transferred from the “List of files stored temporarily” to the instrument’s memory. Connecting to a Computer 8 Close the window to end the Musicsoft Downloader. NOTE • End the Musicsoft Downloader to playback the song transferred from your computer. 9 To playback a song stored in flash memory, press the [SONG] button. Use the dial to select the song you want to play, then press the [START/STOP] button to start playback. Style files (files with the “.STY” extension) can be transferred to Flash memory using the same procedure as described above. Style files transferred to the Flash Memory can be loaded into style number 163 and then played (page 74). ■Transfer a backup file from the instrument to a computer ● ● ● You can use the Musicsoft Downloader to transfer “Backup Files” containing backup data (page 56), including the five User Songs stored on the instrument, to a computer. If you click “Electronic Musical Instruments” in the Musicsoft Downloader display, and then “System Drive”, a file named “06PK61.BUP” will appear in the lower right corner of the Musicsoft Downloader display. This is the backup file. For details about how to transmit backup file using the Musicsoft Downloader application, refer to the Online help in the application. NOTE • Preset Song data cannot be transmitted from the instrument. CAUTION • Do not unplug the USB cable during a data transfer. Not only will the data not be transferred and saved, but operation of the memory media may become unstable and its contents may disappear completely when the power is turned on or off. CAUTION • Store data can be lost due to equipment malfunction or improper operation. For safety we recommend that you keep a copy of all important data stored on your computer. • We recommend that you use a power adaptor rather than batteries when transferring data. The data can be corrupted if the batteries fail during the transfer. CAUTION • The backup data, including the five User Songs is transmitted/ received as a single file. As a result, all backup data will be overwritten every time you transmit or receive. Keep this in mind when transferring data. CAUTION • Do not rename the backup file on the computer. If you do so, it will not be recognized when transferred to the instrument. ● To Use transferred Songs For Lessons... In order to use songs (only SMF format 0) transferred from a computer for lessons it is necessary to specify which channels are to be played back as the right-hand and left-hand parts. r f 1 Press the [SONG] button and select the song (036–) residing in flash memory for which you want to set the guide track. 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the R-Part or L-Part item. 4 Use the dial to select the channel you want to play back as the specified right- or left-hand part. We recommend that you select channel 1 for the right-hand part and channel 2 for the left-hand part. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 91 e erenc ef R Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide SPECIAL NOTICES • • • • • • • This CD-ROM is copy-protected. Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with regard to any problems while attempting to copy the CD-ROM or software and cannot be held responsible for the results of attempts to copy the data. The software and this owner’s manual are the exclusive copyrights of Yamaha Corporation. Use of the software and this manual is governed by the license agreement which the purchaser fully agrees to upon breaking the seal of the software packaging. (Please read carefully the Software Licensing Agreement at the end of this manual before installing the application.) Copying of the software or reproduction of this manual in whole or in part by any means is expressly forbidden without the written consent of the manufacturer. Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with regard to the use of the software and documentation and cannot be held responsible for the results of the use of this manual and the software. This disk containing the software is not meant for use with an audio/visual system (CD player, DVD player, etc.). Do not attempt to use the disk on equipment other than a computer. Future upgrades of application and system software and any changes in specifications and functions will be announced separately. The screen displays as illustrated in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes, and may appear somewhat different from the screens which appear on your computer. Important Notices about the CD-ROM ● Data Types This CD-ROM includes application software. Please refer to page 94 for software installation instructions. CAUTION • Do not attempt to play this CD-ROM on an audio CD player. The result high-volume noise can potentially cause hearing damage or damage your CD player and speakers. ● Operating System (OS) The applications in this CD-ROM are provided in versions for Windows operating systems. 92 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide CD-ROM Contents q e r Folder Name Application / Data Name w Contents Musicsoft Downloader This application can be used to download MIDI song data from the Internet and transfer it from the computer to the instrument’s memory. DMN_FlashDemo Flash Demo Digital Music Notebook is an educational content that lets you enjoy music while learning. Full motion demo software which introduces all features of the Digital Music Notebook. DMN_DemoSong Demo Song You can experience Digital Music Notebook functions with the demo song. You need to download and install Digital Music Notebook on your computer prior to using the demo song. Song Book Includes score data for the 30 internal songs provided on the instrument as well as 70 MIDI songs provided on the CD-ROM. The exceptions are songs 1–11, and song 20 which is copyrighted. The scores for songs 9–11 are provided in this manual beginning on page 100. q MSD_ w e SongBook USB-MIDI Driver (Windows 98/Me) r This driver software is necessary to connect MIDI devices to your computer via USB. USBdrv2k USB-MIDI Driver (Windows 2000/XP) SongData MIDI 70 songs These songs can be transferred to the instrument and played or used with the instrument’s functions. StyleData 5 style files These styles can be transferred to the instrument and played or used with the instrument’s functions. In order to view PDF scores, you will need to install Adobe Reader in your computer. You can download the Adobe Reader. Please check the following URL: http://www.adobe.com/ You can obtain the latest version of the Musicsoft Downloader, Digital Music Notebook and USB-MIDI Driver at the following website. http://music.yamaha.com/download/ ■Using the CD-ROM ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Please read the Software License Agreement on page 98 before opening the CD-ROM package. 1 Check the system requirements to make sure that the software will run on your computer. 2 Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. The start window should appear automatically. 3 Install the USB MIDI driver to the com- puter. Refer to “Installing the USB-MIDI Driver” on page 94 for installation and setup instructions. 4 Connect the instrument to the com- puter. The connection procedure is described on page 86. 5 Install the software. Musicsoft Downloader: See page 96. 6 Launch the software. For further software operation refer to the online help supplied with the software. Refer to the “Troubleshooting” on page 97 when you have trouble with installing the driver. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 93 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide System Requirements Application/Data OS CPU Memory Hard Disk Display Musicsoft Downloader Windows 98SE/Me/2000/ XP Home Edition/ XP Professional 233 MHz or higher; Intel® Pentium®/Celeron® processor family 64 MB or more (256 MB or more is recommended) at least 128 MB of free space (at least 512 MB of free space is recommended) 800 x 600 HighColor (16-bit) USB Driver for Windows 98/Me Windows 98/Me Windows 2000/XP Home Edition/XP Professional 32 MB or more (64 MB or more is recommended) at least 2 MB of free space — USB Driver for Windows 2000/XP 166 MHz or higher; Intel® Pentium®/Celeron® processor family 400MHz or higher; Intel® Pentium®/Celeron® Processor family (1GHz or more is recommended) 128 MB or more (256 MB or more is recommended) 1GHz or higher; Intel® Pentium®/Celeron® Processor family (1.4GHz or more is recommended) 256 MB or more Digital Music Notebook Digital Music Notebook (Requirements for playing content with video included.) Windows® XP Professional Edition, SP1a more Windows® XP Home Edition, SP1a more Windows 2000 Professional, SP4 more at least 50 MB of free space 1024 x 768 HighColor (16-bit) You can confirm the latest system requirements at the following website. http://music.yamaha.com/download/ Software Installation ● Uninstall (Removing the Software) Installed software can be removed from your computer as follows: From the Windows Start menu select Start → Settings → Control panel → Add or Remove Applications → Install and Uninstall. Select the item you want to remove and click [Add or Remove]. Follow the on-screen instructions to remove the selected software. NOTE • The actual names of the menu items and buttons will depend on the OS version you are using. ■ Installing the USB-MIDI Driver● ● ● ● In order to be able to communicate with and use MIDI devices connected to your computer, the appropriate driver software must be properly installed on your computer. The USB-MIDI driver allows sequence software and similar applications on your computer to transmit and receive MIDI data to and from MIDI devices via a USB cable. Computer Sequence software USB Cable MIDI device Driver • Windows 98/Me installation ➔ page 95. • Windows 2000 installation ➔ page 95. • Windows XP installation ➔ page 96. Check the drive name of the CD-ROM drive you will be using (D:, E:, Q: etc.) The drive name is displayed beside the CD-ROM icon in your “My Computer” folder. The root directory of the CDROM drive will be D:\ , E:\ , or Q:\ , respectively. 94 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide Installing the driver on Windows 98/Me Installing the driver on Windows 2000 1 Start the computer. 2 Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CD- 1 Start the computer and use the “Adminis- ROM drive. A start window will appear automatically. 3 First, make sure the POWER switch on the instrument is set to OFF, then use a USB cable to connect the USB terminal of the computer to the USB connector of the instrument. When the instrument is turned on, the computer automatically displays the “Add New Hardware Wizard. Otherwise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in the “Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide” section of the Owner’s Manual. For Windows Me users, check the radio button to the left of “Automatic search for a better driver (Recommended)” and click [Next]. The system automatically starts searching and installing the driver. Proceed to Step 8. If the system does not detect the driver, select “Specify the location of the driver (Advanced)” and specify the CD-ROM drive’s root directory to install the driver and click [Next]. Execute the installation by following the onscreen instructions and proceed to Step 8. NOTE • If you are using Windows Me, skip Step 4–7. 4 Click [Next]. The window enables you to select the search method. 5 Check the radio button to the left of “Search for the best driver for your device. (Recommended)”. Click [Next]. The window enables you to select a location in which to install the driver. 6 Check the “Specify a location” box, click “Browse..”, then specify the root directory of the CD-ROM drive and continue the installation. (The CD-ROM drive letter may vary depending on your computer’s configuration. 7 When the system detects the driver on the CD-ROM and is ready for installation, a message is shown on the screen. Make sure that the “YAMAHA USB MIDI Driver” is listed, and click [Next]. The system starts the installation. 8 When installation is complete, a message trator” account to log into Windows. 2 Select [My Computer] ➔ [Control Panel] ➔ [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Driver Signing] ➔ [File Signature Verification], and check the radio button to the left of “Ignore—Install all files, regardless of file signature” and click [OK]. 3 Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CDROM drive. A start window will appear automatically. 4 First, make sure the POWER switch on the MIDI device is set to OFF, then use a USB cable to connect the MIDI device to the computer. After making the connections, turn on the power of the MIDI device. The system automatically launches the Found New Hardware Wizard. Otherwise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in the “Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide” section of the Owner’s Manual. Click [Next]. (Some computers may take a while to display the Wizard window.) 5 Select the radio button for “Search for a suitable driver for my device [recommended]”, then click [Next]. NOTE • If the Wizard panel informs you that “The software you are about to install does not contain a Microsoft digital signature”, click [Yes]. 6 Check the “CD-ROM drives” check box, deselect all other check boxes, then click [Next]. NOTE • If the system prompts you to insert the Windows CD-ROM during detection of the drivers, point to the “USBdrv2k_” folder (e.g., D:\USBdrv2k_) and continue the installation. 7 Deselect the “Install one of the other drivers”, then click [Next]. 8 When the installation is complete, the Wizard displays “Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard”. Click [Finish]. (Some computers may take a while to display the Wizard window.) 9 Restart the computer. The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete. indicating so appears. Click [Finish]. The driver has been installed. NOTE • Some computers may take about ten seconds to show this screen after the installation is complete. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 95 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide Installing the driver on Windows XP 1 Start the computer and use the “Adminis2 3 4 5 6 7 trator” account to log into Windows. Select [Start] ➔ [Control Panel]. If the control panel appears as “Pick a category”, click “Switch to Classic View” in the upper left of the window. All control panels and icons will be displayed. Go to [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Driver Signing Options] and check the radio button to the left of “Ignore” and click [OK]. Click the [OK] button to close System Properties, and then click “X” in the upper right of the window to close the Control Panel. Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CDROM drive. A start window will appear automatically. First, make sure the POWER switch on the MIDI device is set to OFF, then use a USB cable to connect the MIDI device to the computer. After making the connections, turn on the power of the MIDI device. The system launches the Found New Hardware Wizard automatically. Otherwise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in the “Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide” section of the Owner’s Manual. If the system displays “Found New Hardware” in the lower right corner, wait until Wizard window is displayed. (Some computers may take a while to display the window.) If the Wizard window prompts you to specify whether or not to connect to Windows Update, select the radio button for “No, not this time”, then click [Next]. Select the radio button for “Install the software automatically (recommended)”, then click [Next]. NOTE • If during the installation the system displays “...has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows XP”, click [Continue Anyway]. 8 When the installation is complete, the Wizard displays “Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard”. Click [Finish]. (Some computers may take a while to display the Wizard window.) 9 Restart the computer. If the system displays “Found New Hardware” in the lower right corner, wait until the Wizard window is displayed. (Some computers may take a while to display the Wizard window.) The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete. 96 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual ■Installing the Musicsoft Downloader and Digital Music Notebook Applications ● ● ● IMPORTANT • You will need to log in with administrator (root) privileges in order to install Musicsoft Downloader on a computer running Windows 2000 or XP. • You will need to log in with administrator (root) privileges in order to install Digital Music Notebook on a computer running Windows 2000 or XP. IMPORTANT • When installing the Digital Music Notebook, make sure that Internet Explorer 6.0 (with SP1) or higher is installed to your computer. IMPORTANT • Credit card settlement is required to purchase Digital Music Notebook content. Credit card processing may not be possible for some areas, so please check with your local authorities to make sure that your credit card can be used. NOTE • Use of the DMN (Digital Music Notebook) is governed by the SIBELIUS SCORCH LICENSE AGREEMENT, which the purchaser fully agrees to when using the application. Please read carefully the AGREEMENT at the end of this manual before using the application. 1 Insert the Accessory CD-ROM into your computer’s CD-ROM drive. The start window will appear automatically showing software applications. NOTE • If the start window does not appear automatically, double click your “My Computer” folder to open it. Right-click the CD-ROM icon and select “Open” from the pop-up menu. Double click “Start.exe” and proceed to step 2, below. 2 Click [Musicsoft Downloader] or [Digital Music Notebook]. 3 Click the [install] button for Musicsoft downloader, or [Digital Music Notebook Download] button for Digital Music Notebook, and follow the on-screen instructions to install the software. For Digital Music Notebook operating instructions see the help menu: launch the Digital Music Notebook application and click “Help”. For Musicsoft Downloader operating instructions see the Help menu: launch the Musicsoft Downloader application and click “Help”. * You can obtain the latest version of the Musicsoft Downloader at the following website. http://music.yamaha.com/download/ IMPORTANT • Only Musicsoft Downloader can be used to transfer files between this instrument and a computer. No other file transfer application can be used. Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide ■Troubleshooting The driver cannot be installed. • Is the USB cable connected correctly? Check the USB cable connection. Disconnect the USB cable, then connect it again. • Is the USB function enabled on your computer? When you connect the instrument to the computer for the first time, if the “Add New Hardware Wizard” does not appear, the USB function on the computer may be disabled. Perform the following steps. 1 Select [Control Panel] ➔ [System] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Windows 98/Me), or select [Control Panel]* ➔ [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Windows 2000/XP). When controlling the instrument from your computer via USB, the instrument does not operate correctly or no sound is heard. • Did you install the driver? (page 94) • Is the USB cable connected correctly? • Are the volume settings of the instrument, playback device, and application program set to the appropriate levels? • Have you selected an appropriate port in the sequence software? • Are you using the latest USB MIDI driver? The latest driver can be downloaded from the following web site. http://music.yamaha.com/download/ * Classic View only in Windows XP. 2 Make sure that no “!” or “x” marks appear at “Universal serial bus controller” or “USB Root Hub”. If you see an “!” or “x” mark, the USB controller is disabled. • Is any unknown device registered? If driver installation fails, the instrument will be marked as an “Unknown device”, and you will not be able to install the driver. Delete the “Unknown device” by following the steps below. 1 Select [Control Panel] ➔ [System] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Windows 98/Me), or select [Control Panel]* ➔ [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Windows 2000/XP). * Classic View only in Windows XP. 2 Look for “Other devices” in the menu “View devices by type”. 3 If you find “Other devices”, double-click it to extend the tree to look for “Unknown device”. If one appears, select it and click the [Remove] button. 4 Remove the USB cable from the instrument, and make the connection again. 5 Install the driver again. • Windows 98/Me users...... see page 95 • Windows 2000 users........ see page 95 • Windows XP users........... see page 96 Playback response is delayed. • Does your computer satisfy the system requirements? • Is any other application or device driver running? Cannot suspend or resume the computer correctly. • Do not suspend the computer while the MIDI application is running. If you are using Windows 2000, you may not be able to suspend/resume normally, depending on the particular environment (USB Host Controller, etc.). Even so, simply disconnecting and connecting the USB cable will allow you to use the instrument functions again. How can I delete or re-install the driver? [Windows Me/98] 1 When the instrument is recognized correctly, double-click “System” in the Control Panel to open the System window. 2 Double-click the “Device Manager” tab, select “YAMAHA USB MIDI Driver” and delete it. 3 Use the MS-DOS prompt or Explorer to delete the following three files. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 97 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide NOTE • To delete these files using Explorer, select “Folder Options” from the Tool (View) menu, and select “Show all files” (and folders). • \WINDOWS\INF\OTHER\1037.INF • \WINDOWS\SYSTEM\Xgusb.drv • \WINDOWS\SYSTEM\Ymidusb.sys 4 5 6 Disconnect the USB cable. Restart the computer. Re-install the driver. 4. LIMITED WARRANTY ON MEDIA As to SOFTWARE sold on tangible media, Yamaha warrants that the tangible media on which the SOFTWARE is recorded will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of fourteen (14) days from the date of receipt, as evidenced by a copy of the receipt. Yamaha’s entire liability and your exclusive remedy will be replacement of the defective media if it is returned to Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha dealer within fourteen days with a copy of the receipt. Yamaha is not responsible for replacing media damaged by accident, abuse or misapplication. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES ON THE TANGIBLE MEDIA, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. 5. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY ON SOFTWARE ATTENTION SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (“AGREEMENT”) CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE. YOU ARE ONLY PERMITTED TO USE THIS SOFTWARE PURSUANT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THIS AGREEMENT IS BETWEEN YOU (AS AN INDIVIDUAL OR LEGAL ENTITY) AND YAMAHA CORPORATION (“YAMAHA”). BY BREAKING THE SEAL OF THIS PACKAGE YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY, OR OTHERWISE USE THIS SOFTWARE. 1. GRANT OF LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT Yamaha hereby grants you the right to use one copy of the software program(s) and data (“SOFTWARE”) accompanying this Agreement. The term SOFTWARE shall encompass any updates to the accompanying software and data. The SOFTWARE is owned by Yamaha and/or Yamaha’s licensor(s), and is protected by relevant copyright laws and all applicable treaty provisions. While you are entitled to claim ownership of the data created with the use of SOFTWARE, the SOFTWARE will continue to be protected under relevant copyrights. • You may use the SOFTWARE on a single computer. • You may make one copy of the SOFTWARE in machine-readable form for backup purposes only, if the SOFTWARE is on media where such backup copy is permitted. On the backup copy, you must reproduce Yamaha’s copyright notice and any other proprietary legends that were on the original copy of the SOFTWARE. • You may permanently transfer to a third party all your rights in the SOFTWARE, provided that you do not retain any copies and the recipient reads and agrees to the terms of this Agreement. 2. RESTRICTIONS • You may not engage in reverse engineering, disassembly, decompilation or otherwise deriving a source code form of the SOFTWARE by any method whatsoever. • You may not reproduce, modify, change, rent, lease, or distribute the SOFTWARE in whole or in part, or create derivative works of the SOFTWARE. • You may not electronically transmit the SOFTWARE from one computer to another or share the SOFTWARE in a network with other computers. • You may not use the SOFTWARE to distribute illegal data or data that violates public policy. • You may not initiate services based on the use of the SOFTWARE without permission by Yamaha Corporation Copyrighted data, including but not limited to MIDI data for songs, obtained by means of the SOFTWARE, are subject to the following restrictions which you must observe. • Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be used for any commercial purposes without permission of the copyright owner. • Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be duplicated, transferred, or distributed, or played back or performed for listeners in public without permission of the copyright owner. • The encryption of data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be removed nor may the electronic watermark be modified without permission of the copyright owner. 3. TERMINATION This Agreement becomes effective on the day that you receive the SOFTWARE and remains effective until terminated. If any copyright law or provisions of this Agreement is violated, the Agreement shall terminate automatically and immediately without notice from Yamaha. Upon such termination, you must immediately destroy the licensed SOFTWARE, any accompanying written documents and all copies thereof. 98 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of the SOFTWARE is at your sole risk. The SOFTWARE and related documentation are provided “AS IS” and without warranty of any kind. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AS TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS, AND IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SPECIFICALLY, BUT WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING, YAMAHA DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED. 6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY YAMAHA’S ENTIRE OBLIGATION HEREUNDER SHALL BE TO PERMIT USE OF THE SOFTWARE UNDER THE TERMS HEREOF. IN NO EVENT SHALL YAMAHA BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, EXPENSES, LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA OR OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF YAMAHA OR AN AUTHORIZED DEALER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. In no event shall Yamaha’s total liability to you for all damages, losses and causes of action (whether in contract, tort or otherwise) exceed the amount paid for the SOFTWARE. 7. THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE Third party software and data (“THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE”) may be attached to the SOFTWARE. If, in the written materials or the electronic data accompanying the Software, Yamaha identifies any software and data as THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, you acknowledge and agree that you must abide by the provisions of any Agreement provided with the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE and that the party providing the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is responsible for any warranty or liability related to or arising from the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. Yamaha is not responsible in any way for the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE or your use thereof. • Yamaha provides no express warranties as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. IN ADDITION, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. • Yamaha shall not provide you with any service or maintenance as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. • Yamaha is not liable to you or any other person for any damages, including, without limitation, any direct, indirect, incidental or consequential damages, expenses, lost profits, lost data or other damages arising out of the use, misuse or inability to use the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. 8. GENERAL This Agreement shall be interpreted according to and governed by Japanese law without reference to principles of conflict of laws. Any dispute or procedure shall be heard before the Tokyo District Court in Japan. If for any reason a court of competent jurisdiction finds any portion of this Agreement to be unenforceable, the remainder of this Agreement shall continue in full force and effect. 9. COMPLETE AGREEMENT This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to use of the SOFTWARE and any accompanying written materials and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements, written or oral, regarding the subject matter of this Agreement. No amendment or revision of this Agreement will be binding unless in writing and signed by a fully authorized representative of Yamaha. Appendix Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause and Solution When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping sound is temporarily produced. This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical power. When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the instrument. There is no sound even when the keyboard is played or when a song or style is being played back. Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on the rear panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is output. Check the Local Control on/off. (See page 87.) Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard does not produce any sound. • • • • When using the Dictionary function (page 77), the keys in the right hand area are used only for entering the chord root and type. The volume is too soft. The sound quality is poor. The rhythm stops unexpectedly or will not play. The recorded data of the song, etc. does not play correctly. • The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and all panel settings are reset. The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with completely new ones, or use the optional AC adaptor. The style or song does not play back when the [START/STOP] button is pressed. Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF; refer to “External Clock” on page 87. Make sure that the Style Volume (page 83) is set to an appropriate level. The style does not sound properly. Is the split point set at an appropriate key for the cords you are playing? Set the split point at an appropriate key (page 72). Is the “ACMP ON” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show. No rhythm accompaniment plays when the [START/ STOP] button is pressed after selecting style number 138 or a style between 150 and 162 (Pianist). This is not a malfunction. Style number 138 and style numbers 150–162 (Pianist) have no rhythm parts, so no rhythm will play. The other parts will begin playing when you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard if style playback is turned on. Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound seems to be cut off. The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes. If the Dual voice or Split voice is being used and a style or song is playing back at the same time, some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “stolen”) from the accompaniment or song. Some notes don’t sound when playing multiple notes simultaneously on the keyboard, or some notes don’t sound when playing arpeggios. You have exceeded 32 simultaneous notes, which is the maximum polyphony (the maximum number of notes that can be played simultaneously) of the instrument. The instrument will play normally as long as no more than 32 notes are being played at once, both on the keyboard and by any automatic playback functions. The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the opposite effect. For example, pressing the footswitch cuts off the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds. The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. The sound of the voice changes from note to note. This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note. The wrong notes sound when the keyboard is played. Perhaps the performance assistant technology is turned on. Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button to turn it off. The ACMP ON indicator does not appear when the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed. Is the [STYLE] button lit? Always press the [STYLE] button first when you are going to use any style-related function. There is no harmony sound. The harmony effects (01–26) behave differently according to their type. Types 01–05 function when style playback is on, chords are played in the accompaniment range of the keyboard, and a melody is played in the right-hand range. Types 06–26 will function whether style playback is on or off. For types 06 = 12 you need to play two notes at the same time. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 99 Scores This demo is an example of how the Easy Song Arranger can be used to change styles throughout a piece. Song No. 9 q =123 (Function Demo for Easy Song Arranger) Hallelujah Chorus 100 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Scores PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 101 Scores This score is provided with the intent that the pitch will be corrected by the performance assistant technology feature. If you play the “Play These Notes” part using the performance assistant technology feature, the part will be corrected and played so that it matches the backing part. Song No. 10 q =61 (Function Demo for performance assistant technology) Ave Maria P.A.T. Type =CHORD Your Turn. Repeatedly Play the Same Key. 102 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Scores PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 103 Scores This score is provided with the intent that the pitch will be corrected by the performance assistant technology feature. If you play the “Play These Notes” part using the performance assistant technology feature, the part will be corrected and played so that it matches the backing part. Song No. 11 q =108 (Function Demo for performance assistant technology) Nocturne op.9-2 P.A.T. Type =CHORD You Can Even Play the Same Keys! 104 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Scores PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 105 Let’s play the Tabla ■ Instruction Flow: Set the Voice number to 129 (Teen Tal C). Set the Split Voice number to 145 (Harmonium 2). Set the split point to 83. 1 Press the [VOICE] button. Now play the Tabla. Set the octave range for the Split Voice to 0. 6 Press and hold the [SPLIT ON/OFF] but- 2 Use the dial or the number buttons to select 129 (Teen Tal C). 3 Press and hold the [ACMP ON/OFF] but- 7 Use the dial or the number buttons to select the Split Voice number 145 (Harmonium 2). 8 Press the CATEGORY [ ] button twice and “S.Octave” will appear in the display. f ton for longer than a second and “SplitPnt” will appear in the display. ton for longer than a second and “S.Voice” will appear in the display. 4 Use the dial or the number buttons to change the split point to 83. 5 Press the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button and split voice icon will appear in the display. 9 Press the number [0] button to set the octave 0. 10 Play the keyboard. Split point Harmonium 2 Play the Keyboards. Teen Tal C Hold the Keyboards. ● Changing the Tabla type You can change the Tabla type by selecting the Arpeggio type (51–62). Press and hold the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button for longer than a second and select the arpeggio type (51–62). 106 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Voice List ■ Maximum Polyphony ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● The instrument has 32-note maximum polyphony. This means that it can play a maximum of up to 32 notes at once, regardless of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a number of the available notes, so when auto accompaniment is used the total number of available notes for playing on the keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the Split Voice and Song functions. If the maximum polyphony is exceeded, earlier played notes will be cut off and the most recent notes have priority (last note priority). NOTE • The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for each voice. Use these program change numbers when playing the instrument via MIDI from an external device. • Program Numbers 001 to 128 directly relate to MIDI Program Change Numbers 000 to 127. That is, Program Numbers and Program Change Numbers differ by a value of 1. Remember to take this into consideration. • Some voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after the notes have been released while the sustain pedal (footswitch) is held. ● Panel Voice List Bank Select Voice No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) PIANO 000 112 001 Grand Piano 000 112 002 Bright Piano 000 112 007 Harpsichord 000 112 004 Honky-tonk Piano 000 112 003 MIDI Grand Piano 000 113 003 CP 80 E.PIANO 000 114 005 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano 000 113 006 Hyper Tines 000 112 005 Funky Electric Piano 000 112 006 DX Modern Electric Piano 000 114 006 Venus Electric Piano 000 112 008 Clavi ORGAN 000 118 019 Cool! Organ 000 117 019 Cool! Rotor Organ 000 112 017 Jazz Organ 1 000 113 017 Jazz Organ 2 000 112 019 Rock Organ 000 114 019 Purple Organ 000 112 018 Click Organ 000 116 017 Bright Organ 000 127 019 Theater Organ 000 121 020 16'+2' Organ 000 120 020 16'+4' Organ 000 113 020 Chapel Organ 000 112 020 Church Organ 000 112 021 Reed Organ ACCORDION 000 112 022 Musette Accordion 000 113 022 Traditional Accordion 000 113 024 Bandoneon 000 113 023 Modern Harp 000 112 023 Harmonica GUITAR 000 112 025 Classical Guitar 000 112 026 Folk Guitar 000 112 027 Jazz Guitar 000 117 028 60’s Clean Guitar 000 113 026 12Strings Guitar 000 112 028 Clean Guitar 000 113 027 Octave Guitar 000 112 029 Muted Guitar 000 112 030 Overdriven Guitar 000 112 031 Distortion Guitar BASS 000 112 034 Finger Bass 000 112 033 Acoustic Bass 000 112 035 Pick Bass 000 112 036 Fretless Bass 000 112 037 Slap Bass 000 112 039 Synth Bass 000 113 039 Hi-Q Bass 000 113 040 Dance Bass Bank Select Voice No. 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) STRINGS 000 112 049 String Ensemble 000 112 050 Chamber Strings 000 113 050 Slow Strings 000 112 045 Tremolo Strings 000 112 051 Synth Strings 000 112 046 Pizzicato Strings 000 112 041 Violin 000 112 043 Cello 000 112 044 Contrabass 000 112 047 Harp 000 112 106 Banjo 000 112 056 Orchestra Hit CHOIR 000 112 053 Choir 000 113 053 Vocal Ensemble 000 112 055 Air Choir 000 112 054 Vox Humana SAXOPHONE 000 117 067 Sweet! Tenor Sax 000 113 065 Sweet! Soprano Sax 000 112 067 Tenor Sax 000 112 066 Alto Sax 000 112 065 Soprano Sax 000 112 068 Baritone Sax 000 114 067 Breathy Tenor Sax 000 112 072 Clarinet 000 112 069 Oboe 000 112 070 English Horn 000 112 071 Bassoon TRUMPET 000 115 057 Sweet! Trumpet 000 112 057 Trumpet 000 112 058 Trombone 000 113 058 Trombone Section 000 112 060 Muted Trumpet 000 112 061 French Horn 000 112 059 Tuba BRASS 000 112 062 Brass Section 000 113 062 Big Band Brass 000 113 063 80’s Brass 000 119 062 Mellow Horns 000 114 063 Techno Brass 000 112 063 Synth Brass FLUTE 000 114 074 Sweet! Flute 000 113 076 Sweet! Pan Flute 000 112 074 Flute 000 112 073 Piccolo 000 112 076 Pan Flute 000 112 075 Recorder 000 112 080 Ocarina SYNTH LEAD 000 112 081 Square Lead 000 112 082 Sawtooth Lead PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 107 Voice List Voice No. 099 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 000 115 082 Analogon 000 119 082 Fargo 000 112 099 Star Dust 000 112 086 Voice Lead 000 112 101 Brightness SYNTH PAD 000 112 092 Xenon Pad 000 112 095 Equinox 000 112 089 Fantasia 000 113 090 Dark Moon 000 113 101 Bell Pad PERCUSSION 000 112 012 Vibraphone 000 112 013 Marimba 000 112 014 Xylophone 000 112 115 Steel Drums 000 112 009 Celesta 000 112 011 Music Box 000 112 015 Tubular Bells 000 112 048 Timpani DRUM KITS 127 000 001 Standard Kit 1 127 000 002 Standard Kit 2 127 000 009 Room Kit 127 000 017 Rock Kit 127 000 025 Electronic Kit 127 000 026 Analog Kit 127 000 113 Dance Kit 127 000 033 Jazz Kit 127 000 041 Brush Kit 127 000 049 Symphony Kit 126 000 001 SFX Kit 1 126 000 002 SFX Kit 2 ARPEGGIO 126 000 116 Teen Tal C 126 000 116 Teen Tal F 126 000 116 Teen Tal A 126 000 116 Dadra D 126 000 116 Dadra E 126 000 116 Dadra G 000 112 081 Synth Sequence 000 096 082 Chord Sequence 000 000 081 Square Pulse 000 113 063 Trance 000 114 063 Synth Echo 000 112 001 Piano Arpeggio 000 117 028 Guitar Chord 000 112 025 Guitar Arpeggio 127 000 002 Massive Percussion INDIAN 000 113 021 Harmonium 1 (Single Reed) 000 114 021 Harmonium 2 (Double Reed) 000 115 021 Harmonium 3 (Triple Reed) 000 117 074 Bansuri 000 112 105 Sitar 1 000 113 105 Sitar 2 000 115 105 Sarod 000 114 105 Tanpura 126 000 116 Tabla Kit 126 000 115 Indian Kit ● XGlite Voice/XGlite Optional Voice* List Bank Select Voice No. 154 155 156 157 158 159 108 MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) PIANO 000 000 001 Grand Piano 000 001 001 Grand Piano KSP 000 040 001 Piano Strings 000 041 001 Dream 000 000 002 Bright Piano 000 001 002 Bright Piano KSP PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Voice No. 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 *170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 000 000 003 Electric Grand Piano 000 001 003 Electric Grand Piano KSP 000 032 003 Detuned CP80 000 000 004 Honky-tonk Piano 000 001 004 Honky-tonk Piano KSP 000 000 005 Electric Piano 1 000 001 005 Electric Piano 1 KSP 000 032 005 Chorus Electric Piano 1 000 000 006 Electric Piano 2 000 001 006 Electric Piano 2 KSP 000 032 006 Chorus Electric Piano 2 000 041 006 DX + Analog Electric Piano 000 000 007 Harpsichord 000 001 007 Harpsichord KSP 000 035 007 Harpsichord 2 000 000 008 Clavi 000 001 008 Clavi KSP CHROMATIC 000 000 009 Celesta 000 000 010 Glockenspiel 000 000 011 Music Box 000 064 011 Orgel 000 000 012 Vibraphone 000 001 012 Vibraphone KSP 000 000 013 Marimba 000 001 013 Marimba KSP 000 064 013 Sine Marimba 000 097 013 Balimba 000 098 013 Log Drums 000 000 014 Xylophone 000 000 015 Tubular Bells 000 096 015 Church Bells 000 097 015 Carillon 000 000 016 Dulcimer 000 035 016 Dulcimer 2 000 096 016 Cimbalom 000 097 016 Santur ORGAN 000 000 017 Drawbar Organ 000 032 017 Detuned Drawbar Organ 000 033 017 60’s Drawbar Organ 1 000 034 017 60’s Drawbar Organ 2 000 035 017 70’s Drawbar Organ 1 000 037 017 60’s Drawbar Organ 3 000 040 017 16+2'2/3 000 064 017 Organ Bass 000 065 017 70’s Drawbar Organ 2 000 066 017 Cheezy Organ 000 067 017 Drawbar Organ 2 000 000 018 Percussive Organ 000 024 018 70’s Percussive Organ 000 032 018 Detuned Percussive Organ 000 033 018 Light Organ 000 037 018 Percussive Organ 2 000 000 019 Rock Organ 000 064 019 Rotary Organ 000 065 019 Slow Rotary 000 066 019 Fast Rotary 000 000 020 Church Organ 000 032 020 Church Organ 3 000 035 020 Church Organ 2 000 040 020 Notre Dame 000 064 020 Organ Flute 000 065 020 Tremolo Organ Flute 000 000 021 Reed Organ 000 040 021 Puff Organ 000 000 022 Accordion 000 000 023 Harmonica 000 032 023 Harmonica 2 000 000 024 Tango Accordion 000 064 024 Tango Accordion 2 GUITAR 000 000 025 Nylon Guitar 000 043 025 Velocity Guitar Harmonics 000 096 025 Ukulele Voice List Voice No. 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 *279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 000 000 026 Steel Guitar 000 035 026 12-string Guitar 000 040 026 Nylon & Steel Guitar 000 041 026 Steel Guitar with Body Sound 000 096 026 Mandolin 000 000 027 Jazz Guitar 000 032 027 Jazz Amp 000 000 028 Clean Guitar 000 032 028 Chorus Guitar 000 000 029 Muted Guitar 000 040 029 Funk Guitar 000 041 029 Muted Steel Guitar 000 045 029 Jazz Man 000 000 030 Overdriven Guitar 000 043 030 Guitar Pinch 000 000 031 Distortion Guitar 000 040 031 Feedback Guitar 000 041 031 Feedback Guitar 2 000 000 032 Guitar Harmonics 000 065 032 Guitar Feedback 000 066 032 Guitar Harmonics 2 BASS 000 000 033 Acoustic Bass 000 040 033 Jazz Rhythm 000 045 033 Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass 000 000 034 Finger Bass 000 018 034 Finger Dark 000 040 034 Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar 000 043 034 Finger Slap Bass 000 045 034 Finger Bass 2 000 065 034 Modulated Bass 000 000 035 Pick Bass 000 028 035 Muted Pick Bass 000 000 036 Fretless Bass 000 032 036 Fretless Bass 2 000 033 036 Fretless Bass 3 000 034 036 Fretless Bass 4 000 000 037 Slap Bass 1 000 032 037 Punch Thumb Bass 000 000 038 Slap Bass 2 000 043 038 Velocity Switch Slap 000 000 039 Synth Bass 1 000 040 039 Techno Synth Bass 000 000 040 Synth Bass 2 000 006 040 Mellow Synth Bass 000 012 040 Sequenced Bass 000 018 040 Click Synth Bass 000 019 040 Synth Bass 2 Dark 000 040 040 Modular Synth Bass 000 041 040 DX Bass STRINGS 000 000 041 Violin 000 008 041 Slow Violin 000 000 042 Viola 000 000 043 Cello 000 000 044 Contrabass 000 000 045 Tremolo Strings 000 008 045 Slow Tremolo Strings 000 040 045 Suspense Strings 000 000 046 Pizzicato Strings 000 000 047 Orchestral Harp 000 040 047 Yang Chin 000 000 048 Timpani ENSEMBLE 000 000 049 Strings 1 000 003 049 Stereo Strings 000 008 049 Slow Strings 000 035 049 60’s Strings 000 040 049 Orchestra 000 041 049 Orchestra 2 000 042 049 Tremolo Orchestra 000 045 049 Velocity Strings 000 000 050 Strings 2 000 003 050 Stereo Slow Strings 000 008 050 Legato Strings Voice No. 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 000 040 050 Warm Strings 000 041 050 Kingdom 000 000 051 Synth Strings 1 000 000 052 Synth Strings 2 000 000 053 Choir Aahs 000 003 053 Stereo Choir 000 032 053 Mellow Choir 000 040 053 Choir Strings 000 000 054 Voice Oohs 000 000 055 Synth Voice 000 040 055 Synth Voice 2 000 041 055 Choral 000 064 055 Analog Voice 000 000 056 Orchestra Hit 000 035 056 Orchestra Hit 2 000 064 056 Impact BRASS 000 000 057 Trumpet 000 032 057 Warm Trumpet 000 000 058 Trombone 000 018 058 Trombone 2 000 000 059 Tuba 000 000 060 Muted Trumpet 000 000 061 French Horn 000 006 061 French Horn Solo 000 032 061 French Horn 2 000 037 061 Horn Orchestra 000 000 062 Brass Section 000 035 062 Trumpet & Trombone Section 000 000 063 Synth Brass 1 000 020 063 Resonant Synth Brass 000 000 064 Synth Brass 2 000 018 064 Soft Brass 000 041 064 Choir Brass REED 000 000 065 Soprano Sax 000 000 066 Alto Sax 000 040 066 Sax Section 000 000 067 Tenor Sax 000 040 067 Breathy Tenor Sax 000 000 068 Baritone Sax 000 000 069 Oboe 000 000 070 English Horn 000 000 071 Bassoon 000 000 072 Clarinet PIPE 000 000 073 Piccolo 000 000 074 Flute 000 000 075 Recorder 000 000 076 Pan Flute 000 000 077 Blown Bottle 000 000 078 Shakuhachi 000 000 079 Whistle 000 000 080 Ocarina SYNTH LEAD 000 000 081 Square Lead 000 006 081 Square Lead 2 000 008 081 LM Square 000 018 081 Hollow 000 019 081 Shroud 000 064 081 Mellow 000 065 081 Solo Sine 000 066 081 Sine Lead 000 000 082 Sawtooth Lead 000 006 082 Sawtooth Lead 2 000 008 082 Thick Sawtooth 000 018 082 Dynamic Sawtooth 000 019 082 Digital Sawtooth 000 020 082 Big Lead 000 096 082 Sequenced Analog 000 000 083 Calliope Lead 000 065 083 Pure Lead 000 000 084 Chiff Lead 000 000 085 Charang Lead 000 064 085 Distorted Lead PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 109 Voice List Voice No. 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 110 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 000 000 086 Voice Lead 000 000 087 Fifths Lead 000 035 087 Big Five 000 000 088 Bass & Lead 000 016 088 Big & Low 000 064 088 Fat & Perky 000 065 088 Soft Whirl SYNTH PAD 000 000 089 New Age Pad 000 064 089 Fantasy 000 000 090 Warm Pad 000 000 091 Poly Synth Pad 000 000 092 Choir Pad 000 066 092 Itopia 000 000 093 Bowed Pad 000 000 094 Metallic Pad 000 000 095 Halo Pad 000 000 096 Sweep Pad SYNTH EFFECTS 000 000 097 Rain 000 065 097 African Wind 000 066 097 Carib 000 000 098 Sound Track 000 027 098 Prologue 000 000 099 Crystal 000 012 099 Synth Drum Comp 000 014 099 Popcorn 000 018 099 Tiny Bells 000 035 099 Round Glockenspiel 000 040 099 Glockenspiel Chimes 000 041 099 Clear Bells 000 042 099 Chorus Bells 000 065 099 Soft Crystal 000 070 099 Air Bells 000 071 099 Bell Harp 000 072 099 Gamelimba 000 000 100 Atmosphere 000 018 100 Warm Atmosphere 000 019 100 Hollow Release 000 040 100 Nylon Electric Piano 000 064 100 Nylon Harp 000 065 100 Harp Vox 000 066 100 Atmosphere Pad 000 000 101 Brightness 000 000 102 Goblins 000 064 102 Goblins Synth 000 065 102 Creeper 000 067 102 Ritual 000 068 102 To Heaven 000 070 102 Night 000 071 102 Glisten 000 096 102 Bell Choir 000 000 103 Echoes 000 000 104 Sci-Fi WORLD 000 000 105 Sitar 000 032 105 Detuned Sitar 000 035 105 Sitar 2 000 097 105 Tamboura 000 000 106 Banjo 000 028 106 Muted Banjo 000 096 106 Rabab 000 097 106 Gopichant 000 098 106 Oud 000 000 107 Shamisen 000 000 108 Koto 000 096 108 Taisho-kin 000 097 108 Kanoon 000 000 109 Kalimba 000 000 110 Bagpipe 000 000 111 Fiddle 000 000 112 Shanai PERCUSSIVE 000 000 113 Tinkle Bell PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Voice No. 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 000 096 113 Bonang 000 097 113 Altair 000 098 113 Gamelan Gongs 000 099 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs 000 100 113 Rama Cymbal 000 000 114 Agogo 000 000 115 Steel Drums 000 097 115 Glass Percussion 000 098 115 Thai Bells 000 000 116 Woodblock 000 096 116 Castanets 000 000 117 Taiko Drum 000 096 117 Gran Cassa 000 000 118 Melodic Tom 000 064 118 Melodic Tom 2 000 065 118 Real Tom 000 066 118 Rock Tom 000 000 119 Synth Drum 000 064 119 Analog Tom 000 065 119 Electronic Percussion 000 000 120 Reverse Cymbal SOUND EFFECTS 000 000 121 Fret Noise 000 000 122 Breath Noise 000 000 123 Seashore 000 000 124 Bird Tweet 000 000 125 Telephone Ring 000 000 126 Helicopter 000 000 127 Applause 000 000 128 Gunshot 064 000 001 Cutting Noise 064 000 002 Cutting Noise 2 064 000 004 String Slap 064 000 017 Flute Key Click 064 000 033 Shower 064 000 034 Thunder 064 000 035 Wind 064 000 036 Stream 064 000 037 Bubble 064 000 038 Feed 064 000 049 Dog 064 000 050 Horse 064 000 051 Bird Tweet 2 064 000 056 Maou 064 000 065 Phone Call 064 000 066 Door Squeak 064 000 067 Door Slam 064 000 068 Scratch Cut 064 000 069 Scratch Split 064 000 070 Wind Chime 064 000 071 Telephone Ring 2 064 000 081 Car Engine Ignition 064 000 082 Car Tires Squeal 064 000 083 Car Passing 064 000 084 Car Crash 064 000 085 Siren 064 000 086 Train 064 000 087 Jet Plane 064 000 088 Starship 064 000 089 Burst 064 000 090 Roller Coaster 064 000 091 Submarine 064 000 097 Laugh 064 000 098 Scream 064 000 099 Punch 064 000 100 Heartbeat 064 000 101 Footsteps 064 000 113 Machine Gun 064 000 114 Laser Gun 064 000 115 Explosion 064 000 116 Firework The voice number with an asterisk (*) is XGlite optional voice. Drum Kit List • “ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”. • Each percussion voice uses one note. • The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard Note # and Note. For example, in “117: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H” (Note# 36/ Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0). • Key Off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released. • Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 ... 4) cannot be played simultaneously. (They are designed to be played alternately with each other.) Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate Note# C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 A#5 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Note# 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Off Group 3 3 4 4 O O O 1 1 1 O O O 2 2 117 127/000/001 118 127/000/002 119 127/000/009 120 127/000/017 121 127/000/025 122 127/000/026 Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Side Stick Snare Hand Clap Snare Tight Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal Snare Roll 2 Snare Noisy Snare Soft 2 Open Rim Shot H Short Kick Tight Short Kick Short Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2 Snare Snappy Electro Snare Noisy 4 Kick Tight 2 Kick 3 Kick Tight 2 Kick 2 Kick Gate Kick Gate Kick Gate Heavy Kick Analog Short Kick Analog Side Stick Analog Snare Analog Snare Short Snare Snappy Snare Rock Snare Noisy 2 Snare Tight H Snare Tight Snappy Tom Room 1 Snare Rock Rim Tom Rock 1 Snare Noisy 3 Tom Electro 1 Tom Room 2 Tom Rock 2 Tom Electro 2 Tom Room 3 Tom Rock 3 Tom Electro 3 Tom Room 4 Tom Room 5 Tom Rock 4 Tom Rock 5 Tom Electro 4 Tom Electro 5 Tom Room 6 Tom Rock 6 Tom Electro 6 Snare Analog 2 Tom Analog 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog Tom Analog 2 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 2 Tom Analog 3 Hi-Hat Open Analog Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 5 Crash Analog Tom Analog 6 Cowbell Analog Conga Analog H Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Maracas 2 Claves 2 Scratch H 2 Scratch L 2 Scratch H 2 Scratch L 3 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 111 Drum Kit List Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate Note# C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 A#5 C6 112 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Note# 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Off Group 3 3 4 4 O O O 1 1 1 O O O PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 2 2 117 127/000/001 123 127/000/113 124 127/000/033 125 127/000/041 126 127/000/049 127 126/000/001 128 126/000/002 Standard Kit 1 Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Side Stick Snare Hand Clap Snare Tight Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Reverse Cymbal Hi Q 2 Snare Techno Kick Techno Q Rim Gate Kick Techno L Kick Techno Side Stick Analog Snare Clap Snare Dry Tom Analog 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog3 Tom Analog 2 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 4 Tom Analog 3 Hi-Hat Open Analog 2 Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 5 Crash Analog Tom Analog 6 Cowbell Analog Conga Analog H Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Maracas 2 Snare Jazz H Brush Slap 2 Kick Soft 2 Gran Cassa Gran Cassa Mute Kick Jazz Kick Small Snare Jazz L Brush Slap 3 Band Snare Snare Jazz M Tom Jazz 1 Brush Tap 2 Band Snare 2 Tom Brush 1 Tom Jazz 1 Tom Jazz 2 Tom Brush 2 Tom Jazz 2 Tom Jazz 3 Tom Brush 3 Tom Jazz 3 Tom Jazz 4 Tom Jazz 5 Tom Brush 4 Tom Jazz 4 Tom Brush 5 Tom Jazz 5 Hand Cymbal Tom Brush 6 Tom Jazz 6 Hand Cymbal Short Tom Jazz 6 Cutting Noise Phone Call Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak Door Slam String Slap Scratch Cut Scratch H 3 Wind Chime Telephone Ring 2 Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition Car Tires Squeal Car Passing Car Crash Siren Hand Cymbal 2 Train Jet Plane Hand Cymbal 2 Short Starship Burst Roller Coaster Submarine Shower Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Feed Laugh Scream Punch Heartbeat Footsteps Dog Horse Bird Tweet 2 Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion Firework Claves 2 Scratch H 2 Scratch L 3 Maou Drum Kit List Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Note# C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 A#5 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Note# 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 152 126/000/116 Tabla Kit (Panel) A Tabla na A Tabla tin A Tabla Center tin A Tabla ti 01 A Tabla ti 02 A Tabla ri A Tabla kat A Tabla tu Open Baya Mid Baya Press Baya Bend Baya Slow Bend Baya Fast Click Open Click G Low Tabla Tharang G# Low Tabla Tharang A Low Tabla Tarang A# Low Tabla Tarang B Low Tabla Tarang C Low Tabla Tarang C# Low Tabla Tarang D Low Tabla Tarang D# Low Tabla Tarang E Low Tabla Tarang F Low Tabla Tarang F# Low Tabla Tarang G Low Tabla Tarang G# Low Tabla Tarang A Low Tabla Tarang A# Low Tabla Tarang B Low Tabla Tarang C Tabla na C Tabla tin C Tabla Center tin C Tabla ti 01 C Tabla ti 02 C Tabla ri C Tabla kat C Tabla tu D Tabla na D Tabla tin D Tabla Center tin D Tabla ti 01 D Tabla ti 02 D Tabla ri D Tabla kat D Tabla tu E Tabla na E Tabla tin E Tabla Center tin E Tabla ti 01 E Tabla ti 02 E Tabla ri E Tabla kat E Tabla tu F Tabla na F Tabla tin F Tabla Center tin F Tabla ti 01 F Tabla ti 02 F Tabla ri F Tabla kat F Tabla tu G Tabla na G Tabla tin G Tabla Center tin G Tabla ti 01 G Tabla ti 02 G Tabla ri G Tabla kat G Tabla tu 153 126/000/115 Alternate Group 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Indian Kit (Panel) Hand Clap Dafli Open Dafli Slap Dafli Rim Duff Open Duff Slap Duff Rim Hatheli Long Hatheli Short Baya ge Baya ke Baya ghe Baya ka Tabla na Tabla tin Tablabaya dha Dhol 1 Open Dhol 1 Slap Dhol 1 Mute Dhol 1 Open Slap Dhol 1 Roll Dandia Short Dandia Long Chutki Chipri Khanjira Open Khanjira Slap Khanjira Mute Khanjira Bendup Khanjira Benddown Dholak 1 Open Dholak 1 Mute Dholak 1 Slap Dhol 2 Open Dhol 2 Slap Dhol 2 Rim Mridangam na Mridangam din Mridangam ki Mridangam ta Mridangam Chapu Mridangam Lo Closed Mridangam Lo Open Chimta Normal Chimta Ring Dholki Hi Open Dholki Hi Mute Dholki Lo Open Dholki Hi Slap Dholki Lo Slide Khol Open Khol Slide Khol Mute Manjira Open Manjira Close Jhanji Open Jhanji Close Mondira Open Mondira Close Bhangra Scat 1 Bhangra Scat 2 Bhangra Scat 3 Bhangra Scat 4 Khomokh Normal Khomokh Mute Khomokh Mltatk Thavil Open Thavil Slap Thavil Mute Khartaal Dholak 2 Open Dholak 2 Slide Dholak 2 Rim 1 Dholak 2 Rim 2 Dholak 2 Ring Dholak 2 Slap Dholak 2 Body — 126/000/117 Alternate Group Tabla Kit — 126/000/040 Indian Kit Alternate Group 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 3 Baya ke / ge (Velocity 1-47 / 48-127) 5 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 9 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 12 13 14 Baya ka / ghe (Velocity 1-47 / 48-127) Tabla ne / na (Velocity 1-47 / 48-127) 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 Tabla ne / tin (Velocity 1-47 / 48-127) 18 18 Tabla ne / di (Velocity 1-47 / 48-127) Hateli Long Hateli Short Baya ge Baya ke Baya ghe Baya ka Tabla na Tabla tin Tablabaya dha Tabla tun Tablabaya dhin Tabla di Tablabaya dhe Tabla ti Tabla ne Tabla taran Tabla tak Chipri Kanjira Open Kanjira Slap Kanjira Mute Kanjira Bend up Kanjira Bend down Dholak Open Dholak Mute Dholak Slap Dhol Open Dhol Mute Dhol Slap Dhol Slide Mridangam Normal Mridangam Open Mridangam Mute Mridangam Slap Mridangam Rim Chimta Open Chimta Normal Chimta Ring Dholki Open Dholki Mute Dholki Slap Dholki Slide Dholki Rim Khol Open Khol Slide Khol Mute Manjira Open Manjira Close Jhanji Open Jhanji Close Mondira Open Mondira Close Mridang Open Mridang Mute Mridang Rim Mridang Slide Khomokh Normal Khomokh Mute Khomokh Mltatk Madal-A2 Madal-A#2 Madal-B2 Madal-C3 Madal-C#3 Madal-D3 Madal-D#3 Madal-E3 Madal-F3 Madal-F#3 Madal-G3 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 13 13 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 113 Style List Style No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 114 Style Name 8BEAT 8BeatModern Cool8Beat 60’sGuitarPop 8BeatAdria 60’s8Beat BubblegumPop BritPopSwing 8Beat OffBeat 60’sRock HardRock RockShuffle 8BeatRock 16BEAT 16Beat PopShuffle1 PopShuffle2 GuitarPop 16BeatUptempo KoolShuffle JazzRock HipHopLight BALLAD PianoBallad LoveSong 6/8ModernEP 6/8SlowRock 6/8OrchBallad OrganBallad PopBallad 16BeatBallad1 16BeatBallad2 DANCE EuroTrance Ibiza DreamDance NewHipHop PopR&B TrancePop ChartPop HouseMusik SwingHouse TechnoPolis Clubdance ClubLatin Garage1 Garage2 TechnoParty UKPop HipHopGroove HipShuffle HipHopPop DISCO 70’sDisco1 70’sDisco2 LatinDisco DiscoPhilly SaturdayNight DiscoChocolate DiscoHands PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Style No. 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 Style Name SWING&JAZZ BigBandFast BigBandMedium BigBandBallad BigBandShuffle JazzClub Swing1 Swing2 OrchestraSwing Five/Four JazzBallad Dixieland Ragtime AfroCuban Charleston R&B Soul DetroitPop1 60’sRock&Roll 6/8Soul ModernR&B CrocoTwist Rock&Roll DetroitPop2 BoogieWoogie ComboBoogie 6/8Blues COUNTRY Country8Beat CountryPop CountrySwing CountryBallad Country2/4 CowboyBoogie CountryShuffle Bluegrass INDIAN Bolly Mix 1 Bolly Mix 2 Indian Pop Bhangra Boliyan Goan Pop Garba Rajstahan Qawwali Bhajan Tamil Kerala LATIN BrazilianSamba BossaNova PopBossa Tijuana DiscoLatin Mambo Salsa Beguine GuitarRumba RumbaFlamenco RumbaIsland Reggae Style No. 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 Style Name BALLROOM VienneseWaltz EnglishWaltz Slowfox Foxtrot Quickstep Tango Pasodoble Samba ChaChaCha Rumba Jive TRAD/WORLD USMarch 6/8March GermanMarch PolkaPop OberPolka Tarantella Showtune ChristmasSwing ChristmasWaltz ScottishReel Hawaiian WALTZ ItalianWaltz MariachiWaltz GuitarSerenade SwingWaltz JazzWaltz1 JazzWaltz2 CountryWaltz OberWaltzer Musette CHILDREN Learning2/4 Learning4/4 Learning6/8 Fun 3/4 Fun 4/4 PIANIST Stride PianoBlues1 PianoBlues2 PianoRag PianoRock&Roll PianoBoogie PianoJazzWaltz PianoJazzBld Arpeggio Musical SlowRock 8BtPianoBallad PianoSwing Arpeggio List Arpeggio No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 Arpeggio Name UpOct1 DownOct1 UpDnOct2 SynArp1 SynArp2 SyncEcho PulsLine Random Down&Up SuperArp AcidLine TekEcho VelGruv Trance1 Trance2 SynChord PfArp PfBallad PfChd8th PfShfl PfRock Clavi ChordUp ChdDance Salsa1 Salsa2 Reggae Strum GuitChd1 GuitChd2 GuitChd3 GuitArp FngrPck1 FngrPck2 Samba SlapBs AcidBs TranceBs LatinBs FunkyBs PercArp Perc1 Perc2 African Tamb R&B Funk HipHop Latin Arabic TeenTalC TeenTalD TeenTalE TeenTalF TeenTalG TeenTalA Dadra C Dadra D Dadra E Dadra F Dadra G Dadra A PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 115 Music Database List MDB No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 116 Song Name POP AlvFever BoySumer CoinLane Croco Rk DayPdise DwnTown EasySday GoMyWay HighTide HoldDown HowDeep! HurryLuv I breath I’m Torn Imagine Infatuat ISurvive JustCall JustWay LeadPack LoveFeel LoveMeT LveMeDo Mi Shell My Baby NikitTrp NoMatter ProudGtr RainOnMe SailngSx SeeAgain Sept.Pop SultanSw Sure SweetLrd ThnkMsic TitanicH UNeedLv UptnGirl WantToBe WatchGrl WhatALoo WhitePle WhleAgn Woman YelowSub YesterPf ROCK DavAgain JumpRock OyComCha PickUpPc RdRiverR SatsfyGt Sheriff SmokeWtr TwistAgn VenusPop DANCE 2 of Us B Leave Back St Crockett DialEmma DsrtRose PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual MDB No. 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 Song Name FunkyTwn Kids KillSoft Nine PM SingBack StrandD BALLAD AdelineB ArgenCry BeautBdy Bl Bayou CatMemry CavaSolo E Weiss ElizSere ElvGhett Feeling Fly Away Fnl Date GreenSlv GtCncert HrdToSay IBThere LonlyPan MBoxDnce Mn Rivr My Song NorwWood OnMyMnd OverRbow Red Lady ReleseMe SavingLv Shore Cl SierraMd SilverMn SmokyEye SndOfSil SumerPlc TblWater WhereLov WhisprSx WomanLov R&B AmazingG BoogiePf Clock Rk CU later GreenDor HappyDay JohnnyB MercySax OldHouse RisingSn S Preems ShookUp SuperStv TeddyBer Yeh Orgn SWING & JAZZ Alex Rag Blue Set ChooChoo DayOfW&R HighMoon InMood MDB No. 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 Song Name MistySax MoonLit New York PanthrSw PetiteCl RedRoses SaintMch SatinDll SF Heart ShearJz SplnkyBr SunnySde TstHoney Tunisia TwoFoot5 USPatrol WhatsNew Wild Cat WondrLnd EASY LISTENING Arriva BlackFst ByeBlues CaliBlue CiaoCpri Close2U DAmorStr DolanesM ElCondor Entrtain Frippers LoveLove LuckySax LuvStory MyPrince OSoleMio PupetStr Raindrop RedMouln R’ticGtr Schiwago ShadowGt SingRain SmallWld SpkSoft SpnishEy StrangeN TieRibbn TimeGoes WhteXmas WishStar WondrWld LATIN BambaLa BeHappy! CopaLola DayNight Ipanema JamboMbo MarinaAc MuchoTrp SmoothLt SunOfLif Sunshine Tico Org TrbWave Music Database List MDB No. 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 Song Name COUNTRY ABitMore BlownWnd Bonanza BoxerFlt CntryRds GreenGrs Jambala LondonSt LooseEL TopWorld YlwRose DISCO & PARTY AlhHwaii Babylon Barbados DnceBird FestaMex HandsPty LuvTheme ModrnTlk NxtAlice PalomaFl PubPiano Tijuana Why MCA? BALLROOM BrazilBr CherryTp DanubeWv MantoStr SandmnFx SpainTwn SundyNvr TangoAc Tea4Two TulipWtz YesSirQk TRADITIONAL AlpenTri AnchorAw Balalaik BlkSheep CampRace Ceilidh Cielito CielPari Cl Polka Comrades DAmorCl FrogSong Funiculi GrndClok HappyPlk Herzlin HornPipe JacknJil JinglBel Kufstein MexiHat MickMrch RkABaby RlBarrel Showbiz SnowWtz StarMrch MDB No. 253 254 255 256 Song Name WashPost WdCuttrs XmasWalz YankDood PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 117 Songs Provided On the Supplied CD-ROM File Name 001Nutcr.mid 002Orphe.mid 003Slavo.mid 004Prima.mid 005Medit.mid 006Guill.mid 007Fruhl.mid 008Ungar.mid 009Fruhl.mid 010Dolly.mid 011Cande.mid 012Arabe.mid 013Pasto.mid 014Petit.mid 015Innoc.mid 016Progr.mid 017Taren.mid 018Cheva.mid 019Etude.mid 020Marci.mid 021Turki.mid 022Valse.mid 023Menue.mid 024Momen.mid 025Enter.mid 026Prelu.mid 027Violl.mid 028Angel.mid 029Saraf.mid 030Ameri.mid 031Brown.mid 032Lomon.mid 033Bonni.mid 034Londo.mid 035Banjo.mid 036Vogle.mid 037Lorel.mid 038Funic.mid 039Turke.mid 040Campt.mid 041Jingl.mid 042Muss.mid 043Liebe.mid 044Jesu.mid 045Joy.mid 046Pearl.mid 047Gavot.mid 048Seren.mid 049Menue.mid 050Canon.mid 051Vogel.mid 052Piano.mid 053Surpr.mid 054WildR.mid 055Chans.mid 056Babbi.mid 057RowRo.mid 058Smoky.mid 059WeWis.mid 060ImMai.mid 061Chris.mid 062MaryH.mid 063TenLi.mid 064PopGo.mid 065Twink.mid 066Close.mid 067Cucko.mid 068Augus.mid 069Londo.mid 070Three.mid Song Name Danse des Mirlitons from “The Nutcracker” “Orphée aux Enfers” Ouverture Slavonic Dances op.72-2 La Primavera (from Le Quattro Stagioni) Méditation (Thaïs) Guillaume Tell Frühlingslied Ungarische Tänze Nr.5 Fruhlingsstimmen Dolly’s Dreaming and Awakening La Candeur Arabesque Pastorale Petite Réunion Innocence Progrès Tarentelle La Chevaleresque Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de l’adieu” Marcia alla Turca Turkish March Valse op.64-1 “Petit Chien” Menuett Moments Musicaux op.94-3 The Entertainer Prelude (Wohltemperierte Klavier 1-1) La Viollette Angels Serenade Krasnyj Sarafan America the Beautiful Little Brown Jug Loch Lomond My Bonnie Londonderry Air Ring de Banjo Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär ? Die Lorelei Funiculi Funicula Turkey in the Straw Camptown Races Jingle Bells Muss i denn Liebesträume Nr.3 Jesu, Joy Of Man’s Desiring Ode to Joy Pearl Fisher Gavotte Serenade/Haydn Menuett BWV. Anh.114 Canon in D Der Vogelfanger Bin Ich Ja “Die Xauberflote” Piano Sonate No.14 op.27-2 “Mondschein” The “Surprise” Symphony No.94 To a Wild Rose Chanson du Toreador O Mio Babbino Caro Row Row Row Your Boat (DUET) On Top of Old Smoky (DUET) We Wish You A Merry Christmas (DUET) Im Mai (DUET) O Christmas Tree (DUET) Mary Had a Little Lamb (DUET) Ten Little Indians (DUET) Pop Goes The Weasel (DUET) Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (DUET) Close Your Hands, Open Your Hands (DUET) The Cuckoo (DUET) O du lieber Augustin (DUET) London Bridge (DUET) Three Blind Mice (DUET) The easy song arranger can only be used with songs that include chord data. 118 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Composer P.I. Tchaikovsky J. Offenbach ˇ A. Dvorák A. Vivaldi J. Massenet G. Rossini F. Mendelssohn J. Brahms J. Strauss II T.Oesten J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller F.Chopin L.v. Beethoven W.A. Mozart F.Chopin L. Boccherini F. Schubert S. Joplin J.S. Bach L.Streabbog Traditional Traditional S.A. Ward Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional S.C. Foster Traditional F. Silcher L. Denza Traditional S.C. Foster J.S. Pierpont F. Silcher F. Liszt J.S. Bach L.v. Beethoven G. Bizet F.J. Gossec F.J. Haydn J.S. Bach J. Pachelbel W.A Mozart L.v. Beethoven F.J. Haydn E.A. MacDowell G. Bizet G. Puccini Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional Septimus Winner Traditional Traditional J.J. Rousseau Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional Effect Type List ● Harmony Types No. Harmony Type 01 Duet 02 Trio 03 Block 04 Country 05 Octave 06 Trill 1/4 note 07 Trill 1/6 note 08 Trill 1/8 note 09 Trill 1/12 note 10 Trill 1/16 note 11 Trill 1/24 note 12 Trill 1/32 note 13 Tremolo 1/4 note 14 Tremolo 1/6 note 15 Tremolo 1/8 note 16 Tremolo 1/12 note 17 Tremolo 1/16 note 18 Tremolo 1/24 note 19 Tremolo 1/32 note 20 Echo 1/4 note 21 Echo 1/6 note 22 Echo 1/8 note 23 Echo 1/12 note 24 Echo 1/16 note 25 Echo 1/24 note 26 Echo 1/32 note Description Harmony types 01–05 are pitch-based and add one-, two- or three-note harmonies to the single-note melody played in the right hand. These types sound when chords are played in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard. These Harmony types will also work when playing songs that contain chord data. 3 3 Types 6–26 are rhythm-based effects and add embellishments or delayed repeats in time with the auto accompaniment. These types sound whether the auto accompaniment is on or not; however, the actual speed of the effect depends on the Tempo setting (page 27). The individual note values in each type let you synchronize the effect precisely to the rhythm. Triplet settings are also available: 1/6 = quarter-note triplets, 1/12 = eighth-note triplets, 1/24 = sixteenth-note triplets. • The Trill effect Types (06–12) create two-note trills (alternating notes) when two notes are held. • The Tremolo effect Types (13–19) repeat all held notes (up to four). • The Echo effect Types (20–26) create delayed repeats of each note played. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 ● Reverb Types No. Reverb Type Description 01–03 Hall 1–3 Concert hall reverb. 04–05 Room 1–2 Small room reverb. 06–07 Stage 1–2 Reverb for solo instruments. 08–09 Plate 1–2 Simulated steel plate reverb. Off No effect. 10 ● Chorus Types No. Chorus Type Description 01–02 Chorus 1–2 Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing. 03–04 Flanger 1–2 Pronounced three-phase modulation with a slight metallic sound. Off No effect. 05 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 119 120 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Change Control 0,32 1,11,84 6,38 7,10 64 71-74 91,93 96-97 100-101 Key's Ch's After Touch Pitch Bend Note ON Note OFF Velocity o x o o o o o x o o 0-24 semi x x o 9nH,v=1-127 x 9nH,v=0 *1 *1 0 - 127 : True voice ************** 3 x ************** Default Messages Altered Mode Note Number 1 - 16 x Default Changed Basic Channel o o o o o o o o o o 0-24 semi x x o 9nH,v=1-127 x 0 - 127 0 - 127 3 x x 1 - 16 x Recognized MIDI Implementation Chart Transmitted [ PortaTone ] Model PSR-I425 Function... YAMAHA Sustain Sound Controller Effect Depth RPN Inc,Dec RPN LSB,MSB Data Entry Bank Select Remarks Date:18-MAY-2007 Version : 1.0 MIDI Implementation Chart : True # x x x x o x Aux o(120,126,127) o(121) o(122) o(123-125) o x o o x x x o o 0 - 127 *1 Refer to #2 on page 122. Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO :All Sound OFF :Reset All Cntrls :Local ON/OFF :All Notes OFF Mes- :Active Sense sages:Reset o o x x x o o 0 - 127 ************** System : Clock Real Time: Commands Common : Song Pos. : Song Sel. : Tune System Exclusive Prog Change o : Yes x : No MIDI Implementation Chart PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 121 MIDI Data Format NOTE: 1 By default (factory settings) the instrument ordinarily functions as a 16-channel multi-timbral tone generator, and incoming data does not affect the panel voices or panel settings. However, the MIDI messages listed below do affect the panel voices, auto accompaniment, and songs. • MIDI Master Tuning • System exclusive messages for changing the Reverb Type and Chorus Type. 2 Messages for these control change numbers cannot be transmitted from the instrument itself. However, they may be transmitted when playing the accompaniment, song or using the Harmony effect. 3 Exclusive <GM System ON> F0H, 7EH, 7FH, 09H, 01H, F7H • This message automatically restores all default settings for the instrument, with the exception of MIDI Master Tuning. <MIDI Master Volume> F0H, 7FH, 7FH, 04H, 01H, ll, mm, F7H • This message allows the volume of all channels to be changed simultaneously (Universal System Exclusive). • The values of “mm” is used for MIDI Master Volume. (Values for “ll” are ignored.) <MIDI Master Tuning> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 27H, 30H, 00H, 00H, mm, ll, cc, F7H • This message simultaneously changes the tuning value of all channels. • The values of “mm” and “ll” are used for MIDI Master Tuning. • The default value of “mm” and “ll” are 08H and 00H, respectively. Any values can be used for “n” and “cc”. <Reverb Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 00H, mmH, llH, F7H • mm : Reverb Type MSB • ll : Reverb Type LSB Refer to the Effect Map (page 122) for details. <Chorus Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 20H, mmH, llH, F7H • mm : Chorus Type MSB • ll : Chorus Type LSB Refer to the Effect Map (page 122) for details. 4 When the accompaniment is started, an FAH message is transmitted. When accompaniment is stopped, an FCH message is transmitted. When the clock is set to External, both FAH (accompaniment start) and FCH (accompaniment stop) are recognized. 5 Local ON/OFF <Local ON> Bn, 7A, 7F <Local OFF> Bn, 7A, 00 Value for “n” is ignored. ■ Effect map * When a Type LSB value is received that corresponds to no effect type, a value corresponding to the effect type (coming the closest to the specified value) is automatically set. * The numbers in parentheses in front of the Effect Type names correspond to the number indicated in the display. ● REVERB TYPE LSB TYPE MSB 00 01 02 08 16 17 000 No Effect 001 (01)Hall1 002 Room 003 Stage (06)Stage1 (07)Stage2 004 Plate (08)Plate1 (09)Plate2 005...127 (02)Hall2 18 19 20 (03)Hall3 (04)Room1 (05)Room2 No Effect ● CHORUS TYPE LSB TYPE MSB 000...063 00 Thru 065 Chorus 066 Celeste 067 Flanger 122 02 08 16 17 No Effect 064 068...127 01 No Effect PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual (02)Chorus2 (01)Chorus1 (03)Flanger1 (04)Flanger2 18 19 20 Specifications Keyboards Effects • 61 standard-size keys (C1–C6), with Touch Response. Display • LCD display (backlit) Setup • STANDBY/ON • MASTER VOLUME: MIN–MAX Panel Controls • SONG, VOICE, STYLE, EASY SONG ARRANGER, PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT ON/OFF, ARPEGGIO ON/ OFF, LESSON L/R, LESSON START, METRONOME ON/ OFF, PORTABLE GRAND, DEMO, FUNCTION, MUSIC DATABASE, TOUCH ON/OFF, HARMONY ON/OFF, DUAL ON/OFF, SPLIT ON/OFF, TEMPO/TAP, [0]–[9], [+], [-], CATEGORY, Dial, ASSIGN, (ACMP ON/OFF), A-B REPEAT (SYNC STOP), PAUSE (SYNC START), START/ STOP, REW (INTRO/ENDING/rit.), FF (MAIN/AUTO FILL), REGIST MEMORY ([●] (MEMORY/BANK), [1], [2]), SONG MEMORY (REC, [1]–[5], [A]) Realtime Control • Pitch Bend Wheel • Nobs A, B A: Cutoff, Reverb, Attack, Style Cutoff, Style Tempo B: Resonance, Chorus, Release, Style Resonance Voice • 514 Voices (116 Panel Voices + 10 Indian Voices + 361 XGlite Voices + 12 Drum/SFX Kits +15 Arpeggio Voices) • Polyphony: 32 • DUAL • SPLIT Style • 162 Preset Styles + 1 User Style File • Style Control: ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC STOP, SYNC START, START/STOP, INTRO/ENDING/rit., MAIN/AUTO FILL • Fingering: Multi Finger • Style Volume • 256 Education Feature • Dictionary • Lesson 1–3, Repeat & Learn Registration Memory • 8 banks x 2 types Function • VOLUME: • OVERALL: • • • • • • • • Style Volume, Song Volume Tuning, Transpose, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Pitch Bend Range MAIN VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level, Attack Time, Release Time, Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance DUAL VOICE: Voice, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level, Attack Time, Release Time, Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance SPLIT VOICE: Voice, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level, Attack Time, Release Time, Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance EFFECT: Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Master EQ Type HARMONY: Harmony Type, Harmony Volume ARPEGGIO: SFF Load: PC: MIDI: Reverb: Chorus: Harmony: Arpeggio: 9 types 4 types 26 types 62 types Song • 30 Preset Songs + 5 User Songs + Accessory CD-ROM Songs (70) • Song Clear, Track Clear • Song Volume • Song Control: , A-B REPEAT, PAUSE, REW, FF, START/STOP Performance assistant technology Recording • Song User Song: 5 Songs Recording Tracks: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, STYLE MIDI • Local On/Off • Keyboard Out • Initial Send • Style Out • External Clock • Song Out Auxiliary jacks • PHONES/OUTPUT, DC IN 12V, USB, SUSTAIN Amplifier • 2.5W + 2.5W Speakers • 12cm x 2 + 3cm x 2 Power Consumption • 10W Power Supply • Adaptor: Yamaha PA-3C, or an equivalent • Batteries: Six “D” size, R20P (LR20) or equivalent batteries Dimensions (W x D x H) • 952 x 388 x 146 mm (37-1/2" x 15-1/4" x 5-3/4") Weight • 7.0kg (15 lbs. 7 oz.) (not including batteries) Included Accessories Music Database • • • • • • Music Rest • Accessory CD-ROM • Owner’s Manual Optional Accessories • • • • AC Power Adaptor: Footswitch: Keyboard Stand: Headphones: Yamaha PA-3C, or an equivalent FC4/FC5 L-2C/L-2L HPE-150 * Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. Arpeggio Type, Arpeggio Velocity Style File Load PC Mode Local On/Off, External Clock, Initial Send, Keyboard Out, Style Out, Song Out • METRONOME: Time Signature Numerator, Time Signature Denominator, Metronome Volume • LESSON: Lesson Track (R), Lesson Track (L) • UTILITY: Grade, Demo Cancel PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 123 Index Panel controls and terminals r f +, - .................................................. 12, 58 ........................................................ 57 0–9 .................................................. 12, 58 A-B REPEAT ................................. 13, 78 ACMP ON/OFF ............................. 12, 34 ARPEGGIO ON/OFF .................... 12, 14 ASSIGN ......................................... 12, 18 CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] .......... 12, 58 DC IN 12V ..................................... 10, 13 DEMO ............................................ 12, 40 Dial ................................................. 12, 58 DUAL ON/OFF ............................. 12, 29 EASY SONG ARRANGER .......... 12, 50 FF ................................................... 13, 40 FUNCTION .................................... 12, 82 HARMONY ON/OFF .................... 12, 60 INTRO/ENDING/rit. ...................... 13, 71 KNOB A, B .................................... 12, 18 LESSON L/R ................................. 12, 44 LESSON START ........................... 12, 44 MAIN/AUTO FILL ........................ 13, 71 MASTER VOLUME ..................... 12, 24 MEMORY/BANK, 1, 2 ................. 13, 80 METRONOME ON/OFF ............... 12, 63 MUSIC DATABASE ..................... 12, 49 PAUSE ........................................... 13, 40 PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT ON/OFF ...................................... 12, 23 PHONES/OUTPUT ....................... 11, 13 PITCH BEND wheel ...................... 13, 66 PORTABLE GRAND .................... 12, 31 REC, 1–5, A ................................... 13, 52 REGIST MEMORY ....................... 13, 80 ................................................. 12, 48 REW ............................................... 13, 40 SONG ............................................. 12, 39 SONG MEMORY .......................... 13, 52 SPLIT ON/OFF .............................. 12, 30 STANDBY/ON ...............................11-12 START/STOP ................................ 13, 58 STYLE ........................................... 12, 33 SUSTAIN ....................................... 11, 13 SYNC START ............................... 13, 70 SYNC STOP .................................. 13, 71 TEMPO/TAP .................................. 13, 27 TOUCH ON/OFF ........................... 12, 65 USB ................................................ 13, 86 VOICE ............................................ 12, 28 Alphabetical order A F A-B Repeat ...........................................78 Accessories .............................................7 ACMP ...................................................34 Arpeggio ...............................................14 Arpeggio List ......................................115 Arpeggio Type ......................................15 Arpeggio Velocity ................................67 Attack ....................................................20 Auto Accompaniment Range ................34 Auto-Accompaniment ..........................34 AWM ......................................................6 Filter ..................................................... 19 Filter (Style) ......................................... 20 Flash Memory ...................................... 42 Foot Switch .......................................... 11 Function .......................................... 82-83 G Grade .................................................... 45 H B Backup ..................................................56 Harmony ............................................... 60 Harmony Type ..................................... 60 Harmony Volume ................................. 69 Headphones .......................................... 11 C CD-ROM ..............................................92 Channel Message ..................................86 Chord .................................. 36, 38, 75-76 Chord Dictionary ..................................77 CHORD ROOT ....................................77 CHORD TYPE .....................................77 Chorus .............................................19, 62 Chorus Type .................................62, 119 Computer ..............................................86 Cutoff ....................................................19 D Default Setting ......................................82 Delete (Song Track) ..............................55 Delete (User Song) ...............................55 Demo ....................................................40 Demo Cancel ........................................84 Display ..................................................59 Drum Kit ...............................................32 Drum Kit List ......................................111 Dual Voice ............................................29 Dual Voice Chorus Level .....................83 Dual Voice Octave ................................83 Dual Voice Pan .....................................83 Dual Voice Reverb Level .....................83 Dual Voice Volume ..............................83 E Easy Chords ..........................................38 Easy Song Arranger ..............................50 Effect Map ..........................................122 Effect Type List ..................................119 Evaluation .............................................45 External Song .......................................42 I Initial Send ..................................... 84, 89 Initialization ......................................... 56 K Keyboard Out ....................................... 87 L Lesson .................................................. 43 Load SFF .............................................. 74 Local ..................................................... 87 L-Part ................................................... 91 M Main Voice ........................................... 28 Main Voice Chorus Level .................... 83 Main Voice Octave .............................. 83 Main Voice Pan .................................... 83 Main Voice Reverb Level .................... 83 Main Voice Volume ............................. 83 Master EQ Type ................................... 69 Measure ................................................ 59 Melody Voice ................................. 51, 79 Metronome ........................................... 63 MIDI ..................................................... 85 MIDI Data Format ............................. 122 MIDI Implementation Chart .............. 120 Music Database .................................... 49 Music Database List ........................... 116 Music Rest .............................................. 7 Mute ..................................................... 79 N Notation ................................................ 59 124 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Index O T One Touch Setting ................................ 68 Tempo ...................................................27 Time Denominator ................................64 Time Numerator ...................................64 Time Signature .....................................63 Touch Response ....................................65 Touch Sensitivity ..................................65 Track ............................................... 52-55 Track Clear ...........................................55 Transfer ........................................... 89-91 Transpose ..............................................66 Troubleshooting (Installation) ..............97 Troubleshooting (Instrument) ...............99 Tuning ...................................................66 P PC Mode ............................................... 88 Performance assistant technology ........ 23 Pitch Bend Range ................................. 83 Power Adaptor ..................................... 10 Preset Song ................................39, 41-42 R Recording ............................................. 52 Registration Memory ........................... 80 Release ................................................. 20 Remote control ..................................... 88 Repeat ................................................... 48 Resonance ............................................ 19 Reverb ............................................ 19, 61 Reverb Type ....................................... 119 R-Part ................................................... 91 U USB ......................................................86 USB MIDI Driver ........................... 95-96 User file ................................................91 User Song .............................................52 V S Save (Panel Setting) ............................. 80 Save (User File) .................................... 91 Score ............................................100-105 SMF (Standard MIDI File) ................... 89 Software Licensing Agreement ............ 98 Song ...................................................... 39 Song Clear ............................................ 55 Song List ...................................... 41, 118 Song Memory ....................................... 52 Song Out ............................................... 87 Song Volume ........................................ 78 Specifications ..................................... 123 Split Point ....................................... 30, 72 Split Voice ............................................ 30 Split Voice Chorus Level ..................... 83 Split Voice Octave ............................... 83 Split Voice Pan ..................................... 83 Split Voice Reverb Level ..................... 83 Split Voice Volume .............................. 83 Standard Chords ................................... 38 Style ...........................................33-37, 70 Style File .............................................. 74 Style List ............................................ 114 Style Out ............................................... 87 Style Tempo ......................................... 20 Style Volume ........................................ 72 Sustain (Footswitch) ............................. 11 Synchro Start ............................ 34, 36, 70 Synchro Stop ........................................ 71 System Message ................................... 86 Voice .....................................................28 Voice List ...........................................107 X XGlite .....................................................6 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 125 126 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 THE NETHERLANDS/ BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 FRANCE U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V. Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149, Col. Guadalupe del Moral C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México Tel: 55-5804-0600 Yamaha Musique France BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A. Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 91-639-8888 GREECE BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi, CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL Tel: 011-3704-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 1-4371-7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd. 61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin Tel: 01-2859177 GERMANY Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Switzerland Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 01-383 3990 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/ HUNGARY/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Austria, CEE Department Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-602039025 POLAND Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Sp.z. o.o. Oddzial w Polsce ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland Tel: 022-868-07-57 Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece Tel: 01-228 2160 ASIA INDIA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West), Jingan, Shanghai, China Tel: 021-6247-2211 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA SWEDEN Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong, Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 080-004-0022 Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 MALAYSIA DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 6A DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-78030900 PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 SINGAPORE NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1 N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. #03-11 A-Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015 Tel: 747-4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120 IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 THAILAND OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 891/1 Siam Motors Building, 15-16 floor Rama 1 road, Wangmai, Pathumwan Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2626 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali, Dubai, United Arab Emirates Tel: +971-4-881-5868 Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd. 146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa, Auckland, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-3273 [PK] 40 Yamaha Home Keyboards Home Page (English Only) http://music.yamaha.com/homekeyboard Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2007 Yamaha Corporation WK62010 XXXPOXXX.X-01A0 Printed in China